Roland Musical Instrument Vs 880 User Guide

Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “IMPORTANT SAFETY

INSTRUCTIONS” (p. 2), “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” (p. 3), and “IMPORTANT

NOTES” (p. 11). These sections provide important information concerning the proper

operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a

good grasp of every feature provided by your new unit, this manual should be read

in its entirety. The manual should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient

reference.

PHONES

FOOT

SWITCH

OUT

OUT THRU

SCSI

POWER

AUX SEND

MIDI

MASTER OUT

INPUT

(

)

DIGITAL 5,6

INPUT SENS

MIXER MODE

INPUT

PHONES

TIME VALUE

PEAK

SELECT

TRACK

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT MIX

TRACK MIX

50dBm

PAN

AUX SEND

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

6dB

CH EDIT

EDIT

EDIT CONDITION

PLAY

DISPLAY

Input BUSS

V.Track

PARAMETER

Input BUSS

V.Track

EQ Low

EQ Mid

EQ Hi

Aux Send

EFFECT-1

EFFECT-2

SOLO

SONG

LOCATOR

TRACK

EFFECT

SYSTEM

BUSS Send

AUX Send

Channel Link

EFFECT-1

-2

Master Out

AUX SEND

EFFECT-1

-2

Song Select

Marker

Locate

Loop

Track Copy

EFFECT-1

-2

System

MIDI

Pre Level

Post Level

Play List

SEL

New

Move

Xchg

Insert

Cut

Name

DISK

Copy

A.Punch

Sync

Fader Pan

SHIFT

CURSOR

Scene

Drive Select

Erase

Optimize

DAT Backup

Erase

Amp Profile

SOURCE

REC

STATUS

YES

Initialize

Time Comp Exp.

Recover

PLAY

MUTE

CANCEL

ENTER

LOCATOR

TAP

MASTER

MARKER

BUSS

AUX

BUSS

AUX

BUSS

AUX

BUSS

AUX

LOOP

AUTO PUNCH NUMERICS VARI PITCH

UNDO

MIDI/

DISK

(

)

(

)

PREVIEW

FROM

LOC 1/

LOC 2/

LOC 3/

LOC 4/

CLEAR

SCENE

SCRUB

CLEAR

STORE

SONG TOP

SONG END

SHUT EJECT

RESTART

ZERO

REW

STOP

PLAY

REC

Co p y rig h t © 1 9 9 6

RO LAN D CO RPO RATIO N

All rig h ts re se rve d . N o p a rt o f th is p u b lica tio n m a y b e re p ro d u ce d in

a n y fo rm w ith o u t th e w ritte n p e rm issio n o f RO LAN D CO RPO RATIO N .

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The

symbol alerts the user to important instructions

Used for instructions intended to alert

the user to the risk of death or severe

injury should the unit be used

improperly.

or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is

determined by the design contained within the

triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for

general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.

Used for instructions intended to alert

the user to the risk of injury or material

damage should the unit be used

improperly.

The

symbol alerts the user to items that must never

be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that

must not be done is indicated by the design contained

within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it

means that the unit must never be disassembled.

* Material damage refers to damage or

other adverse effects caused with

respect to the home and all its

furnishings, as well to domestic

animals or pets.

The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be

carried out. The specific thing that must be done is

indicated by the design contained within the circle. In

the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-

cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.

● Before using this unit, make sure to read the

instructions below, and the OwnerÕs Manual.

.........................................................................................................

● Always turn the unit off and unplug the power

cord before attempting installation of the Hard

disk drive unit (HDP88 series) or Effect expansion

board VS8F-1.

● Do not open or perform any internal modifications

on the unit. (The only exception would be where

Quick Start manual provides specific instructions

which should be followed in order to put in place

user-installable options; see p. 3.)

● Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply

cord when plugging into, or unplugging from an

outlet.

.........................................................................................................

● Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is

level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on

stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.

.........................................................................................................

● Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming

entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be

placed so they are out of the reach of children.

● Avoid damaging the power cord. Do not bend it

excessively, step on it, place heavy objects on it, etc.

A damaged cord can easily become a shock or fire

hazard. Never use a power cord after it has been

damaged.

.........................................................................................................

● Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on

the unit.

.........................................................................................................

● Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet

hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an

outlet or this unit.

● In households with small children, an adult should

provide supervision until the child is capable of

following all the rules essential for the safe opera-

tion of the unit.

.........................................................................................................

● Before moving the unit, disconnect the power plug

from the outlet, and pull out all cords from exter-

nal devices.

.........................................................................................................

● Protect the unit from strong impact.

(Do not drop it!)

.........................................................................................................

● Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and

unplug the power cord from the outlet.

.........................................................................................................

● Do not force the unitÕs power-supply cord to share

an outlet with an unreasonable number of other

devices. Be especially careful when using exten-

sion cordsÑthe total power used by all devices

you have connected to the extension cordÕs outlet

must never exceed the power rating

(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive

loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat

up and eventually melt through.

● Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning

in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out

of the outlet.

.........................................................................................................

● When installing the Hard disk drive unit (HDP88

series) or Effect expansion board VS8F-1, remove

only the specified screws.

.........................................................................................................

● Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with

your dealer, or qualified Roland service personnel.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In tro d u ctio n

Thank you for purchasing the Roland VS-880 V-XPANDED Digital Studio Workstation or the VS-

880-S1 System Expansion Kit.

The VS-880 V-XPANDED is a revolution in home studio equipment that makes a cutting-edge stu-

dio environment available to the musician. Disk recorder, digital mixer, and multi effects are

brought together in a unified system that allows the entire process from recording to mixdown,

effects and output to PA equipment to take place entirely in the digital domain.

The VS-880-S1 is an expansion kit that enhances the system software of the VS-880 that you have

been using to full V-XPANDED functionality. In addition to the superb digital studio functionality

that you have already been enjoying, you will now be able to experience even more powerful func-

tions and even easier operation.

The documentation for VS-880 V-XPANDED consists of two manuals: ÒQuick StartÓ and ÒOwnerÕs

ManualÓ (this document). If you are using the VS-880 for the first time, please read ÒQuick StartÓ

first.

Ab o u t th e p a ck a g e co n te n ts

■ If y o u p u rch a se d th e VS-8 8 0 V-XPAN DED

The VS-880 V-XPANDED package includes the following items. Make sure that you have all the

items.

• VS-880

• Power cable

• Quick Start

• Owner’s Manual (this manual)

• VS8F-1 Preset Patch List

• Leaflet “Notes when using a Zip drive”

• V-XPANDED sticker

■ If y o u p u rch a se d th e VS-8 8 0 -S1

The VS-880-S1 package includes the following items. Make sure that you have all the items.

• VS-880-S1 (Zip disk)

• Expanding the functionality of the VS-880

• Owner’s Manual (this manual)

• VS8F-1 Preset Patch List

• V-XPANDED sticker

Ho w th is m a n u a l is o rg a n ize d

This manual is organized as follows.

■ Ch a p te r 1 Try in g o u t th e e x p a n d e d fu n ctio n s

This chapter provides some simple examples which explain the operation of the expanded VS-880.

If you have purchased the VS-880-S1, read this first to learn which functions are added by the V-

XPANDED upgrade.

If you purchased the VS-880 V-XPANDED, read the separate ÒQuick StartÓ first.

■ Ch a p te r 2 Be fo re y o u sta rt (VS-8 8 0 te rm in o lo g y )

This chapter explains basic co n ce p ts that you will need to understand in order to use the VS-880.

It also explains various terms that you should know.

■ Ch a p te r 3 Ba sic o p e ra tio n (a s a re p la ce m e n t fo r a

ta p e MTR)

This chapter explains the actual steps in the procedure of creating a master tape.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

■ Ch a p te r 4 Ed itin g a re co rd e d p e rfo rm a n ce (tra ck

e d itin g )

This chapter explains the procedure for Òediting sound,Ó something which was not possible on

conventional tape MTR units.

■ Ch a p te r 5 Use w ith MIDI d e vice s

This chapter explains the procedures for using the VS-880 in conjunction with MIDI devices. Read

this chapter when you wish to use the VS-880 in synchronization with other MIDI devices.

■ Ch a p te r 6 Use w ith a Zip d rive

This chapter explains the procedures for using the VS-880 with a Zip drive. Read this chapter when

you wish to use a Zip drive to record a performance. This chapter also explains how to use the VS-

880 with a hard disk or magneto-optical disk.

■ Ch a p te r 7 Use w ith a DAT re co rd e r

This chapter explains the procedures for using the VS-880 in conjunction with a DAT recorder.

Read this chapter when you wish to save your performance on a DAT recorder.

■ Ch a p te r 8 Usin g th e in te rn a l e ffe cts

This chapter explains the operating procedures when a VS8F-1 effect expansion board is installed.

Read the VS8S-1 ownerÕs manual in conjunction with this chapter.

■ Ch a p te r 9 O th e r co n ve n ie n t fu n ctio n s

This chapter explains operation of functions which were not discussed in earlier chapters, such as

sounding the metronome during recording, or when a foot switch is connected.

■ Ch a p te r 1 0 O ve ra ll se ttin g s a n d sta tu s ch e ck in g

This chapter explains how to make the settings which affect the overall operation of the VS-880.

■ Ch a p te r 1 1 Ta k in g a d va n ta g e o f th e VS-8 8 0 (id e a s

a n d e x a m p le s)

This chapter combines some of the functions discussed in earlier chapters, and gives some actual

examples of how you can take advantage of the VS-880.

■ Ap p e n d ice s

This chapter contains material which will help you make the best use of the VS-880, such as

ÒTroubleshootingÓ and ÒError message list.Ó

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Co n te n ts

Main features .................................................................................................................. 10

Important notes .............................................................................................................. 11

Front and rear panels ..................................................................................................... 13

Mixer section .......................................................................................................................................... 13

Recorder section ..................................................................................................................................... 14

Display section ....................................................................................................................................... 15

Rear panel ............................................................................................................................................... 16

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

Mixer-related .................................................................................................................. 17

Using auto mix ....................................................................................................................................... 17

Using the 3-band equalizer in INPUT MIX/TRACK MIX .............................................................. 20

Mixing in a stereo source (Stereo In) ................................................................................................... 21

Adjusting the level of each track (Track Level) ................................................................................. 21

Causing top panel fader and pan knob operations to take effect immediately ............................ 21

Recorder related functions ............................................................................................. 22

When the Recording mode is set to Mastering .................................................................................. 22

When a digital signal with emphasis is input ................................................................................... 22

Creating a master tape which disables digital copying ................................................................... 22

Effect related .................................................................................................................. 23

Newly added preset patches ................................................................................................................ 23

Newly added algorithms ...................................................................................................................... 23

Adjusting the send level and balance for all effects .......................................................................... 33

Inserting an effect ................................................................................................................................... 34

Display related ................................................................................................................ 37

Holding the level meter peaks ............................................................................................................. 37

Checking the remaining disk capacity ................................................................................................ 37

Disk drive related ............................................................................................................ 38

Checking the reliability of a disk ............................................................................................................... 38

Checking that a disk is not damaged .................................................................................................. 38

Synchronization related .................................................................................................. 40

Assign mark points according to the tempo ...................................................................................... 40

When using the sync track ................................................................................................................... 40

Using the tempo map ............................................................................................................................ 42

Adding an offset to the sync track/tempo map ................................................................................ 42

MIDI related .................................................................................................................... 43

Using program change messages to select scenes ............................................................................ 43

Using program change messages to select effects ............................................................................. 43

Using control change messages to control effects ............................................................................ 43

Other .............................................................................................................................. 44

Using the numeric keys ([NUMERICS]) ............................................................................................. 44

Holding the function of [SHIFT] (Shift Lock) .................................................................................... 44

Easy time adjustment ............................................................................................................................ 45

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

Sources, tracks, and channels ....................................................................................... 46

Doing everything in the digital domain (Digital Studio Workstation) ............................... 46

Signal flow (busses) ....................................................................................................... 46

Where a performance is recorded (Song) ...................................................................... 47

Mixer section .................................................................................................................. 48

About mixer modes ............................................................................................................................... 48

Switching the mixer mode .................................................................................................................... 51

Recording the current condition of the mixer (Scene) ...................................................................... 51

Recorder section ............................................................................................................ 53

Differences with a tape-type MTR ...................................................................................................... 53

Number of tracks that can be recorded/played simultaneously ................................................... 53

Virtual tracks provided for each track (V-tracks) ............................................................................. 53

Effects section ................................................................................................................ 54

About the effect expansion board (VS8F-1) ....................................................................................... 54

VS-880 operation ........................................................................................................... 54

How operations are organized (Conditions) ..................................................................................... 54

Switching conditions ............................................................................................................................. 54

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

Selecting the operation menu .............................................................................................................. 55

Selecting parameters ............................................................................................................................. 55

Modifying the value of settings ........................................................................................................... 55

Executing an operation ........................................................................................................................ 55

Switching the track status (Track Status) ........................................................................................... 55

Changing the current time .................................................................................................................... 56

Storing a time location, method 1 (Locate Point) ............................................................57

Storing a time location .......................................................................................................................... 57

Moving to a stored time location ......................................................................................................... 58

Modifying a stored time location ........................................................................................................ 58

Deleting a stored time location ............................................................................................................ 58

Storing a time location, method 2 (Mark Points) ............................................................ 59

Marking a time location ........................................................................................................................ 59

Moving to a marked time location ...................................................................................................... 59

Modifying a marked time location ...................................................................................................... 60

Clearing a mark ...................................................................................................................................... 60

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

Before you begin ............................................................................................................ 61

When you turn the power on .............................................................................................................. 61

Listening to the demo song ............................................................................................ 61

Listening to the variations of the demo song .................................................................................... 61

Making a new recording ................................................................................................. 62

Specifying the recording mode (Song New) ...................................................................................... 62

Naming the song (Song Name) ............................................................................................................ 62

General procedure for multitrack recording .................................................................... 63

Connect the instruments ....................................................................................................................... 63

Record a performance onto a track ..................................................................................................... 63

Switching V-tracks ................................................................................................................................. 63

Recording additional tracks while listening to the performance (Overdubbing) ........................ 64

Re-recording only your mistakes (Punch-in/out) ............................................................................ 64

Specify beforehand the location for re-recording (Auto punch-in) ................................................ 65

Repeatedly recording over the same area (Loop recording) ........................................................... 66

Combining the performances of two or more tracks into another track (Track bouncing) ........ 67

Creating a master tape .......................................................................................................................... 67

Digital recording ............................................................................................................. 72

Concerning copyright ........................................................................................................................... 72

About SCMS ........................................................................................................................................... 72

Connecting digital devices ................................................................................................................... 72

Matching the sampling frequency ....................................................................................................... 72

Selecting digital input as the source .................................................................................................... 73

When digital recording is not possible ... ........................................................................................... 73

Before you finish operations ........................................................................................... 74

Saving the performance to disk (Song Store) ..................................................................................... 74

Preventing accidental erasure of your performance (Song Protect) ............................................... 74

Selecting a song (Song Select) .............................................................................................................. 75

Turning the power off (Shut Down) ................................................................................................... 75

Re-starting the VS-880 ................................................................................................... 75

Chapter 4 Editing a recorded performance (track editing)

What is editing? .............................................................................................................. 76

Finding a desired location (Preview) ...............................................................................76

Using [TO] and [FROM] ....................................................................................................................... 76

Scrub playback ([SCRUB]) .................................................................................................................... 76

Basic procedure ............................................................................................................. 77

Re-using part of the performance (Copy) ....................................................................... 78

Modifying the organization of the performance (Move) .................................................. 79

Erasing part of a performance (Erase) ........................................................................... 81

Exchanging performance data between tracks (Exchange) ........................................... 81

Inserting blank space into a performance (Insert) .......................................................... 82

Deleting a portion of a performance (Cut) ...................................................................... 83

Modifying the playback time of the performance (Time compression/expansion) .......... 84

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

Chapter 5 Use with MIDI devices

About MIDI ..................................................................................................................... 85

What is MIDI .......................................................................................................................................... 85

MIDI connectors ..................................................................................................................................... 85

MIDI channels ........................................................................................................................................ 85

MIDI messages ....................................................................................................................................... 85

MIDI implementation chart .................................................................................................................. 85

Using MIDI to switch the track status ............................................................................. 86

Synchronizing with a MIDI sequencer ............................................................................ 86

Using MTC .............................................................................................................................................. 86

Using the tempo map ............................................................................................................................ 89

Using the sync track .............................................................................................................................. 91

When you experience problems with synchronization ................................................... 92

Chapter 6 Use with a Zip drive

Connecting a Zip drive ................................................................................................... 93

Initializing the disk (Drive Initialize) .................................................................................93

Select the Zip drive as the recording destination (Drive Select) ..................................... 93

Saving performance data on a Zip disk (Song Copy) ..................................................... 94

Saving on a single disk (Playable) ....................................................................................................... 94

When the data cannot be saved on a single disk (Archive) ............................................................. 95

If you have problems saving the data ............................................................................. 96

Chapter 7 Use with a DAT recorder (DAT backup)

Saving performance data to a DAT recorder (Backup) .................................................. 97

Loading performance data from a DAT recorder (Recover) ............................................98

Checking the names of the performance data that was saved (Name) ......................................... 99

Checking the storage status of performance data that was saved (Verify) ................................... 99

Chapter 8 Using the internal effects

Examples of how the effects can be used .................................................................... 100

Applying reverb to a recorded performance (Loop) ...................................................................... 100

Applying reverb as you record (Loop) ............................................................................................. 102

Applying a vocoder while you record (Insert) ................................................................................ 104

Applying reverb while bouncing tracks (Loop) .............................................................................. 106

If the effect does not sound as you expect ................................................................... 108

Chapter 9 Other convenient functions

Sounding the metronome ............................................................................................. 109

Using an external MIDI sound source to play the metronome ..................................................... 109

Using a foot switch to playback/stop ............................................................................ 110

Stopping automatically (Marker stop) ........................................................................... 110

Changing the pitch during playback (Vari-pitch) ........................................................... 111

Listening only to a specific channel (Solo) ................................................................... 111

Simultaneously adjusting a stereo source (Channel Link) ........................................... 112

Undoing a recording or editing operation ..................................................................... 112

Recording/editing operations which can be undone (Undo) ....................................................... 112

Canceling the last-performed Undo (Redo) ..................................................................................... 113

Canceling only the last-performed operation .................................................................................. 113

When the disk has little remaining space ..................................................................... 113

Deleting only unneeded performance data (Song Optimize) ....................................................... 113

Deleting one song of performance data (Song Erase) .................................................................... 113

Chapter 10 Overall settings and status checking

If the display area is difficult to read (Contrast) ............................................................ 114

Switching the contents of the display (Bar Display) ..................................................... 114

Displaying measures/beats .......................................................................................... 115

Checking the size of a recorded performance .............................................................. 115

Restoring the mixer settings to the initial state ............................................................. 116

If there is no internal hard disk ..................................................................................... 116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

Chapter 11 Taking advantage of the VS-880 (ideas and examples)

Recording multiple sources to one track ...................................................................... 117

Collecting just the sections that you like ....................................................................... 118

Copying an 8-track MTR performance to the VS-880 .................................................. 119

Controlling the mixer from a MIDI sequencer ............................................................... 120

Operating the VS-880 from another device (MMC) ...................................................... 122

Synchronizing the operation of two VS-880 units .......................................................................... 122

Operating the VS-880 from an MMC-compatible device .............................................. 125

If you have problems with synchronization .................................................................................... 126

Using external effect units ............................................................................................ 127

Applying an effect during playback ................................................................................................. 127

Applying an effect while you re-record ........................................................................................... 127

Appendices

Using an external disk drive (About SCSI) ................................................................... 130

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 132

Error messages ............................................................................................................ 134

Special key operations ................................................................................................. 136

Parameter list ............................................................................................................... 138

MIDI implementation chart ........................................................................................... 143

Mixer section block diagram ......................................................................................... 144

Glossary ....................................................................................................................... 145

Specifications ............................................................................................................... 146

About the V-XPANDED sticker ..................................................................................... 147

Index ............................................................................................................................. 149

* Iomega is a registered trademark of Iomega Corporation.

* Zip is a trademark of Iomega Corporation.

* All product names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their

respective owners.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ma in fe a tu re s

■ Dig ita l a u d io w o rk sta tio n

■ A fu ll co m p le m e n t o f co n n e cto rs

Four analog audio inputs are provided, and you have the

choice of using either 1/4Ó phone jacks or RCA phono type

jacks. The input sensitivity of each jack can be adjusted from

line level (+4 dBm) to mic level (-50 dBm). For output, RCA

phono type master out jacks (stereo) and AUX send jacks

(two output) are provided.

The digital disk recorder section provides 8 tracks, and

allows four tracks to be recorded simultaneously. Each

track has eight virtual tracks (V-tracks), allowing a total

maximum of 64 tracks to be recorded. This means that you

can use convenient techniques such as recording numerous

takes of guitar solos, vocals, or chorus.

Editing operations such as copy, move and erase which

were impossible for a tape MTR can be easily accomplished.

For example, a four-measure drum pattern that was record-

ed can be repeated several times as a break-beat. Or, you

might place the same chorus at the beginning and end of a

song.

A SCSI connector is standard, allowing you to connect

external disk drives such as hard disks or removable disks.

Coaxial type digital I/O connectors are provided, allowing

recording/playback of digital audio with another digital

audio device (CD player, DAT recorder, MD recorder, etc.)

MIDI connectors (IN, OUT/THRU) allow MIDI messages to

be transmitted and received. The VS-880 can be used with a

MIDI sequencer for compu-mix, or synchronized with a

MIDI sequencer.

The VS-880 uses non-destructive editing, a method unique

to disk recorders. Previously performed recording or edit-

ing operations can be undone up to 999 steps backward (the

Undo/Redo function).

In addition to the tracks which record the audio signals, the

VS-880 has a sync track which can record MIDI Clock data.

By using this sync track, the VS-880 can be synchronized

even with a MIDI sequencer which does not implement

MTC (MIDI Time Code) or MMC (MIDI Machine Control).

Up to eight sets of all mixer settings (scenes) can be stored

for each song. When you wish to adjust the balance during

mixdown, or to compare effect settings, you can easily recall

the previous settings.

For each song, up to 32 time locations (locate points) can be

stored. If you register times such as the end of the introduc-

tion or the beginning of a break, you will be able to jump

immediately to desired points in a song without having to

fast-forward or rewind.

■ A fu ll a rra y o f o p tio n s

If an HDP-88 series hard disk (2.5 inch) is installed internal-

ly, the VS-880 will be a self-contained, compact, and

portable recording system. In contrast to when external disk

drives are used, there will be no possibility of problems

resulting from faulty connections. We recommend that you

install an internal hard disk when using the VS-880.

Up to 1000 time locations in each song can be marked (mark

points). It is useful to place marks at the beginning of each

measure, or at locations that you wish to listen to.

If a VS8F-1 effect expansion board is installed, a wide vari-

ety of effects will be available for use on the VS-880.

A sync track can be created from mark points that were

assigned along with the tempo. By transmitting MIDI clock

messages according to the sync track, you can easily syn-

chronize the VS-880 with a MIDI sequencer.

Time-based movements of channel faders and pan etc. can

be recorded (auto mix). With no additional equipment, the

VS-880 can perform mixing operations such as fade in and

fade out.

■ Ea sy -to -o p e ra te co n tro ls

The VS-880 can be operated as easily as conventional analog

multi-track recorders. You will be able to enjoy the advan-

tages of digital recording from the day that you purchase it.

The large LCD screen provides visual confirmation of many

settings at once. In particular, the bar display provides a

graphical indication of the level meter, pan and fader set-

tings, and the track record status.

1 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Im p o rta n t n o te s

In addition to the items listed under ÒIMPORTANT SAFE-

TY INSTRUCTIONSÓ and ÒUSING THE UNIT SAFELYÓ on

pages 2 and 3, please read and observe the following:

Disk d rive h a n d lin g

Disk drives are precision devices. When handling a VS-880

that has an internal hard disk installed, or when handling

an external disk drive, observe the following precautions.

Po w e r Su p p ly

● Do not use this unit on the same power circuit with any

device that will generate line noise (such as an electric

motor or variable lighting system).

● For details on hard disk handling, refer also to the

instructions that accompanied your hard disk.

● Before performing the following actions, be sure to per-

form the shut-down operation. If you fail to perform the

shut-down operation, not only the data recorded on the

hard disk, but also the hard disk itself may be damaged.

Turning off the power of the disk drive

● Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the

power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions

and/or damage to speakers or other devices.

Turning off the power of the VS-880

Removing a disk from a removable disk drive

Pla ce m e n t

● Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equip-

ment containing large power transformers) may induce

hum. To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of

this unit; or move it farther away from the source of

interference.

● While the MIDI/DISK indicator of the VS-880 or the disk

drive busy indicator is lit, data is being transferred to or

from the disk drive. If you are using a removable disk

drive, make sure that this indicator is dark before remov-

ing the disk.

● This device may interfere with radio and television

reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such

receivers.

● Place the unit in a stable and level location that is not

affected by vibration from external sources. If the unit is

tilted severely, this may have harmful effects on the

operation of the disk drive.

● Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near

devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehi-

cle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.

Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.

● While using the VS-880, be careful not to subject the unit

to vibration or shock, and avoid moving the unit while

the power is turned on. When transporting the unit, pack

it in its original shipping carton.

Ma in te n a n ce

● For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry

cloth or one that has been slightly dampened with water.

To remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a

mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to

wipe the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.

● Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been

moved to a location with a level of humidity that is

greatly different than its former location. Rapid changes

in the environment can cause condensation to form

inside the drive, which will adversely affect the opera-

tion of the drive and/or damage removable disks. When

the unit has been moved, allow it to become accustomed

to the new environment (allow a few hours) before oper-

ating it.

● Never use benzene, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any

kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or

deformation.

Re p a irs a n d Da ta

● Please be aware that all data contained in the unitÕs

memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs.

Important data should always be backed up on a DAT

recorder or an external disk drive (e.g., hard disk or MO

disk). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss

of data. However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry

related to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it

may not be possible to restore the data, and Roland

assumes no liability concerning such loss of data.

1 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Important notes

Co n ce rn in g co p y rig h t

Ad d itio n a l Pre ca u tio n s

The law prohibits the unauthorized recording, public per-

formance, broadcast, sale, or distribution etc. of a work (CD

recording, video recording, broadcast, etc.) whose copyright

is owned by a third party.

● Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irre-

trievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improp-

er operation of the unit. To protect yourself against the

risk of loosing important data, we recommend that you

periodically save a backup copy of important data you

have stored in the unitÕs memory on a DAT recorder or

an external disk drive (e.g., hard disk or MO disk).

The VS-880 does not implement SCMS. This design decision

was made with the intent that SCMS should not restrict the

creation of original compositions which do not violate copy-

right law. Roland will take no responsibility for any

infringement of copyright that you may commit in using

the VS-880.

● Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the con-

tents of data that was stored on a DAT recorder or an

external disk drive (e.g., hard disk or MO disk) once it

has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability

concerning such loss of data.

< About SCMS >

ÒSCMSÓ stands for ÒSerial Copy Management System.Ó

This is a function that protects the rights of copyright

holders by prohibiting recording via a digital connection

for more than two generations. When digital connections

are made between digital recorders that implement this

function, SCMS data will be recorded along with the

audio data. Digital audio data which contains this SCMS

data cannot again be recorded via a digital connection.

● Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unitÕs

buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its

jacks and connectors. Rough handling can lead to mal-

functions.

● Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.

● When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the

connector itselfÑnever pull on the cable. This way you

will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cableÕs inter-

nal elements.

Discla im e r o f lia b ility

Roland will take no responsibility for any Òdirect damages,Ó

Òconsequential damages,Ó or Òany other damagesÓ which

may result from your use of the VS-880. These damages

may include but are not limited to the following events

which can occur when using the VS-880.

● A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during

normal operation.

Any loss of profit that may occur to you

Permanent loss of your music or data

Inability to continue using the VS-880 itself or a connect-

ed device

● To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the

unitÕs volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use

headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about

those around you (especially when it is late at night).

● When you need to transport the unit, package it in the

box (including padding) that it came in, if possible.

Otherwise, you will need to use equivalent packaging

materials.

1 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Fro n t a n d re a r p a n e ls

7 . SELECT button

Mix e r se ctio n

This button switches the operating mode of the mixer. The

current mixer mode is shown by the indicators located at

the right of the button. Each time you press the button, you

will alternate between INPUT MIX mode and TRACK MIX

mode. To change from INPUT➝TRACK mode to INPUT

MIX mode / TRACK MIX mode, hold down [SHIFT] and

press the button. Use the same operation to move in the

other direction.

INPUT SENS

MIXER MODE

INPUT

PHONES

PEAK

SELECT

TRACK

INPUT MIX

TRACK MIX

50dBm

PAN

AUX SEND

6dB

CH EDIT

EDIT

INPUT➝TRACK mode

INPUT MIX mode

TRACK MIX mode

Input BUSS

V.Track

Input BUSS

V.Track

EQ Low

EQ Mid

EQ Hi

Aux Send

EFFECT

SOLO

BUSS Send

AUX Send

Channel Link

Master Out

AUX SEND

SEL

EFFECT

SOURCE

REC

STATUS

PLAY

MUTE

8 . PHONES knob

MASTER

BUSS

AUX

BUSS

AUX

BUSS

AUX

BUSS

AUX

This knob adjusts the volume of the headphones.

(

)

(

)

9 . AUX SEND knob

This knob adjusts the output level of the AUX SEND jacks.

1 0 . EDIT/SOLO button

Press this button to make settings for the master section of

the mixer.

To use the Solo function to monitor only a specific channel,

hold [SHIFT] while you press the button.

1 . PEAK indicators

1 1 . Master fader

These indicators allow you to avoid distortion of the sound

being input at the input jacks (1Ð4). The peak indicators will

light red when the signal reaches -6 dB before clipping

level. Adjust the input sensitivity so that the peak indicators

do not light.

Use this fader to adjust the overall output level.

2 . INPUT SENS (input sensitivity) knobs

These knobs adjust the sensitivity of the input jacks (1Ð4).

Rotate a knob fully right for mic level (-50 dBm), and fully

left for line level (+4 dBm).

3 . PAN knobs

These knobs adjust the pan (location in the stereo output) of

each channel.

4 . CH EDIT / SEL (channel edit/select) buttons

Use these buttons when you wish to make settings for a

mixer channel. The names of the parameter groups that can

be set for each channel are printed below CH EDIT. To

directly specify a particular group, you can hold down

[SHIFT] and press the button for that group name.

When editing a song, use these buttons to select tracks for

editing.

5 . STATUS buttons

These buttons switch the status of each channel. The current

status is shown by the button indicator.

SOURCE (orange): The input source assigned to the

channel is being output.

REC (blinking red): Recording is selected for the track

assigned to the channel.

PLAY (green):

The track assigned to the channel

will playback.

MUTE (dark):

The channel is muted (silent).

6 . Channel faders

Use these faders to adjust the volume level of each channel.

1 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Front and reat panels

6 . PARAMETER buttons

Use these buttons to switch the parameter display.

Re co rd e r se ctio n

7 . SHIFT button

This button is used in conjunction with other buttons to

access additional functions of that button. For details refer

to ÒSpecial key operationsÓ (p.136).

TIME VALUE

8 . CURSOR buttons, NO/YES buttons, CANCEL/ENTER

buttons

When a YES/NO response is required during an operation,

use these button to reply. When two or more parameters are

shown in the display, use these buttons to select parame-

ters.

EDIT CONDITION

PLAY

DISPLAY

PARAMETER

SONG

LOCATOR

TRACK

EFFECT

SYSTEM

Song Select

Marker

Locate

Loop

Track Copy

EFFECT

System

MIDI

Pre Level

Post Level

Play List

New

Move

Xchg

Insert

Cut

Name

Copy

DISK

A.Punch

Sync

Fader Pan

SHIFT

CURSOR

Scene

Drive Select

Erase

Amp Profile

Optimize

YES

Time Comp Exp.

Initialize

DAT Backup

Recover

CANCEL

ENTER

LOCATOR

TAP

MARKER

LOOP

AUTO PUNCH NUMERICS VARI PITCH

UNDO

MIDI/

DISK

9 . NUMERICS button

When this button is pressed to make the indicator light, the

ten LOCATOR buttons will act as numeric keys to enter

numerical values.

PREVIEW

FROM

LOC 1/

LOC 2/

LOC 3/

LOC 4/

CLEAR

SCENE

SCRUB

CLEAR

STORE

SONG TOP

SONG END

SHUT EJECT

RESTART

1 0 . VARI PITCH button

ZERO

REW

STOP

PLAY

REC

Press this button when you wish to change the playback

pitch.

1 1 . UNDO button

Press this button to cancel a recording that you have made.

Also, after performing a song edit operation, you can press

this button to return to the condition before editing. When

undo is executed, the button indicator will light.

1 . PLAY/DISPLAY button

Press this button to return from making a setting (edit con-

dition) back to normal status (play condition). To switch

display items in the bar display, hold down [SHIFT] and

press this button.

1 2 . MIDI/DISK indicator

This indicator will light green when MIDI messages are

being received, and red when data is being written or read

on the disk drive. If both of these are occurring, the indica-

tor will light orange.

2 . EDIT CONDITION buttons

The functions and parameters of the VS-880 are organized

within these buttons. To use a desired operation, press the

appropriate button.

1 3 . SCENE button

Press this button when you wish to memorize or recall

scenes (snapshots of the mixer settings).

3 . LOCATOR buttons

Press these buttons when using the Locator function or the

Tap Marker function.

When the NUMERICS indicator is lit, these buttons function

as numeric keys to directly input numbers. When the

SCENE indicator is lit, these buttons are used to store and

recall scenes (snapshots of mixer settings).

1 4 . PREVIEW button

Press this button to use the Preview function that plays back

a specific length before and after the current location.

4 . Transport control buttons

These buttons are used to operate the recorder.

[ZERO]: Return the current time to Ò00h00m00s00Ó

(zero return).

[REW]:

While the button is held down, the current

time will be moved backward. This corre-

sponds to the rewind button on a tape

recorder.

[FF]:

While the button is held down, the current

time will be moved forward. This corre-

sponds to the fast-forward button on a tape

recorder.

[STOP]: Stop song recording/playback.

[PLAY]: Start song recording/playback from the cur-

rent time.

[REC]:

Press this button to record a song.

5 . TIME/VALUE dial

Normally (i.e., in Play condition), this dial is used to move

the current time. When making settings (i.e., in Edit condi-

tion), this dial is used to modify parameter values.

1 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Front and reat panels

Disp la y se ctio n

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

1 . CONDITION

This indicates the current condition.

PLY: Play (normal. When turn the Song Protect on,

ÒPlyÓ will be indicated.)

CHn: Channel edit (n=1Ð8, aÐd) (in INPUT➝TRACK

MIX mode)

INn: Channel edit (n=1Ð6, aÐc) (in INPUT MIX mode)

TRn: Channel edit (n=1Ð8, aÐd) (in TRACK MIX mode)

MST: Master block edit

SNG: Song edit

LOC: Locator edit

TRK: Track edit

EFF: Effect edit

SYS: System edit

* The channel edit display will depend on the currently

selected mixer mode. Also, channels for which Channel

Link is OFF will be displayed as 1Ð8, and channels for

which it is ON will be displayed as aÐd.

2 . MARKER

This shows the mark point number for the current time. If a

mark point has not been assigned to the current time, the

closest mark point number located before the current time

will be shown.

3 . TIME

This shows the current time of the song.

4 . MEASURE

This shows the current measure of the song.

5 . BEAT

This shows the current beat of the song.

6 . SYNC MODE

This indicates the current sync mode (method of synchro-

nization).

7 . SCENE

This shows the currently used scene number (mixer setting).

An asterisk Ò✱Ó shown at the beginning of the scene num-

ber indicates that the current mixer settings have been mod-

ified since the scene was recalled.

8 . REMAINING TIME

This shows the remaining length of time available for

recording.

9 . Bar display

In Play condition, the item selected by [DISPLAY (PLAY)]

are shown graphically. While you are making a setting, data

for the setting being made is displayed graphically.

1 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Front and reat panels

Re a r p a n e l

(

)

SCSI

MIDI

DIGITAL 5,6 FOOT PHONES

INPUT B

INPUT A

SWITCH

OUT THRU

AC IN

OUT

MASTER OUT

AUX SEND

1 . POWER switch

7 . PHONES jack

This switch turns the VS-880 power on/off.

An optional set of headphones can be connected here. The

PHONES jack outputs the same sound as the MASTER

OUT jack.

2 . AC IN (AC inlet)

Connect the included power cable here.

8 . INPUT B jacks (1–4)

3 . SCSI connector

This is a DB-25 type SCSI connector for connecting disk dri-

ves such as hard disks or removable disks. If you wish to

connect a disk drive, refer to ÒUse with a Zip driveÓ (p.93).

9 . INPUT A jacks (1–4)

These are input jacks for analog audio signals. INPUT A are

1/4Ó phone jacks, and INPUT B are RCA phono jacks. You

may use either type of jack. If cables are connected to both

types, the INPUT A jacks will take priority. Use the INPUT

SENS knob to adjust the input sensitivity of each input.

4 . MIDI connectors (IN, OUT/THRU)

External MIDI devices (MIDI controllers, MIDI sequencers,

etc.) can be connected here.

IN:

This connector receives MIDI messages.

Connect it to the MIDI OUT connector of

the external MIDI device.

1 0 . AUX SEND jacks (A,B)

1 1 . MASTER OUT jacks (L,R)

These are output jacks for analog audio signals (RCA phono

type).

With the factory settings, all signals will be output from the

MASTER OUT jacks, and there will be no output from the

AUX SEND jacks. The output will be determined by the set-

tings of the mixerÕs master section and the settings of each

channel.

OUT/THRU: This connector can be used either as a

MIDI OUT or as a MIDI THRU connector.

With the factory settings, it will function

as a MIDI OUT connector.

5 . DIGITAL (5,6) connectors (IN, OUT)

These are coaxial-type digital I/O connectors (comforms to

S/P DIF).

The AUX SEND jacks can also be used as send jacks for con-

necting external effect units (p.127).

IN:

This inputs a digital audio signal (stereo).

OUT: This outputs a digital audio signal (stereo). The

sound is the same as that of the MASTER OUT

jacks.

* To record a digital audio signal, it is not sufficient to sim-

ply connect a digital audio device to the DIGITAL IN con-

nector. When inputting a digital audio signal, refer to

ÒDigital recordingÓ (p.72).

* The DIGITAL connector is not able to input or output

analog audio signals.

6 . FOOT SWITCH jack

An optional foot switch can be connected here to control

recorder operations, mark point settings, and punch in/out

operations etc. by foot switch. With the factory settings, a

foot switch will start/stop the recorder. To change this

function, refer to ÒUsing a footswitch to playback/stopÓ

(p.110).

1 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ch a p te r 1 Try in g o u t th e e x p a n d e d fu n ctio n s

This chapter provides some simple examples which explain

the operation of the expanded VS-880. Read the explana-

tions in sequence to learn about the newly added functions.

Ma ste r Blo ck

MasterLevel

Master Bal (Master Balance)

AUX Level

AUX Bal (AUX Balance)

* If a song created on the VS-880 V-XPANDED is loaded by

VS-880 Ver.1, data for the functions added in V-XPAND-

ED (Auto Mix etc.) may be lost. To prevent this from hap-

pening, turn Song Protect on (p.74).

EFFECT1 SND Lev (Effect 1 Send Level)

EFFECT1 SND Bal (Effect 1 Send Balance)

EFFECT1 RTN Lev (Effect 1 Return Level)

EFFECT1 RTN Bal (Effect 1 Return Balance)

EFFECT2 SND Lev (Effect 2 Send Level)

EFFECT2 SND Bal (Effect 2 Send Balance)

EFFECT2 RTN Lev (Effect 2 Return Level)

EFFECT2 RTN Bal(Effect 2 Return Balance)

Mix e r-re la te d

■ Usin g a u to m ix

Time based movements such as channel faders and pan can

now be recorded to mark points (auto mix). When you

move to a mark point, the recorded mixer settings will be

reproduced.

Effe ct

EFFECT-1 (Effect 1 Number)

EFFECT-2 (Effect 2 Number)

Auto mix can be recorded separately in each mixer mode.

The mixer settings which can be recorded are as follows.

< How auto mix differs from scenes >

In that auto mix Òrecords mixer settings,Ó its functionality

is similar to scenes.

It differs from scenes in the following ways. Use the two

functions as appropriate for your needs.

1000 can be recorded (the number of mark points).

Valid even during song playback.

* The items printed in bold type can be adjusted directly

from the faders or pan knobs on the top panel. By operat-

ing these while a song is playing back, you can record

time-based mixer movements such as fade-in or panning.

When Channel Link is on, the channel faders and pan

knobs of even-numbered channels will respectively adjust

AUX level and AUX balance.

Cannot switch the mixer mode.

Cannot switch V-tracks.

IN PUT➝TRACK

MIX Level

MIX Pan/MIX Bal (Mix Balance)

AUX Level

AUX Pan/AUX Bal (AUX Balance)

EFFECT1 Send (Effect 1 Send Level)

EFFECT1 Pan/EFFECT1 Bal (Effect 1 Balance)

EFFECT2 Send (Effect 2 Send Level)

EFFECT2 Pan/EFFECT2 Bal (Effect 2 Balance)

IN PUT MIX

BUSS Level

BUSS Pan/BUSS Bal (BUSS Balance)

AUX Level

AUX Pan/AUX Bal (AUX Balance)

EFFECT1 Send (Effect 1 Send Level)

EFFECT1 Pan/EFFECT1 Bal (Effect 1 Balance)

EFFECT2 Send (Effect 2 Send Level)

EFFECT2 Pan/EFFECT2 Bal (Effect 2 Balance)

TRACK MIX

BUSS Level

BUSS Pan/BUSS Bal (BUSS Balance)

AUX Level

AUX Pan/AUX Bal (AUX Balance)

EFFECT1 Send (Effect 1 Send Level)

EFFECT1 Pan/EFFECT1 Bal (Effect 1 Balance)

EFFECT2 Send (Effect 2 Send Level)

EFFECT2 Pan/EFFECT2 Bal (Effect 2 Balance)

1 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

Pre p a ra tio n s fo r a u to m ix

Record ing the m ix er setting s, m ethod 2

(Gra d a tion)

This method creates an auto mix that smoothly connects the

mixer settings recorded in two adjacent mark points.

For example, this is convenient when you wish to fade-in or

fade-out at a specified time.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS Scene/Auto

Mix?” is displayed.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

A.Mix Mode=” appears.

1 . Move to the time location at which you wish to begin the

auto mix.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

2 . Perform the procedure for “Recording the mixer set-

tings, method 1”.

3 . Move to the time location at which you wish to end the

auto mix.

4 . Perform the procedure for “Recording the mixer set-

tings, method 1” once again.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

Two mark points have now been assigned.

5 . Make sure that auto mix is on, holding down [SCENE]

and pressing [PREV].

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

When the setting is on, the [SELECT] indicator will

blink.

A mark point will be automatically added between the

two mark points, and the mixer settings will be interpo-

lated.

A.Mix Mode (Auto mix mode)

Off: Auto mix mode will not be used (same as in Ver.1).

On: Auto mix mode will be used.

* If you wish to interpolate with the previous mark point,

press [SCENE]+[PREV]. If you wish to interpolate with

the next mark point, holding down [SCENE] and pressing

[NEXT].

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

Return to Play condition.

* By holding down [SCENE] and pressing [SELECT], you

can turn Auto Mix Mode on/off in a single operation.

Record ing the m ix er setting s, m ethod 3

(Rea ltim e)

With this method, only those the mixer settings which can

be adjusted from the top panel will be recorded to mark

points in realtime. For example, this is convenient when

you wish to fade-in or fade-out individual tracks.

Record ing the m ix er setting s, m ethod 1

(Sna p shot)

Mixer settings can be recorded in a Mark point. When you

move to that Mark point, the mixer settings that were

recorded will be reproduced.

1 . Move to the time location at which you wish to record

the auto mix.

For example, this is convenient when you want the intro

and ending to have different volume levels for the guitar

part or different effect send levels etc.

2 . Make sure that auto mix is on, holding down [SCENE]

and pressing [REC].

The CONDITION column display will alternate

between the current condition name and Òmix,Ó indicat-

ing that preparations have been made for realtime

recording of the auto mix.

1 . Make sure that Auto Mix is on, press holding down

[SCENE] and pressing [TAP].

A mark point will be added at the current time location.

At the same time, the settings of the mixer will be

recorded at the mark point. A mark point in which

mixer settings are recorded will be indicated by an Ò✱Ó

following it.

3 . Specify the channels for with auto mix will be recorded.

Move the faders and pan knobs of the top panel to the

desired locations.

4 . Press [PLAY].

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

Playback will begin.

5 . Operate the channel faders, pan knobs, and master

fader of the top panel.

Auto mix data will be recorded only for those channels

which were modified.

6 . When the mix is finished, press [STOP].

Mark points will be automatically created in the area

which was played back.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

* If a mark point already exists within 0.1 seconds before

the time location at which you are attempting to place a

new mark point (i.e., the current time), the auto mix data

will be recorded at the earlier mark point. A mark point

will not be newly assigned.

If you wish to redo the auto mix, repeat steps 1Ð5.

1 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

If y o u d o n o t w ish to re co rd to p p a n e l

se ttin g s (Ma sk Fa d e r)

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

In ÒRecording the mixer settings, method 1 (Snapshot)Ó,

you can specify that the settings adjustable from the top

panel will not be recorded.

For example, this is convenient when you have made fade-

in settings according to ÒRecording the mixer settings,

method 2Ó, and then wish to modify the effect send levels,

etc.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

5 . Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the first mark point

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS Scene/Auto

of the area in which you wish to erase the auto mix.

Mix?” appears.

6 . Press CURSOR[ ].

2 . Press [YES].

The cursor will move toward the right.

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

7 . Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the last mark point

A.Mix Snap=” appears.

of the area in which you wish to erase the auto mix.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

8 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒSYS EraseMode=Ó.

A.Mix Snap (Auto Mix Snapshot Mode)

Select the settings that will be recorded by the snapshot.

9 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

All:

All settings will be recorded.

MaskF: Settings which can be adjusted by the top

EraseMode (Auto Mix Erase Mode)

Select the auto mix data which will be erased.

panel (channel faders etc.) will be ignored.

Event:

Only auto mix events will be erased.

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)]. You will return to Play condi-

Marker: Both mark points and auto mix events will be

tion.

erased.

6 . Perform the procedure of “Recording the mixer settings,

1 0 . Press PARAMETER [

method 1”.

The display will indicate ÒSYS Erase___<=>___?Ó. The

underlined area will display the mark points specified

in steps 5Ð7.

Pla y in g b a ck th e a u to m ix

1 . Make sure that auto mix is on.

1 1 . Press [YES].

A message will ask you to confirm that you really wish

to erase the data.

2 . Press [PLAY].

The auto mix will playback.

While the auto mix is playing back, operating a fader or

pan knob will cause auto mix to be defeated for that

channel. If you stop and then playback again, auto mix

will once again take effect. Alternatively, you can tem-

porarily turn Auto Mix off during playback and then

turn it on again, causing Auto Mix to again be valid.

1 2 . Press [YES] once again.

The auto mix will be erased.

< What is an event? >

The smallest unit of memory used by the VS-880 to store

recorded results on disk is the event. A newly created

song provides approximately 12,000 events per song.

For each track, one recording pass uses two events.

Operations such as punch-in/out or track copy also use

up events. The number of events that are used up will

fluctuate in a complex way. For example, auto mix uses

up five events for each mark point.

Era sin g th e a u to m ix

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS Scene/Auto

Mix?” appears.

2 . Press [YES].

Even if there is capacity remaining on the disk, further

recording or track editing will not be possible if all of the

events are used up. In such cases, an error message such

as ÒEvent Mem FullÓ will appear (p.134).

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

A.Mix Erase?” appears.

4 . Press [YES].

1 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

Ab o u t “ !!! La ck o f EVEN T !!” d isp la y

Ò!!! Lack of EVENT !!Ó will be appeared in the display in the

following cases, and you cannot continue the current opera-

tion.

■ Usin g th e 3 -b a n d e q u a lize r in

IN PUT MIX/ TRACK MIX

From the total of fourteen INPUT MIX/TRACK MIX chan-

nels, you can now use a 3-band equalizer on any eight

selected channels.

¥ If you push [SCENE]+[REC] buttons to record

AutoMix data in realtime, when the remaining num-

ber of EVENT is less than 1000.

¥ If you try to UNDO or REDO when the remaining

number of Event is less than 200.

* If equalizer is turned on for more than 8 channels, it will

not be possible to use the 3-band equalizer. Please turn off

the equalizer switch for channels on which equalization is

not required.

The smallest unit of memory used by the VS-880 to store

recorded results on disk are the events. A newly created

song provides approximately 12,000 events per song.

For each track, one recording pass uses two events.

Operations such as punch-in/out or track copy also use up

events. The number of events that are used up will fluctuate

in a complex way. For example, auto mix uses up five

events for each mark point.

Tu rn in g th e e q u a lize r o n / o ff

1 . Make sure that the mixer mode is INPUT MIX/TRACK

MIX.

2 . Hold down [SHIFT], and press channel 3 [EQ Low(CH

EDIT)].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

4 . Press [CH EDIT] for the channels or tracks for which

When you do a lot of recording, editing (Track Copy, Track

Move) or record AutoMix of long period, please check the

remaining number of Events frequently. Procedure is as fol-

lows.

you wish to turn the equalizer off.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System

PRM?” appears.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

RemainDsp=” appears.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

4 . Select “Event” with TIME/VALUE dial.

5 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

EQ Switch (equalizer switch)

If you wish to use the equalizer, set this ÒOn.Ó If not, set this

ÒOff.Ó When equalizer settings are being made, the equal-

ization curve will be shown graphically in the bar display. If

this is ÒOffÓ the equalizer-related parameters will not be

available.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

Remaining number of Events can be saved with the follow-

ing procedures. Please try the most appropriate one with

your situation.

• Execute Song Store (Owner's manual p.74)

Please Execute Song Store if in UNDO condition

([UNDO] indicator is lit.). Events served for REDO will be

released. But please note that you cannot cancel (REDO)

the last UNDO if you once execute STORE.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

• Execute Song Optimize (Owner's manual p.113)

Please execute Song Optimize if you have done a lot of

Punch In recording. Events served for unnecessary audio

data will be released. But please note that you can only do

single level UNDO.

• Erace AutoMix data (Owner's manual p.19)

If you have recorded AutoMix data, erase unnecessary

data. Events served for unnecessary AutoMix data will be

released.

2 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

Usin g th e 3 -b a n d e q u a lize r

■ Ad justing the level of ea ch tra ck

(Tra ck Level)

1 . Make sure that the mixer mode is INPUT MIX/TRACK

MIX.

It is now possible to adjust the volume level of each track

independently from the channel faders.

If it is INPUT➝TRACK, holding down [SHIFT] and

pressing [SELECT].

For example, this is convenient when you wish to raise the

track level for playback of a track which was recorded at a

low volume level.

2 . Press [EDIT(SOLO)] several times until “MST EQ Sel=”

appears.

1 . Press [CH EDIT] for the track whose volume you wish

3 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

to adjust.

EQ Sel (Equalizer Select)

Select the type of equalizer that you wish to use.

2 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until

“TrackLevel=” appears.

2BandEQ:

14 channels of 2-band equalizers (same as

Ver.1).

3 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

3BandEQ:

8 channels of 3-band equalizers.

TrackLevel (Track Level)

The volume level of each track can be adjusted over a range

■ Mix in g in a ste re o so u rce

of -12Ð12dB.

(Ste re o In )

Even when playing back all 8 tracks in INPUT➝TRACK,

you can now mix in a stereo source for output to master

out.

For example, this is convenient when two VS-880 units are

being operated in synchronization.

■ Ca u sin g to p p a n e l fa d e r a n d

p a n k n o b o p e ra tio n s to ta k e

e ffe ct im m e d ia te ly

When the volume or pan has been adjusted in Channel Edit

condition, switching between INPUT MIX and TRACK MIX

can cause the fader or pan knob locations to no longer

match the actual volume level or pan. In such cases, an Ò✱Ó

symbol will be appended to the displayed values of the set-

tings. Also, when the fader or pan locations are shown in

the bar display, the current channel fader locations will

blink.

1 . Press [EDIT(SOLO)] several times until “MST

StereoIn=” appears.

2 . Select the input source for the stereo source. Rotate

the TIME/VALUE dial.

StereoIn (Stereo In)

Off:

Stereo In will not be used.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several time until “SYS System PRM

Input12: Inputs 1 and 2 will be input in stereo.

Input34: Inputs 3 and 4 will be input in stereo.

?” appears.

Digital:

The digital input will be input in stereo.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

The display will indicate ÒMST StIn Level=Ó.

FaderMatch” appears.

4 . Adjust the volume level of the stereo input. Rotate the

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

TIME/VALUE dial.

FaderMatch (Fader Match)

Select how the faders will act when the fader or pan knob

locations do not match the actual volume level or panning.

5 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒMST StIn Bal=Ó.

Null:

Changes will not occur until the channel

fader or pan knob is moved to the actual

value (same as Ver.1).

6 . Adjust the left/right balance of the stereo input. Rotate

the TIME/VALUE dial.

Jump:

The actual value will change at the instant

that the fader or pan knob is moved.

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

You will return to Play condition.

2 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

■ Cre a tin g a m a ste r ta p e w h ich

Re co rd e r re la te d fu n ctio n s

d isa b le s d ig ita l co p y in g

When digitally mixing down from the VS-880 to a DAT

recorder etc., you can now prohibit digital copies from

being made from the mixdown tape.

For example, a single-generation of digital recording from a

CD player to a DAT recorder is permitted. It will not be

possible to make a digital copy from the digitally-recorded

DAT to another digital device (p.72). This function causes a

tape which is digitally recorded from the VS-880 to behave

in the same way as a tape digitally recorded from a CD.

■ W h e n th e Re co rd in g m o d e is

se t to Ma ste rin g

When the Recording mode (p.62) is set to Mastering (MAS),

it is now possible to playback up to six tracks simultaneous-

ly. At this time, the VS-880 will function as a 6-track

recorder (tracks 1-6). Tracks 7Ð8 cannot be used.

Previously, only four tracks could be played back simulta-

neously when the Recording mode was set to Mastering

(MAS).

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System

PRM?” appears.

< When using a Zip drive >

A Zip drive is not able to read or write data with suffi-

cient speed. For this reason, when it is being used as the

current drive (i.e., the drive for recording or playback), it

will not be possible to playback six tracks simultaneously.

Refer to the following table, and limit the number of

simultaneously played back tracks accordingly. For

details refer to the enclosed leaflet ÒNotes when using a

Zip drive.Ó

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

D.CpyProtect=” appears.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

* Numbers are guidelines for numbers of tracks that can

be played back simultaneously.

Numbers in parentheses ( ) are guidelines for numbers

of tracks in song in which operations such as punch-in

recording or track copy are performed repeatedly.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. If you wish to prohibit dig-

Recording mode

Sample rate

48.0kHz 44.1kHz 32.0kHz

ital copying, turn the setting on.

Mastering

Multitrack 1

Multitrack 2

Live

3(2)

7(6)

8(8)

4(2)

7(5)

8(7)

8(8)

5(4)

8(6)

8(8)

D.CpyProtect (Digital Protect Switch)

Specify whether or not digital copying of a digitally-mixed

down tape will be permitted or not.

Off: Digital copying will be permitted (same as Ver.1).

On: Digital copying will be prohibited.

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

■ W h e n a d ig ita l sig n a l w ith

You will return to Play condition.

e m p h a sis is in p u t

6 . Digitally mixdown from the VS-880 to a DAT recorder

etc. (p.73).

When a digital signal with emphasis is input from the digi-

tal in connector, it will be automatically de-emphasized.

It will not be possible to digitally copy this master tape

to another DAT recorder etc.

2 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

Mode

Gate, Ducking

0Ð100

1Ð100

Effe ct re la te d

Thresh

Attack

Release

When a VS8F-1 effect expansion board is installed, a single

VS-880 now allows you to use two stereo effects.

Please read the VS8F-1 ownerÕs manual together with this

explanation.

HoldTime

Reverb

Turn reverb on/off. When turned off, the following items

will not be displayed.

■ N e w ly a d d e d p re se t p a tch e s

One hundred preset patches have been added to the effect

patches. Refer to the included ÒPreset Patch List.Ó

Due to the increased number of preset patches, the patch

numbers have changed as follows.

Type (Reverb Type)

Select the type of reverb.

Room1: Normal room reverb.

Room2: Room reverb with a softer tone than Room1.

Hall1:

Hall2:

Plate:

Normal hall reverb.

Hall reverb with a softer tone than Hall1.

Plate reverb.

Ver.1

V-XPANDED

Preset 001Ð100

(newly added)

User 001Ð100

Preset A00ÐA99

Preset B00ÐB99

User U00ÐU99

Time

Adjust the length (time) of the reverberation.

■ N e w ly a d d e d a lg o rith m s

The following effect algorithms have been added.

PreDLY (Pre delay)

Adjust the time until the reverb is output.

Reverb 2 (p.23)

Space Chorus (p.24)

Density

Adjust the density of the reverb.

Lo-Fi Processor (p.25)

4-Band Parametric Equalizer (p.26)

10-Band Graphic Equalizer (p.27)

Hum Canceler (p.28)

Vocal Canceller (p.28)

Vocoder 2 (p.29)

HPF (High pass filter)

Adjust the frequency at which the high pass filter will begin

to take effect. With a setting of Thru, the high pass filter will

not function.

Voice Transformer (p.30)

Mic Simulator (p.32)

LPF (Low pass filter)

Adjust the frequency at which the low pass filter will begin

to take effect. With a setting of Thru, the low pass filter will

not function.

● Re ve rb 2

This is a reverb that provides a gating function and a duck-

ing function. It can be used in either EFFECT-1 or EFFECT-

2. You can use two reverbs with different settings, or use it

in combination with a previous reverb.

EFLevel (Effect level)

Adjust the volume of the reverb.

DiLevel (Direct level)

Adjust the volume of the direct sound.

Input L

Direct Level

Output L

Equalizer

Gate

Turn the gate function on/off. When this is off, the follow-

ing items will not be displayed.

Reverb

Mode (Gate mode)

Select the way in which the gate function will operate.

Equalizer

Input R

Output R

Direct Level

Gate:

The gate will begin to open when the direct

signal level exceeds the threshold level, and

will begin to close when it falls below the

threshold level.

REV (Reverb)

Reverb

Type

On, Off

Ducking: The function will be the opposite of the Gate

setting. The gate will begin to close when the

direct signal level exceeds the threshold level,

and will begin to open when it falls below the

threshold level.

Room1, Room2, Hall1, Hall2, Plate

Time

0.1Ð10.0 sec

0Ð200 msec

0Ð100

Thru, 20Ð2000 Hz

1.0Ð20.0 kHz, Thru

0Ð100

PreDLY

Density

HPF

LPF

Thresh (Threshold)

Adjust the basic level at which opening and closing of the

gate will be controlled.

EFLevel

DiLevel

Gate

0Ð100

Off, On

2 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

Attack

Mid.Q (Middle Q)

Adjust the time from when the direct sound level exceeds

the threshold level until when the gate is completely open.

Specify the width of the band around the center frequency

specified for the middle range equalizer in which the gain

adjustment will occur. As this setting is raised, the width of

the band affected will become narrower.

Release

Adjust the time from when the hold time has elapsed until

the sound is completely muted.

HiType (High type)

Select the type of high range equalizer.

HoldTime

Shlv:

Peak:

Shelving type

Peaking type

Adjust the time from when the input falls below the thresh-

old level until when the release begins.

Hi.G (High gain)

Specify the gain (amount of boost/cut) for the high range

equalizer.

EQ (Equalizer)

Off, On

LowType

Low.G

Low.F

Low.Q

Mid.G

Mid.F

Mid.Q

HiType

Hi.G

Shlv, Peak

-12Ð12 dB

20Ð2000 Hz

0.3Ð10

-12Ð12 dB

200Ð8000 Hz

0.3Ð10

Shlv, Peak

-12Ð12 dB

1.4Ð20.0 kHz

0.3Ð10

Hi.F (High frequency)

Specify the center frequency of the high range equalizer.

Hi.Q (High Q)

Specify the width of the band around the center frequency

specified for the high range equalizer in which the gain

adjustment will occur. As this setting is raised, the width of

the band affected will become narrower.

Hi.F

Hi.Q

OutLevel

OutLevel (Output level)

Adjust the volume level after the sound has passed through

the equalizer.

0Ð100

EQ (Equalizer)

Turn the equalizer on/off. If this is turned off, the following

items will not be displayed.

● Sp a ce Ch o ru s

This is a chorus which simulates the Roland SDD-320.

LowType

Output L

Output R

Input L

Input R

Select the type of the low range equalizer.

Space Chorus

Shlv:

Peak:

Shelving type

Peaking type

Low.G (Low gain)

Specify the gain (amount of boost/cut) for the low range

equalizer.

SCH (Space Chorus)

SpaceCho

Off, On

InMod

Mode

MixBal

Mono, Stereo

1, 2, 3, 4, 1+4, 2+4, 3+4

0Ð100

Low.F (Low frequency)

Specify the center frequency of the low range equalizer.

Low.Q (Low Q)

SpaceCho (Space Chorus)

Turn space chorus on/off. If this is turned off, the following

items will not be displayed.

Specify the width of the band around the center frequency

specified for the low range equalizer in which the gain

adjustment will occur. As this setting is raised, the width of

the band affected will become narrower.

InMod (Input mode)

Specify whether the input signal is stereo or mono.

Mid.G (Middle gain)

Specify the gain (amount of boost/cut) for the mid-range

equalizer.

Mode (Space mode)

Select the way in the chorus will change.

Mid.F (Middle frequency)

Specify the center frequency of the mid-range equalizer.

MixBal (Mix balance)

Adjust the balance between the chorus volume and the

direct sound volume.

2 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

● Lo -Fi Pro ce sso r

This allows you to create a Òlo-fiÓ sound by lowering the sample rate and/or decreasing the num-

ber of bits. Realtime modify filters connected in series allow you to reshape the sound freely.

Output L

Input L

Lo-Fi

Realtime

Noise

Processor

Modify Filter

Suppressor

Lo-Fi

Realtime

Noise

Processor

Modify Filter

Suppressor

Input R

Output R

LFP (Lo-fi processor)

LoFiPros

PreFilt

Rate

Off, On

Off, 1/2Ð1/32

Off, 15Ð1 bit

Off, On

Bit

PostFilt

EFLevel

DiLevel

0Ð100

LoFiPros (Lo-fi processor)

Turn the Lo-fi Processor on/off. If this is turned off, the following items will not be displayed.

PreFilt (Pre filter)

This filter decreases digital distortion. By turning this off, you can create an extremely lo-fi sound

that includes aliasing.

Rate

Modify the sample rate. If this is turned off, the sample rate will be the same as the sample rate of

the currently selected song.

Bit

Modify the number of data bits. If this is turned off, the number of data bits will be unchanged.

If an extremely low number of bits is selected, loud noise may appear even when there is no sound,

depending on the input source. In such cases, raise the threshold of the noise suppressor.

PostFilt (Post filter)

This filter decreases the digital distortion produced by lo-fi. By turning this off, you can create an

extremely lo-fi sound.

EFLevel (Effect level)

Adjust the volume of the lo-fi sound.

DiLevel (Direct level)

Adjust the volume of the direct sound.

2 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

RMF (Realtime modify filter)

● 4 -Ba n d Pa ra m e tric Eq u a lize r

This is a 4-band parametric equalizer. It can be used either

as two monaural units or as one stereo unit.

RMF

Type

CutOff

Reso

Gain

Off, On

LPF, BPF, HPF

0Ð100

0Ð24 dB

Input A

Output A

Equalizer

Link

Equalizer

RMF (Realtime modify filter)

Turn the realtime modify filter on/off. If this is turned off,

the following items will not be displayed.

Input B

Output B

Type (Filter type)

Select the filter type.

LPF:

BPF:

HPF:

Low pass filter

Band pass filter

High pass filter

LNK (Link)

EQLink Off, On

EQLink (Equalizer link switch)

CutOff

This is a link switch for channels A and B. If this is turned

off, the channels will function independently as two

monaural channels.

Adjust the cutoff frequency.

Reso (Resonance)

Adjust the resonance.

If this is turned on, both channels will be controlled simul-

taneously by the settings of channel A.

Gain

Adjust the volume level of the sound that has passed

through the realtime modify filter.

EQA/EQB (Parametric equalizer channel A / channel B)

EQAch(EQBch)

InputG

LowType

LowG

LowF

LowQ

Off, On

-60Ð12dB

Shlv, Peak

-12Ð12 dB

20Ð2000 Hz

0.3Ð10

NS (Noise suppressor)

Thresh

0Ð100

Release

0Ð100

Thresh (Threshold)

Adjust the level at which the noise suppressor will begin to

take effect.

LoMidG

LoMidF

LoMidQ

HiMidG

HiMidF

HiMidQ

HiType

HiG

-12Ð12 dB

200Ð8000 Hz

0.3Ð10

-12Ð12 dB

200Ð8000 Hz

0.3Ð10

Shlv, Peak

-12Ð12 dB

1.4Ð20.0 kHz

0.3Ð10

Release

Adjust the time from when the noise suppressor begins to

take effect until the volume reaches 0.

HiF

HiQ

Level

-60Ð12 dB

EQA/EQB (Equalizer channel A / channel B)

Turn the equalizer on/off. When this is turned off, the fol-

lowing items will not be displayed.

InputG (Input gain)

Adjust the overall volume level of the sound before it enters

the equalizer.

LowType (Low type)

Select the type of the low range equalizer.

Shlv:

Peak:

Shelving type

Peaking type

LowG (Low gain)

Specify the gain (amount of boost/cut) for the low range

equalizer.

LowF (Low frequency)

Specify the center frequency of the low range equalizer.

2 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

LowQ (Low Q)

● 1 0 -Ba n d Gra p h ic Eq u a lize r

Specify the width of the band centered on the low range

equalizer center frequency in which the gain adjustment

will occur. As this setting is raised, the width of the band

affected will become narrower.

This simulates a 10-band graphic equalizer. It can be used

either as two monaural units or as one stereo unit.

Input A

Output A

Equalizer

Link

Equalizer

LoMidG (Low middle gain)

Specify the gain (amount of boost/cut) for the low middle

range equalizer.

LoMidF (Low middle frequency)

Input B

Output B

Specify the center frequency of the low middle range equal-

izer.

LoMidQ (Low middle Q)

LNK (Link)

Specify the width of the band centered on the low middle

range equalizer center frequency in which the gain adjust-

ment will occur. As this setting is raised, the width of the

band affected will become narrower.

EQLink

Off, On

EQLink (Equalizer link)

This is the link switch for channels A and B. When this is

turned off, the channels will function independently as two

monaural equalizers.

HiMidG (High middle gain)

Specify the gain (amount of boost/cut) for the high middle

range equalizer.

When this is turned on, both channels will be controlled

simultaneously by the settings of channel A.

HiMidF (High middle frequency)

Specify the center frequency of the high middle range

equalizer.

EQA/EQB (Graphic equalizer channel A / channel B)

EQAch(EQBch)

InputG

31.2Hz

62.5Hz

125Hz

250Hz

500Hz

1kHz

Off, On

-60Ð12 dB

-12Ð12 dB

-60Ð12 dB

HiMidQ (High middle Q)

Specify the width of the band centered on the high middle

range equalizer center frequency in which the gain adjust-

ment will occur. As this setting is raised, the width of the

band affected will become narrower.

2kHz

4kHz

HiType (High type)

Select the type of high range equalizer.

8kHz

16kHz

Level

Shlv:

Peak:

Shelving type

Peaking type

HiG (High gain)

Specify the gain (amount of boost/cut) for the high range

equalizer.

EQA/EQB (Equalizer channel A / channel B)

Turn the equalizer on/off. If this is turned off, the following

items will not be displayed.

HiF (High frequency)

Specify the center frequency of the high range equalizer.

InputG (Input gain)

Adjust the overall volume level of the sound before it pass-

es through the equalizer.

HiQ (High Q)

Specify the width of the band centered on the high range

equalizer center frequency in which the gain adjustment

will occur. As this setting is raised, the width of the band

affected will become narrower.

31.2Hz–16kHz (Gain)

Adjust the gain (amount of boost/cut) of the equalizer for

each frequency.

Level (Output level)

Adjust the volume level of the sound which as passed

through the equalizer.

Level (Output level)

Adjust the overall volume level of the sound that has

passed through the equalizer.

2 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

NS (Noise suppressor)

● Hu m Ca n ce le r

This removes unwanted hum (electrical ÒbuzzÓ or ÒdroneÓ).

NoiseSup

Off, On

Thresh

0Ð100

Release

0Ð100

Input A

Output A

Noise

Suppressor

Hum Canceler

Thresh (Threshold)

Adjust the level at which the noise suppressor will begin to

operate.

Noise

Suppressor

Release

Input B

Output B

Adjust the time from when the noise suppressor begins to

operate to when the volume reaches 0.

HC (Hum canceller)

● Vo ca l Ca n ce lle r

HumCancel Off, On

When a stereo source is being input from CD or DAT etc.,

this cancels the sound which is located in the stereo center,

such as the vocal or bass.

Freq

20.0Ð800.0 Hz

Width

Depth

Thresh

RngL

RngH

10Ð40 %

0Ð100

Unlimit, 20Ð2000 Hz

1.0Ð20.0 kHz, Unlimit

Output L

Input L

Input R

Equalizer

Vocal Canceler

HumCancel (Hum canceller)

Turn the hum canceller on/off. If this is turned off, the fol-

lowing items will not be displayed.

Output R

* Depending on the musical source, sounds that you do not

wish to be canceled may be canceled as well. In particular

if the musical source has heavy reverb or if the sound that

you wish to delete is not located in the center, the vocal

canceller may not produce the desired result.

Freq (Frequency)

Hum will be removed at the specified frequency and at

multiples of that frequency. Set it to match the frequency of

your power supply.

Width

Specify the width of the filter which will remove the hum.

VC (Vocal canceller)

VclCancel

Balance

RngL

Off, On

0Ð100

Unlimit, 20Ð2000 Hz

1.0Ð20.0 kHz, Unlimit

Depth

Specify the depth of the filter which will remove the hum.

RngH

Thresh (Threshold)

Adjust the level at which the hum canceller will begin to

take effect. If the signal falls below the specified level, only

the hum will be removed from the signal. With the maxi-

mum setting, hum will always be removed regardless of the

level of the signal.

VclCancel (Vocal canceller)

Turn the vocal canceller on/off. If this is turned off, the fol-

lowing items will not be displayed.

Balance

If the sound that you wish to cancel is not located in the

center, find the point at which it is most effectively can-

celed.

RngL (Range low)

Specify the lower limit of the frequency range in which the

hum canceler will operate. With a setting of Unlimit, the

limit will be the lowest frequency that the VS-880 is capable

of playing back.

RngL (Range low)

Specify the lower limit of the frequency range from which

you wish to cancel a sound. Use this setting when you wish

to decrease the volume of the vocal without affecting a low-

frequency instrument (such as bass) located in the center.

With a setting of Unlimit, the lowest frequency which the

VS-880 is capable of Playing back will be the lower limit.

RngH (Range high)

Specify the upper limit of the frequency range in which the

hum canceller will operate. With a setting of Unlimit, the

limit will be the highest frequency that the VS-880 is capable

of Playing back.

RngH (Range high)

Specify the upper limit of the frequency range from which

you wish to cancel a sound. Use this setting when you wish

to decrease the volume of the vocal without affecting a

high-frequency instrument located in the center. With a set-

ting of Unlimit, the highest frequency which the VS-880 is

capable of Playing back will be the upper limit.

2 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

Hi.F (High frequency)

Specify the center frequency of the high range equalizer.

EQ (Equalizer)

Off, On

LowType

Low.G

Low.F

Low.Q

Mid.G

Mid.F

Mid.Q

HiType

Hi.G

Hi.F

Shlv, Peak

-12Ð12 dB

20Ð2000 Hz

0.3Ð10

-12Ð12 dB

200Ð8000 Hz

0.3Ð10

Shlv, Peak

-12Ð12 dB

1.4Ð20.0 kHz

0.3Ð10

Hi.Q (High Q)

Specify the width of the band centered on the high range

equalizer center frequency in which the gain adjustment

will occur. As this setting is raised, the width of the band

affected will become narrower.

OutLevel (Output level)

Adjust the volume level of the sound that has passed

through the equalizer.

Hi.Q

OutLevel

0Ð100

● Vo co d e r 2

This is a 19 band vocoder. A clear sound that was not possi-

ble with conventional vocoders can be obtained.

Input an instrumental sound into the left channel, and a

voice into the right channel.

EQ (Equalizer)

Turn the equalizer on/off. When this is off, the following

items will not be displayed.

* Vocoder 2 can be used only for EFFECT-1. Also, EFFECT-

2 will not be available for use.

LowType

Select the type of the low range equalizer.

Shlv:

Peak:

Shelving type

Peaking type

Input L

(Instrument)

Output L

Low.G (Low gain)

Specify the gain (amount of boost/cut) for the low range

equalizer.

Vocoder

Stereo Chorus

Input R(Mic)

Output R

Low.F (Low frequency)

Specify the center frequency of the low range equalizer.

Noise

Suppressor

Low.Q (Low Q)

Specify the width of the band centered on the low range

equalizer center frequency in which the gain adjustment

will occur. As this setting is raised, the width of the band

affected will become narrower.

VOC (Vocoder)

Env

Sharp, Soft, Long

Pan

Mono, Stereo, L➝R, R➝L

Hold

MicSens

SynInLev

Off, MIDI

0Ð100

Mid.G (Middle gain)

Specify the gain (amount of boost/cut) for the mid range

equalizer.

V.Char1-19 0Ð100

MHPF

Thru, 1.0Ð20.0 kHz

MHPFPan

MicMix

NSThresh

L63ÐR63

0Ð100

Mid.F (Middle frequency)

Specify the center frequency of the mid range equalizer.

Mid.Q (Middle Q)

Env (Envelope)

Specify the width of the band centered on the mid range

equalizer center frequency in which the gain adjustment

will occur. As this setting is raised, the width of the band

affected will become narrower.

Sharp:

Soft:

Long:

The human voice will be emphasized.

The instrumental sound will be emphasized.

A vintage sound with long decay will be pro-

duced.

HiType (High type)

Select the type of the high range equalizer.

Pan

Select Mono, Stereo, L➝R or R➝L. With a setting of Mono,

the components of each frequency band will be located in

the center. With a setting of Stereo, the odd-numbered fre-

quency bands will be located at the left, and the even-num-

bered components at the right. With a setting of L➝R, the

low frequency bands will be located increasingly toward

the left, and the high frequency bands will be located

increasingly toward the right. With a setting of R➝L, the

low frequency bands will be located increasingly toward

the right, and the high frequency bands will be located

increasingly toward the left.

Shelv:

Peak:

Shelving type

Peaking type

Hi.G (High gain)

Specify the gain (amount of boost/cut) for the high range

equalizer.

2 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

Hold

● Vo ice Tra n sfo rm e r

This turns the Hold function on/off. When MIDI is selected,

the MIDI control change message Hold will be received.

The MIDI channel is fixed at 1. If you turn Hold on while a

voice is being input into the mic, the instrument will sound

with the vocal formats that are fixed at that time.

This independently controls the basic pitch and the for-

mants, allowing a variety of voice characters to be created.

Input L

Output L

MicSens (Mic sensitivity)

Adjust the input sensitivity of the mic.

Voice

Reverb

Transformer

Output R

SynInLev (Synthesizer in level)

Adjust the input level of the instrument.

Input R

V.Char1–19 (Voice character)

Adjust the volume of each frequency band. This setting

adjusts the tone of the vocoder.

* Voice Transformer can be used only in EFFECT-1. Also,

EFFECT-2 will not be available for use.

As the value is increased, the frequency will rise.

< Hints for voice input >

Input only a single voice. If several voices are input, the

VS-880 will not operate properly.

Be sure that sound from a speaker does not enter the

microphone you are using. This will have the same effect

as if several voices were input to the unit (i.e. the VS-880

will not function properly).

MHPF (Mic HPF)

When mic mix is used, this adjusts the frequency at which

the high pass filter (HPF) will begin to affect the mic audio.

Higher values for this setting will allow you to mix only the

consonants. With a setting of Thru, the HPF will not be

applied.

We recommend that you use a unidirectional micro-

phone; speak or sing as close to the microphone as possi-

ble.

MHPFPan (Mic HPF pan)

Adjust the panning of the mic audio.

MicMix (Mic mix)

Adjust the amount of the mic audio (R channel input) which

has passed through the mic HPF that will be added to the

output of the vocoder.

VT (Voice transformer)

VoiceTrns

Robot

C.Pitch

Off, On

-12Ð36

NSThresh (Noise suppressor threshold)

Adjust the level at which the noise suppressor applied to

the instrumental input (R channel input) will begin to func-

tion.

F.Pitch

-100Ð100

-12Ð12

-100Ð100

0Ð100

C.Formant

F.Formant

MixBal

CHO (Chorus)

VoiceTrns (Voice transformer)

Turn the voice transformer on/off. If this is off, the follow-

ing items will not be displayed.

Chorus

Rate

Depth

PreDLY

MixBal

Off, On

0.1Ð10.0 Hz

0Ð100

0Ð50.0 msec

0Ð100

Robot

Turn the robot function on/off. When this is on, the audio

will be output at a fixed pitch regardless of the pitch that is

input, producing a voice character without inflection.

Chorus

Turn the chorus on/off. If this is turned off, the following

items will not be displayed.

C.Pitch (Coarse pitch)

Adjust the pitch of the voice character in semitone steps.

This can be adjusted over a range of 1 octave down to three

octaves up.

Rate

Adjust the modulation rate of the chorus.

Depth

F.Pitch (Fine pitch)

Make fine adjustments to the pitch of the voice character.

Adjust the modulation depth of the chorus.

PreDLY (Pre delay)

Adjust the time from when the direct sound is output until

the chorus sound is output.

C.Formant (Coarse formant)

Adjust the formant of the voice character in semitone steps.

F.Formant (Fine formant)

Make fine adjustments to the formant of the voice character.

MixBal (Mix balance)

Adjust the balance between the chorus volume and the

direct volume.

3 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

< Formants >

< Channel 1(Robot) >

A formant is an important element which determine the

character of a vocal sound. It is a fixed overtone whose

location is determined by the size of the vocal chords.

Conventional pitch shifters modify the pitch in a way that

changes even the location of the formants (which by

nature do not change). For example when a conventional

pitch shifter raises the pitch, a Òduck voiceÓ is produced

as if the vocal chords had shrunk, and when the pitch is

lowered a Ògiant voiceÓ is produced as if the vocal chords

had expanded.

Moving the fader above the middle will turn this on, and

downward will turn it off.

< Channel 2(C.Pitch+F.Pitch) >

Coarse Pitch and Fine Pitch will change simultaneously to

smoothly change the pitch.

< Channel 3 (C.Formant+F.Formant) >

Coarse Formant and Fine Formant will change simultane-

ously to smoothly change the formant.

The Voice Transformer modifies the basic pitch and the

formant separately, allowing a variety of voice characters

to be created.

MID (MIDI control)

MIDICtrl

PitchBnd

Portamen

Off, On

Off, 1Ð12

Off, 1Ð100

MixBal (Mix balance)

Adjust the balance between the voice character volume and

the normal voice volume.

MIDICtrl (MIDI control)

Turn MIDI control on/off. When this is on, MIDI note on

messages and pitch bend messages will adjust the pitch and

formant. This is effective when a MIDI keyboard etc. is con-

nected.

REV (Reverb)

Reverb

Off, On

Time

0.1Ð10.0 sec

0Ð200 msec

0Ð100

MIDI channel 1:

C.Pitch+F.Pitch (C2ÐC6, original

key is C3)

C.Formant+F.Formant (C2ÐC4,

original key is C3)

PreDLY

Density

RevLevel

MIDI channel 2:

0Ð100

* The MIDI channels on which the pitch and formant are

adjusted are fixed respectively at 1 and 2. They cannot be

changed to other channels.

Reverb

Turn reverb on/off. If this is off, the following items will

not be displayed.

Time

PitchBnd (Pitch bend)

Adjust the reverb time.

Specify the maximum change produced by pitch bend

(bend range), in semitone steps.

PreDLY (Pre delay)

Adjust the time until the reverb sound is heard.

Portamen (Portamento)

Specify the speed at which the portamento effect will

change.

Density

Adjust the density of the reverb sound.

RevLevel (Reverb level)

Adjust the volume of the reverb sound.

FE (Fader edit)

FaderEdit

Off, On

FaderEdit

This switch allows you to use the channel faders of the top

panel to modify the various settings of the Voice

Transformer. If this is on, channel faders 1Ð5 will control the

following settings.

* Fader Edit is valid only when you are in Effect Edit condi-

tion. In other conditions, the faders will control the vol-

ume level of each channel as usual. Also, it will fail to

operate in Auto Mix (p.17).

Channel 1: Robot

Channel 2: C.Pitch+F.Pitch

Channel 3: C.Formant+F.Formant

Channel 4: MixBal

Channel 5: RevLevel

3 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

● Mic Sim u la to r

This modifies sound that was recorded by a conventional dynamic mic, lapel mic or direct line,

causing it to sound as though it had been recorded by an expensive condenser mic or a special stu-

dio mic. The mic simulator can add effects of proximity or distance.

Input A

Output A

Mic Converter

Bass Cut Filter

Distance

Limiter

Link

Input B

Output B

LNK (Link)

MSLink

Off, On

MSLink (Mic simulator link)

This is the link switch for channels A and B. If this is off, the two channels will function indepen-

dently as two monaural channels.

If this is on, both channels will be controlled simultaneously by the settings of channel A.

MCA/MCB (Mic converter channel A / channel B)

MicConv

Off, On

Input

Out

Phase

DR-20, Sml.Dy, Hed.Dy, Min.Cn, Flat

Sml.Dy, Voc.Dy, Lrg.Dy, Sml.Cn, Lrg.Cn, Vnt.Cn, Flat

Normal, Invers

< Microphone ➝ Microphone conversion >

This converts the characteristics of an inexpensive general purpose mic into the characteristics of

an expensive studio mic. For an already-recorded sound, it can create the same tonal change as if

the type or distance of the mic had been changed.

< Line ➝ Microphone conversion >

This adds a feeling of ÒairÓ to an instrumental sound that was recorded by direct line input, caus-

ing it to sound as though it had been recorded with a microphone.

MicConv (Mic converter)

Turn the mic converter on/off. If this is off, the following items will not be displayed.

Input

Select the type of mic that was actually used to record.

DR-20:

Roland DR-20

Sml.Dy: Small Dynamic Microphone

Hed.Dy: Head-worn Dynamic Microphone

Min.Cn: Miniature Condenser Microphone

Flat:

Line Input

Out

Specify the mic that will be simulated.

Sml.Dy: General purpose dynamic mic for instruments or vocals.

Ideal for guitar amp or snare drum.

Voc.Dy: A popular dynamic mic for vocals.

Characterized by a tight mid-range. Use for vocals.

Lrg.Dy:

Dynamic mic with extended low end.

Use for bass drum or tom, etc.

Sml.Cn: Small condenser mic for instruments.

Characterized by a sparkling high range. Use for metallic percussion or acoustic guitar.

Lrg.Cn: Condenser mic with flat response.

Use for vocals, narration, or acoustic instruments etc.

3 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

LMA/LMB (Limiter channel A / channel B)

Vnt.Cn: Vintage condenser mic.

Use for vocals or acoustic instruments etc.

Limiter

Off, On

Flat:

Mic with flat frequency response.

For cancelling the characteristics of the mic

used for recording.

Freq

Thru, 20Ð2000 Hz

-60Ð24 dB

-60Ð0 dB

Level

Thrsh

Attack

0Ð100

* When you select a condenser-type mic simulator, the low

range response is strengthened. This may cause noise

transmitted from the mic stand to be emphasized. In this

case, either use a bass cut filter to cut the unwanted low

range, or equip the mic stand that you use at the time of

recording with an isolation mount (a mic holder that uses

rubber etc. to absorb vibration).

Release 0Ð100

Limiter

Turn the limiter on/off. If this is off, the following items

will not be displayed.

Freq (Frequency)

Adjust the cutoff frequency of the level detection section.

With a setting of Thru, this will operate as a conventional

limiter.

Phase

Normally you will set this to Normal.

In cases such as when mics are placed both in front of and

behind the instrument for recording, setting one of them to

Invert will produce a solid sound with a unified phase.

Level

Adjust the output level.

Thrsh (Threshold)

Normal: Same phase as the input

Adjust the level at which the limiter will begin to function.

Invers:

Opposite phase as the input

Attack

BCA/BCB (Bass cut filter channel A / channel B)

Adjust the time from when the input level exceeds the

threshold level until the limiter begins to be applied.

BassCut Off, On

Freq

Thru, 20Ð2000 Hz

Release

< Bass cut filter >

Adjust the time from when the input level falls below the

threshold level until the limiter ceases to apply.

This is a filter that cuts unwanted low range noise, such

as pops. It simulates the bass cut switch that is found on

some mics.

■ Ad ju stin g th e se n d le ve l a n d

BassCut (Bass cut)

Turn the bass cut on/off. If this is off, the following items

will not be displayed.

b a la n ce fo r a ll e ffe cts

You can now adjust the overall send level and balance of

each effect without affecting the effect send level (VS8F-1

ownerÕs manual p.9) and effect pan (VS8F-1 ownerÕs manu-

al p.9) that were set for each channel.

Freq (Frequency)

Normally you will select Thru, and you can adjust the fre-

quency if the attack contains a section of low volume.

1 . Press [EDIT(SOLO)] several times until the “MST EFF1

SND Lev=” display appears.

DSA/DSB (Distance channel A / channel B)

Distance Off, On

This display will not appear (the setting cannot be

made) if EFFECT-1 is inserted into another channel, or

inserted into the MASTER OUT jack.

Prox.Fx -12Ð+12

Time

0Ð3000 cm

2 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

< Distance (proximity effect) >

EFF1 SND Lev (Effect 1 send level)

Adjust the send level. The default value is 100.

Microphones have a characteristic which causes the low

frequency range to be boosted when the sound source is

nearby. This setting simulates this phenomenon.

3 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒMST EFF1 SND Bal=Ó.

This display will not appear (the setting cannot be

made) if EFFECT-1 is inserted into another channel, or

into the MASTER OUT jack.

Distance

Turn Distance on/off. If this is off, the following items will

not be displayed.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

Prox.Fx (Proximity effects)

Adjust the low frequency response that is affected by the

mic distance from the sound source. Adjustment in the [+]

direction will move the mic closer to the sound source, and

in the [-] direction will move it away from the sound source.

EFF1 SND Bal (Effect 1 send balance)

Adjust the left/right volume balance. The initial value is 0

(center).

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

You will return to Play condition.

The send level and balance can be adjusted for EFFECT-2 in

the same way.

Time

This simulates the time difference due to distance from the

sound source.

3 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

■ In se rtin g a n e ffe ct

When you wish to use an effect such as compressor or distortion which modifies the direct sound

itself, insert the effect between the equalizer and the fader. When an effect is inserted into one of

the channels, that effect will be unavailable for use by other channels. For example if you insert

EFFECT-1 into channel 1, it will not be possible for other channels to use EFFECT-1.

* If you insert different effects in each channel, or mix a channel in which effects are inserted with

a channel in which effects are not inserted, time differences may occur depending on the type of

effect, and the result may not always be as you expect.

Post

Fader

MIX buss

Pre

Off

Pan

MASTER OUT (L, R)

AUX SEND (A, B)

EFFECT 1

Post

Pre

AUX buss

Level

Off

Post

Pre

EFFECT 1 buss

Level Pan

EFFECT 1

Off

Insert

cannot be used

Post

Pre

EFFECT 2 buss

Level Pan

MIX buss or

AUX buss

EFFECT 2

Off

Insert

Channel 1

1 . Press [CH EDIT] for the channel to which you wish to apply the effect.

2 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press channel 7 [EFFECT-1(CH EDIT)].

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

3 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

3 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

The processing when InsertL or InsertR is selected is the

same as if an effect were inserted with Channel Link (p.112)

turned on. Also, InsertL, InsertR, InsertS will not be dis-

played if Channel Link is on.

EFFECT1 (Effect 1 switch)

Select how the signal will be sent to the EFFECT1 buss.

Off:

Not sent.

PreFade: The signal before the channel fader will be

sent.

PstFade: The signal after the channel fader will be sent.

4 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒEFF1 InsSend=.Ó

Insert:

Insert between the equalizer and the fader.

5 . Adjust the effect send level. Rotate the TIME/VALUE

InsertL: Insert into the L side of a stereo effect.

InsertR: Insert into the R side of a stereo effect.

InsertS: Insert the L side and R side of a stereo effect

in series.

dial.

6 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒEFF1 InsRtn=Ó.

7 . Adjust the effect return level. Rotate the TIME/VALUE

< Insert >

dial.

Insert both channels of a stereo effect (same as previous

version).

* Steps 4Ð7 will be displayed only if the effect is being

inserted.

EFFECT-2 can be inserted in the same way. In this case,

hold down [SHIFT] and press channel 8 [EFFECT-2(CH

EDIT)] in step 2.

CH1

Effects

Equalizer

Processor

Re co rd in g w h ile a n e ffe ct is in se rte d

When recording guitar or vocals, it will often be convenient

to insert an effect such as a guitar multi or a vocal multi.

This type of Òwet recordingÓ can now be done in

INPUT➝TRACK.

CH2

Effects

Equalizer

Processor

Here we will explain the procedure for connecting a guitar

to input 1, using a guitar multi Patch to apply stereo effects,

and recording the result to tracks 1 and 2.

< InsertL >

< InsertR >

Insert into one channel of a stereo channel, respectively.

This is convenient when you wish to apply a compressor

to four channels independently.

1 . Connect a guitar to input 1.

< When connecting a guitar >

In order to record the guitar with the best possible sound

quality, please use an active-type guitar. Alternatively, use

a direct box (such as the BOSS DI-1) or a compact-type

effect unit.

In this case, the compact effect unit will be used to lower

the impedance. Thus, turn the power on and the effect off

if you do not need to use the effect.

CH1

Equalizer

Effects

Processor

CH2

CH3

Equalizer

Effects

Processor

2 . Make sure that the mixer mode is INPUT➝TRACK.If it

is INPUT MIX/TRACK MIX, press [SHIFT]+[SELECT].

CH4

3 . Press track 1 [CH EDIT].

4 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press track 1 [Input/Buss(CH

< InsertS >

EDIT)].

Insert each channel of a stereo channel in series.

5 . Select the input which will be recorded onto track 1.

Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select

INPUT-1.

CH1

Equalizer

Effects

6 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press track 7 [EFFECT-1(CH

Processor

EDIT)].

7 . Select how you wish to use the effect. Rotate the

CH2

TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select InsertL.

Equalizer

Effects

Processor

8 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until the dis-

play indicates “CH1 EQ/Eff Pre Ins=.”

9 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select

“On.”

3 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

EQ/EffPreIns (Equalizer/effect pre-insert switch)

Select whether the equalizer and effect will be inserted dur-

ing recording.

In se rtin g to th e m a ste r o u t

It is now possible to insert effect into the MASTER OUT

jacks. This is convenient when you wish to apply a com-

pressor or equalizer to the combined output of the channels

that have been mixed.

Off: They will not be inserted (same as Ver.1).

On: The signal into which the equalizer and effect have

been inserted will be recorded.

1 . Press [EDIT(SOLO)] until the “MST EFF1 INS Sw=” dis-

play appears.

1 0 . Press track 2 [CH EDIT].

If EFFECT-1 is already inserted into another channel, the

display will indicate ÒMST EFF1 INS Sw=ÑÓ (the setting

cannot be made).

1 1 . Repeat steps 5–9 to make the same settings as for

track 1. However in step 7, select InsertR.

1 2 . Press [EFFECT] several times until the display indi-

2 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

cates “EFF EFFECT-1 PRM?”

1 3 . Press [YES].

EFF1 INS Sw (Effect 1 insert switch)

Off:

The effect will not be inserted into the master out

(same as Ver.1).

The effect will be inserted into the master out.

1 4 . Select the effect that you wish to use. Rotate the

TIME/VALUE dial.

On:

For this example, a selection such as A51 GT:Country

will make it easy to hear the results.

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

You will return to Play condition.

1 5 . Press [YES].

1 6 . Following the procedure for “Recording” (Quick start,

EFFECT-2 can be inserted in the same way.

p.9), record onto tracks 1 and 2.

In se rtin g tw o e ffe cts in to o n e ch a n n e l

It is now possible to insert two effects into the same chan-

nel.

Follow the procedure for ÒInserting an effectÓ (p.34) and

ÒInserting an effect into master out,Ó and insert EFFECT-1

and EFFECT-2 into the same channel.

* The effects will always be inserted in the order of

EFFECT-2➝EFFECT-1. It is not possible to change the

order of connection.

In se rtin g in ste re o

If you wish to insert an effect (with a stereo patch algo-

rithm) in stereo, turn on Channel Link (p.112).

If you insert an effect into a channel for which Channel Link

is turned off, it will become a mono input/output effect

regardless of the patch.

* It is also possible to insert in stereo by selecting InsertL

for the L side and InsertR for the R side, as in ÒRecording

while an effect is insertedÓ (p.35).

3 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

RemainDsp (Remaining display)

Specify how the remaining disk capacity will be displayed.

Disp la y re la te d

Time:

Displayed as recording time (minutes/sec-

onds) (same as Ver.1).

■ Ho ld in g th e le ve l m e te r p e a k s

When the bar display (p.114) is the level meter, you can

now cause the maximum volume value (peak) to remain (be

held) in the display.

CapaMB: Displayed as actual capacity (MB).

Capa%: Displayed as percentage (%) of capacity of the

entire disk.

Event:

Displayed as the number of events used for

recording.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

You will return to Play condition.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System

PRM?” appears.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until the dis-

play indicates “SYS PeakHoldSw=”.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

PeakHoldSw (Peak hold switch)

When Pre Level or Post Level is displayed in the bar dis-

play, you can specify whether the peaks will be held.

OFF: Peaks will not be held (same as Ver.1).

ON: Peaks will be held.

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

You will return to Play condition.

To reset the peak display, press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

■ Ch e ck in g th e re m a in in g d isk

ca p a city

The REMAINING TIME column indicates the approximate

time (capacity) remaining for recording in the current song.

You can now specify the type of this display.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until the “SYS System

PRM?” display appears.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until the “SYS

RemainDsp=” display appears.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

3 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

To h a lt d u rin g th e p ro ce d u re

To halt surface scan during the procedure, press [CAN-

CEL(NO)]. However, even if unusable memory had been

found, it will not be registered.

Disk d rive re la te d

■ Ch e ck in g th e re lia b ility o f a

d isk

When a disk drive is initialized, the entire area of that drive

is now checked (surface scanned) to determine whether

reading and writing can be performed correctly. If a loca-

tion which cannot be correctly read or written is found, the

VS-880 will flag that location as unusable memory.

Subsequently, such locations will not be used for recording

or playback etc.

When this procedure is performed, the contents that were

saved on the disk will all be lost. Perform this procedure on

a newly purchased disk, or on a disk that had been used on

another computer etc. but is now to be used on the VS-880.

Before performing this procedure on the disk that you are

currently using, be sure to make a backup.

If th e d isp la y in d ica te s “ File Sy ste m

Err”

A read or write failure has occurred in a location which

stores basic data used by the VS-880 for recording and play-

back. This disk drive cannot be used by the VS-880.

9 -1 . Press [YES].

The VS-880 will restart.

If th e d isp la y in d ica te s “ _____De fe ct”

The underlined portion will indicate the number of unus-

able memory locations in this drive. The larger this num-

ber is, the lower the reliability of this drive.

* The surface scan operation requires a substantial amount

of time. For example, the internal IDE drive (540 MB) will

require approximately 30 minutes. This will give you an

idea of how much time will be required for the capacity of

your disk drive.

9 -2 . Press [YES].

The VS-880 will restart.

If the d isp la y ind ica tes “ — Com p lete —”

This drive has no unusable memory.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS

9 -3 . Press [YES].

DriveInitialize?” is displayed.

The VS-880 will restart.

2 . Press [YES].

■ Ch e ck in g th a t a d isk is n o t

3 . Select the drive that will be initialized. Rotate the

TIME/VALUE dial.

d a m a g e d

It is now possible to check that the drive you are using can

be read correctly (Drive Check).

This provides a way to determine whether a failure during

Song Copy (p.78) or DAT Backup (p.97) is due to a problem

in the song itself that was saved on disk, or whether the

problem is with the connections etc.

Init.Drive (Initialize drive)

Select the disk drive that will be initialized.

4 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

SurfaceScan=” appears.

For physical formatting (PhysicalFmt) and partitioning

(Partition), refer to ÒInitializing the diskÓ (p.93).

If data cannot be read correctly, the display will indicate the

song in which the error occurred.

5 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] until the “SYS Drive Check ?” display

SurfaceScan (Surface scan)

Off: Read and write test will not be performed (same as

Ver.1).

appears.

2 . Press [YES].

On: Read and write test will be performed.

3 . Select the drive that you wish to check. Rotate the

TIME/VALUE dial.

6 . Press [YES].

A message will ask you to confirm that you really want

to initialize the disk.

CheckDrive (Check drive)

Select the disk drive that you wish to check.

7 . Press [YES] two more times.

4 . Press [YES].

Disk initialization will begin.

A message will ask you to confirm that you wish to

check the drive.

8 . When initialization ends, surface scan will begin auto-

matically.

5 . Press [YES] once again.

The display will indicate ÒSTORE Current ?Ó

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

6 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES].

If you wish to perform the test without storing the cur-

rent song, press [NO].

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

3 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

Cluster Info. (Cluster information)

7 . Drive check will begin.

Total:

Defect:

Number of clusters on the entire disk

Number of clusters tagged as unusable

memory

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

Used:

Free:

Number of clusters currently being used

Number of clusters currently not being

used

X-Link Err: Number of cross-linked clusters

Loose Area: Number of clusters whose links are lost

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

IllegalDIR:

Number of directories with incorrect con-

tent.

Read Error: Number of read errors detected by this

operation

8 . When drive check ends, the following display will

appear. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

< Clusters >

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

These are the smallest unit of memory that the VS-880

uses to manage data on a disk drive.

The smallest physical units on a disk drive are called

either sectors or blocks, and depending on the device,

the size that is handled can be selected. For example, the

VS-880 is designed to use disks with 512 bytes/sector.

When the VS-880 manages song data, it handles 64 sectors

as a single unit (1 cluster). This means that 512 (bytes) x 64

(sectors) = 32768 bytes (32 kilobytes) is one cluster.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

< Cross link >

To sto p d u rin g th e p ro ce d u re

To stop the drive check during the procedure, press [CAN-

CEL(NO)].

This is an error in which a cluster is detected as being

included in two or more songs. In such a case, a complete-

ly different song may be heard in the middle of a song.

Such an error condition is referred to as a cross link.

If th e d isp la y in d ica te s “ N o Err”

< Loose Areas >

9 -1 . The entire disk could be read correctly. Press [YES].

An error in which clusters not included in any song are

detected as containing valid data. In this case, the VS-880

will not store data in those clusters. A situation which

causes this error to occur is called a Loose Area.

You will return to Play condition.

If th e d isp la y in d ica te s “ ___ Err”

The underlines portion will display the number of times

that a read error occurred. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

The display will indicate ÒErrÓ for locations where an error

was found. Locations for which ÒOKÓ was displayed have

no problems.

< Directories >

The VS-880 stores data such as audio data or parameter

values on disk in units called files. In order to manage

large numbers of files, the VS-880 keeps lists of filenames

and the locations on disk in which the data of these files is

stored. These lists are called directories.

The Illegal Directory message will appear when this list is

incorrect. For example, this message will appear if the

data of a certain file is supposed to be recorded in an area

of the disk which does not actually exist, or if the list itself

becomes permanently unreadable.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

If a disk error is found, it is possible to erase only the data

that was lost as a result of the error. I.e., the disk can be

restored to a correct operating condition while keeping as

much possible of the non-error data.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

Result List (Drive check results)

* This procedure does not correct the disk error. All error

locations will be erased. This means that depending on

the location in which the error occurred, a take that was

recorded may no longer be playable, auto mix data may

be lost, or even the entire song itself may be erased. If the

error has occurred in the system or song list, the probabil-

ity of this danger is especially high.

System:

Location where basic data used by the VS-

880 for recording and playback is stored

Location where the saved songs are man-

aged

Song List:

InitSong 001:

InitSong 002: Each song (in actual use, the song name is

displayed)

InitSong 200:

3 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

9 -2 . Press PARAMETER [

Sy n ch ro n iza tio n re la te d

The display will indicate ÒRecoverDriveTry?Ó

There may be cases in which you wish to use MIDI Clock

messages to synchronize an external MIDI sequencer etc. to

a song which was recorded without using the metronome.

In such cases, it is now possible to assign mark points

according to the tempo of the recorded performance, and

then generate a sync track or tempo map from these mark

points.

9 -3 . Press [YES].

9 -4 . If any data will be lost, the display will indicate “You’ll

Lose Data”. Press [YES].To cancel the operation press

[NO].

9 -5 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

Songs that have been partially modified will be marked

as ÒAdj,Ó and songs that were deleted will be marked

as ÒDel.Ó Songs which were not affected will not be dis-

played.

■ Assig n m a rk p o in ts a cco rd in g

to th e te m p o

RecoverResult (Recovery result)

1 . Press [ZERO].

InitSong 001:

2 . Press [PLAY].

InitSong 003: Modified songs (in actual operation, the

The song will begin to playback.

song name)

3 . While listening to the song, press [TAP] at the begin-

InitSong 200:

ning of each measure or beat.

Cluster Info. (Cluster information)

4 . When you finish assigning mark points, press [STOP].

Total:

Defect:

Number of clusters on the entire disk

Number of clusters marked as unusable

memory

Number of clusters currently being used

Number of clusters currently unused

* If you wish to assign mark points precisely to the begin-

ning of measures or beats, use the Preview function

(p.76).

Used:

Free:

■ W h e n u sin g th e sy n c tra ck

9 -6 .Press [YES].

You will return to Play condition.

Ge n e ra tin g a sy n c tra ck fro m m a rk

p o in ts

A sync track can be generated from mark points that were

assigned according to the tempo of a previously recorded

performance. This is convenient when you have already

recorded a performance of an acoustic instrument such as

guitar or vocal, and now wish to synchronize a MIDI

sequencer etc. to the recording.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS

Sync/Tempo?” appears.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒSYS Syn:GenÓ.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. In this case, choose

SyncTr.

Gen (Sync generator)

This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. When using a

synchronization signal from the VS-880 to synchronize

external MIDI devices, set this to the desired type of syn-

chronization signal.

Off:

Synchronization signals will not be transmit-

ted.

MTC:

MIDI Time Code will be transmitted.

MIDIClk: MIDI Clock will be transmitted.

SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track

will be transmitted.

5 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times to get the

“SYS Sync.Tr Cnv?” display.

6 . Press [YES].

4 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

CV (Convert)

CV1=Tap ➝ S.Tr:

7 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. In this case, choose CV1.

Create a sync track from mark

points.

CV (Convert)

CV1=Tap ➝ S.Tr:

Create a sync track from mark

points.

CV2=Tap ➝ T.Map: Create a tempo map from mark

points.

CV2=Tap ➝ T.Map: Create a tempo map from mark

CV3=S.Tr ➝ T.Map: Create a tempo map from the sync

track.

CV4=Time ➝ S.Tr: Automatically create a sync track.

points.

CV3=S.Tr ➝ T.Map: Create a tempo map from the sync

track.

8 . Press PARAMETER [

CV4=Time ➝ S.Tr: Automatically create a sync track.

The display will indicate ÒSYS CV3:S.TrBeat=Ó.

8 . Press PARAMETER [

9 . Specify the number of beats per measure in the syn-

chronization signal that is recorded in the sync track.

Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

The display will indicate ÒSYS CV:Beat=Ó.

9 . Specify the number of beats in one measure. Rotate

the TIME/VALUE dial.

1 0 . Press [YES].

1 0 . Press PARAMETER [

A message will ask you to confirm that you wish to re-

create the tempo map.

The display will indicate ÒSYS CV:Tap Beat=Ó.

1 1 . Specify the number of mark points in each measure.

1 1 . Press [YES] once again.

Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

The tempo map will be created.

1 2 . Press [YES].

A message will ask you to confirm that you wish to re-

create the sync track and tempo track.

Cre a tin g th e sy n c tra ck a u to m a tica lly

You can automatically create a sync track by specifying the

start and end times of the song, and the number of mea-

sures that it contains. This is convenient when you already

know the length of the song, such as for commercials.

1 3 . Press [YES] one (or two) more times.

The sync track will be created.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS

Ge n e ra tin g th e te m p o m a p fro m th e

sy n c tra ck

Sync/Tempo?” appears.

A tempo map can be created from the sync track recorded

by the VS-880.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

This is convenient when you wish to convert the synchro-

nization signal of the sync track on the VS-880.

The display will indicate ÒSYS Syn:GenÓ.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. In this case, choose

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS

SyncTr.

Sync/Tempo?” appears.

Gen (Sync generator)

2 . Press [YES].

This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. When using a

synchronization signal from the VS-880 to synchronize

external MIDI devices, set this to the desired type of syn-

chronization signal.

3 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒSYS Syn:GenÓ.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. In this case, choose

MIDIClk.

Off:

Synchronization signals will not be transmit-

ted.

Gen (Sync generator)

This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. When using a

synchronization signal from the VS-880 to synchronize

external MIDI devices, set this to the desired type of syn-

chronization signal.

MTC:

MIDI Time Code will be transmitted.

MIDIClk: MIDI Clock will be transmitted.

SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track

will be transmitted.

5 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times to get the

Off:

Synchronization signals will not be transmit-

ted.

“SYS Sync.Tr Cnv?” display.

MTC:

MIDI Time Code will be transmitted.

6 . Press [YES].

MIDIClk: MIDI Clock will be transmitted.

SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track

will be transmitted.

7 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. In this case, choose CV4.

CV (Convert)

CV1=Tap ➝ S.Tr:

Create a sync track from mark

points.

5 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times to get the

“SYS Sync.Tr Cnv?” display.

CV2=Tap ➝ T.Map: Create a tempo map from mark

6 . Press [YES].

points.

CV3=S.Tr ➝ T.Map: Create a tempo map from the sync

track.

7 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. In this case, choose CV3.

CV4=Time ➝ S.Tr: Automatically create a sync track.

4 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

6 . Press [YES].

8 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒSYS St=Ó.

7 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. In this case, choose CV2.

9 . Specify the start time of the song. Rotate the

CV (Convert)

TIME/VALUE dial.

CV1=Tap ➝ S.Tr:

Create a sync track from mark

points.

1 0 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒSYS End=Ó.

CV2=Tap ➝ T.Map: Create a tempo map from mark

points.

1 1 . Specify the end time of the song. Rotate the

CV3=S.Tr ➝ T.Map: Create a tempo map from the sync

track.

TIME/VALUE dial.

1 2 . Press PARAMETER [

CV4=Time ➝ S.Tr: Automatically create a sync track.

The display will indicate ÒSYS CV4:Mesure=Ó.

8 . Press PARAMETER [

1 3 . Specify the number of measures within the specified

The display will indicate ÒSYS CV:Beat=Ó.

time span. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

9 . Specify the number of beats in one measure. Rotate

1 4 . Press PARAMETER [

the TIME/VALUE dial.

The display will indicate ÒSYS CV4:Beat=Ó.

1 0 . Press PARAMETER [

1 5 . Specify the number of beats in each measure. Rotate

The display will indicate ÒSYS CV:Tap Beat=Ó.

the TIME/VALUE dial.

1 1 . Specify the number of mark points in each measure.

Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

1 6 . Press [YES].

1 2 . Press [YES].

A message will ask you to confirm that you wish to re-

create the sync track.

A message will ask you to confirm that you wish to re-

create the tempo map.

1 7 . Press [YES] once again.

1 3 . Press [YES] once again.

The sync track will be created.

The tempo map will be created.

■ Usin g th e te m p o m a p

■ Ad d in g a n o ffse t to th e sy n c

tra ck / te m p o m a p

Ge n e ra tin g a te m p o m a p fro m m a rk

p o in ts

A tempo map can be created from mark points that were

assigned according to the tempo of an already-recorded

song. This is convenient when you wish to synchronize a

MIDI sequencer to a previously-recorded performance of an

acoustic instrument such as guitar or vocal.

It is now possible to create the sync track / tempo map

starting from the time location at which recording began.

The sync track / tempo map will be created starting at

Ò00h00m00s00Ó. However in actuality, recording does not

usually start at Ò00h00m00s00Ó.

For example if you began recording at Ò00h00m10s00Ó, you

can move the beginning of the sync track / tempo track to

Ò00h00m10s00Ó.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS

Sync/Tempo?” appears.

* During recording or playback, when the starting time

location of the sync track/tempo track is reached, a Start

message will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connec-

tor. This is convenient when you wish to synchronize

operation with an external MIDI sequencer, etc.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒSYS Syn:GenÓ.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. In this case, choose

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until the “SYS

MIDIClk.

Sync/Tempo ?” display appears.

Gen (Sync generator)

2 . Press [YES].

This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. When using a

synchronization signal from the VS-880 to synchronize

external MIDI devices, set this to the desired type of syn-

chronization signal.

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until the “SYS

Ofs=00000000” display appears.

4 . Input the time at which you want the sync track / tempo

track to begin. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

Off:

Synchronization signals will not be transmit-

ted.

< Using [NUMERICS] >

MTC:

MIDI Time Code will be transmitted.

By using [NUMERICS], you can use the ten LOCATOR

buttons as numeric keys to directly enter numbers. Refer

to ÒUsing the numeric keysÓ (p.44).

MIDIClk: MIDI Clock will be transmitted.

SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track

will be transmitted.

5 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times to get the

5 . Press [PLAY].

“SYS Sync.Tr Cnv?” display.

You will return to Play condition.

4 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

■ Usin g p ro g ra m ch a n g e m e s-

MIDI re la te d

sa g e s to se le ct e ffe cts

MIDI program change messages transmitted from an exter-

nal MIDI controller can now select effects.

■ Usin g p ro g ra m ch a n g e m e s-

sa g e s to se le ct sce n e s

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until the display indi-

MIDI program change messages transmitted from an exter-

nal MIDI controller can now select Scenes.

cates “SYS MIDI PRM?”.

2 . Press [YES].

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until the display indi-

cates “SYS MIDI PRM ?”.

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until the “SYS

MID:P.C.Eff=” display appears.

2 . Press [YES].

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until the dis-

play indicates “SYS MID:P.C.Scne=”.

P.C.Eff (Program change effect)

Off: Program change messages will not be received

(same as Ver.1).

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

P.C.Scne (Program change scene)

Off: Program change messages will not be received

(same as Ver.1)

On: Program change messages will be received to select

effects.

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

On: Program change messages will be received to select

Scenes

You will return to Play condition.

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

Use the MIDI channel 1 to switch EFFECT1, and use the

MIDI channel 2 to switch EFFECT2.

You will return to Play condition.

The following chart shows the relationship between the

Bank Number and Program Number received by the VS-

880, and the Effect Patch Number that is switches to.

Use the MIDI channel 15 to switch Scene.

The following chart shows the relationship between the

Program Number received by the VS-880, and the Scene

Number that is switches to.

Bank No.MSB Bank No.LSB Program No. Patch No.

1Ð100

Preset A00ÐA99

Preset B00ÐB99

User U00ÐU99

Program No.

Scene No.

1Ð8

* For details refer to the separately sold MIDI

Implementation.

* For details refer to the separately sold MIDI

Implementation.

< While a song is playing back >

It is not possible to change Scenes while a song is playing

back.

Thus, if a program change message for selecting Scenes is

received while a song is playing back, the song will be

halted. Then the Scene will be switched, and playback will

resume. During recording, program change messages are

not received.

■ Usin g co n tro l ch a n g e m e s-

sa g e s to co n tro l e ffe cts

MIDI control change messages transmitted from an external

MIDI controller can now control effects.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI PRM?”

appears.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

MID:C.C.Eff=” appears.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

C.C.Eff (Control change effect) [Off, On]

Off: Control change messages will not be received

(same as Ver.1).

On: Control change messages will be received to con-

trol effects.

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

You will return to Play condition.

* If you wish to use control change messages to switch

effects, use NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Numbers).

For details refer to the separately sold MIDI

Implementation.

4 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

< Using PARAMETER [

You can use PARAMETER [

][

] >

][

O th e r

] to move the cur-

sor. For example if you wish to enter a time that is 10 min-

utes later than the present time, you can simply move the

cursor to Ò00mÓ and input the number without having to

input all of the digits.

■ Usin g th e n u m e ric k e y s

([N UMERICS])

When modifying the time locations of a locate point or

punch-in point, you can use the ten LOCATOR buttons as

numeric keys to input numbers directly. When doing so,

you may now choose one of two methods of input.

■ Ho ld in g th e fu n ctio n o f [SHIFT]

(Sh ift Lo ck )

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System PRM

It is now possible to temporarily hold the function of when

[SHIFT] is pressed.

?” appears.

2 . Press [YES].

This makes it possible to switch the mixer modes or V-

tracks etc. with one hand.

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

NUMERICS Type=” appears.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System

PRM?” appears.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

Shift Lock=” appears.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

NUMERICS Type (Numeric key type)

Select the input method for when using the LOCATOR but-

tons as numeric keys.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

Up:

Input from the lowest place.

Dwn: Input from the highest place.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

Shift Lock (Shift lock switch) [Off, On]

Specify whether the function of [SHIFT] will be held.

Off: [SHIFT] will not be held (same as Ver.1).

On: [SHIFT] will be held.

You will return to Play condition.

Ex a m p le p ro ce d u re w h e n N UMERICS

Ty p e =Up

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

Suppose that you wish to input 01h23m45s00f.

You will return to Play condition.

1 . Press [NUMERICS].

Indicator will light, and the current time location will

be displayed.

Ex a m p le p ro ce d u re w h e n sw itch in g

th e m ix e r m o d e

2 . The cursor will be displayed in the lowest place. Press

LOCATOR buttons in the order of [1][2][3][4][5][0][0].

The numbers will scroll upward from low to high

places as they are input.

1 . In INPUT➝TRACK, press [SHIFT] and immediately

release it.

The display will briefly indicate ÒShift Lock.Ó Also, the

CONDITION field will alternately display the current

condition name and ÒsftÓ to indicate that Shift Lock is

on.

3 . When you finish inputting, press [ENTER(YES)].

Ex a m p le p ro ce d u re w h e n N UMERICS

Ty p e =Dw n

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

Suppose that you wish to enter 01h23m45s00f.

1 . Press [NUMERICS]. The indicator will light, and the cur-

rent time will be displayed.

2 . The cursor will appear at the highest decimal place.

Press the LOCATOR buttons in the order of

[0][1][2][3][4][5][0][0].

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

The numbers will be input from highest to lowest place.

3 . When you finish input, press [ENTER(YES)].

4 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 1 Trying out the expanded functions

2 . Press [SELECT].

■ Ea sy tim e a d ju stm e n t

The mixer mode will change to INPUT MIX/TRACK MIX.

At the same time, the display will indicate ÒShift Unlock,Ó

indicating that Shift Lock has been canceled.

It is now possible to change only the desired decimal places

of a number that you wish to change, such as when specify-

ing the range for Track Copy or when modifying the time of

a Locate Point.

< If [SHIFT] is held down during an operation >

If [SHIFT] is held down during an operation, the Shift

Lock function will be ignored. For example if you hold

down [SHIFT] and press [SELECT], Shift Lock will not be

turned on when you take your finger off [SHIFT]. The

function of [SHIFT] itself remains in effect, so the mixer

mode will change if you hold down [SHIFT] and press

[SELECT].

Ex a m p le p ro ce d u re w h e n m o d ify in g

a Lo ca te Po in t

* If a particular Locate Point has not been specified, the dis-

play will indicate Ò- - h - - m - - s - -Ó. In this case, it will

not be possible to move the cursor to the desired digit.

Suppose that you wish to change the time of Locate Point 1

to Ò01h00m00s00Ó.

1 . Press [LOCATOR] several times until “LOC Loc1 ✱✱ h

✱✱ m ✱✱ s ✱✱” appears (numbers will be displayed in

✱✱).

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

2 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press CURSOR[ ].

The cursor will appear at the lowest decimal place.

3 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press CURSOR[ ][ ].

The cursor will move. Move the cursor to the desired

decimal place.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to modify the number.

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

You will return to Play condition.

4 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ch a p te r 2 Be fo re y o u sta rt (VS-8 8 0 te rm in o lo g y )

This chapter explains basic concepts, internal structure, and basic operation that you will need to

know in order to operate the VS-880. Please read this chapter to gain a better understanding of the

VS-880.

So u rce s, tra ck s, a n d ch a n n e ls

On the VS-880, the recorder section and mixer section use the terms Òsources,Ó Òtracks,Ó and

Òchannels.Ó These terms may appear similar to each other, and will be confusing unless their dif-

ferences are clarified.

Source: A signal which is input to the mixer section or recorded in the recorder section. On

the VS-880, this term refers in particular to the signals of the analog input jacks and

the digital in connector.

Track:

A signal that is being recorded or is already recorded on the hard disk. On the VS-

880, this term is used in particular in reference to the signals of the recorder section.

Channel: A signal that is being input or output. On the VS-880, this term is used in particular

in reference to the signals of the mixer section.

Do in g e ve ry th in g in th e d ig ita l d o m a in (Dig ita l Stu d io

Wo rk sta tio n )

The VS-880 is a multi-track digital disk recorder that combines a digital disk recorder and a digital

mixer in a single unit. The VS-880 provides the same basic functionality expected of conventional

analog tape recorders, such as Òsimultaneous recording of multiple tracksÓ and Òsynchronization

with MIDI devices.Ó In addition, it has features that are possible only with digital recording, such

as Òdata transfer that minimizes deterioration of sound qualityÓ and Òundo-able editing,Ó provid-

ing a high level of convenience in music production and video editing.

If an optional VS8F-1 effect expansion board is installed, you will be able to use two high-quality

stereo effects.

In addition to the full set of effects such as reverb and chorus that are already provided, the effects

now include limiter, enhancer, and a guitar amp simulator that utilizes the COSM technology made

famous by the Roland V-Guitar System VG-8. This means that the entire range of studio procedures

from recording to overdubbing and mixdown can now be performed with just the VS-880 alone.

Sig n a l flo w (b u sse s)

On the VS-880, signals flow through busses. Busses are Òshared lines through which multiple sig-

nals can be routed efficiently to multiple tracks/channels.Ó It may be easier to understand this if

we use the analogy of water pipe.

Your House

Bathtub

Toilet

Kitchen Sink

INPUT

INPUTS

OUTPUT

INPUTS

OUTPUT

to street

INPUT to house

from water line

OUTPUT

INPUTS

Water Heater

Bath Sink

Cold Water (Buss)

Hot Water (Buss)

Drain (Buss)

4 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

For example, the water that is supplied by the water company to your house is branched to a vari-

ety of locations within the house (kitchen, bathroom, toilet etc.). Then, the water that is used at

each of these locations is collected into the sewer, and carried away.

If we think of the VS-880 as the house, the water being supplied from the water company corre-

sponds to inputs such as mic or guitar. Some of these inputs are sent to recording tracks and are

recorded. Other portions are sent to the effects, and reverb or chorus are applied before they are

output.

The basic principle of the VS-880 is that by specifying in this way Òfrom whereÓ and Òto whereÓ the

common lines run, you can determine which input signals will be recorded on which track or sent

to which effects, and where they will be output.

W h e re a p e rfo rm a n ce is re co rd e d (So n g )

On the VS-880, the location where a performance is recorded is referred to as a song. For example

on a cassette MTR, this would correspond to cassette tape. Up to four partitions can be created in

one disk drive, and up to 200 songs can be created in each partition.

< Partitions >

The disk drive capacity that the VS-880 is able to manage at one time is either 500 megabytes or

1000 megabytes. This means that if you are using a disk drive with a capacity greater than this,

you will need to divide it into two or more areas. Each of these areas is referred to as a partition.

The VS-880 handles each partition of a disk drive as an independent disk drive. Thus, you can

specify which partition of which disk drive you wish to use.

The disk drive that is currently being used is referred to as the current drive.

Song data includes the following data. Up to 200 songs can be stored in each partition of a disk

drive.

● Playback data of all V-tracks

● MIDI clocks of the sync track

● Points specified for the song (marker points, locate points, loop points, auto punch-in/punch-

out points)

● Scene memory (mixer settings)

● Vari-pitch settings

● System settings (system, MIDI, disk, sync, scene)

● Effect 1/2 settings (if the VS8F-1 effect expansion board is installed)

● Auto Mix Data

4 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

Mix e r se ctio n

■ Ab o u t m ix e r m o d e s

The digital mixer specifies the input/output status of the recorder section.

As external inputs, the VS-880 provides four analog input jacks and 1 digital in connector. As

external outputs, two master out jacks and two AUX send jacks are provided. You can freely speci-

fy which external input will be recorded on which track, and output from which output jack.

The way in which the digital mixer functions is selected by the mixer mode. The available mixer

modes can be broadly divided into two types, based on their internal structure. One of these is fur-

ther divided into another two, because of differences in the panel controls.

● INPUT➝TRACK mode

● INPUT MIX mode and TRACK MIX mode

In INPUT➝TRACK, the mixer is placed after the recorder section, and the mixer and recorder have

a one-to-one correspondence. The top panel contains only channel faders and pan knobs, but you

can also make equalizer and effect settings. A conceptual diagram showing all the settings in tabu-

lar form is given below.

INPUTS

Input Trim

Master Outputs

Level & Pan

Mix Out Buss L,R

{

Input Sources

Include:

Analog Inputs 1-4,

Digital Inputs L & R,

Mix Buss L & R,

Tracks 1 - 8.

Aux Outputs

Level & Pan

Effect 1 Return Switch

Effect 1 Level

Effect 1 Pan

Effect 2 Return Switch

Effect 2 Level

Effect 2 Pan

Aux Out Buss L,R

Effect 1 Insert/Direct Switch

Effect 1 Out Buss L,R

Effect 2 Insert/Direct Switch

Effect 2 Out Buss L,R

EQ On/Off Switch

Hi EQ

KEY TO KNOBS:

Trim

Mid EQ

Pan

Low EQ

Level

Channel Pan

Master Output Switch

(Master Out,

Aux Send,

Effect 1,

Effect 2)

Frequency

Resonance

Boost or Cut

Selector Switch

Master Fader

4 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

In INPUT MIX and TRACK MIX, the mixer is placed both before and after the recorder section. A

conceptual diagram showing all the settings in tabular form is given below.

TRACKS

INPUTS

DIGITAL

Input Trim

Master Outputs

Level & Pan

Mix Out Buss L,R

{

Aux Outputs

Level & Pan

Effect 1 Return Switch

Effect 1 Level

Effect 1 Pan

Effect 2 Return Switch

Effect 2 Level

Effect 2 Pan

Aux Out Buss L,R

Effect 1 Insert/Direct Switch

Effect 1 Out Buss L,R

Effect 2 Insert/Direct Switch

Effect 2 Out Buss L,R

EQ On/Off Switch

Hi EQ

Low EQ

Channel Pan

Master Output Switch

(Master Out,

Aux Send,

Effect 1,

Effect 2)

Master Fader

KEY TO KNOBS:

Pan

Frequency

Boost or Cut

Trim

Level

Selector Switch

The first stage of the mixer is adjusted by INPUT MIX, and the later stage of the mixer by TRACK

MIX.

However since the VS-880 has the hardware limitation of having only eight channel faders, it is not

possible to adjust both INPUT MIX and TRACK MIX simultaneously. This means that you will

need to switch between INPUT MIX and TRACK MIX during use.

W he n the m ix e r a nd re cord e r a re in one -to-one corre sp ond e nce

(INPUT➝TRACK)

In this mode, the channels (1Ð8) of the mixer section correspond respectively to the tracks (1Ð8) of

the recorder section in a one-to-one correspondence.

This is a Òsimple mixer modeÓ that you can use when you want to record a performance in the eas-

iest way. For details refer to ÒMixer section block diagramÓ (p.144).

Recorder

Mixer

INPUT 1

MIX buss (MASTER OUT L)

MIX buss (MASTER OUT R)

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

EQ 1

EQ 2

EQ 3

EQ 4

EQ 5

EQ 6

EQ 7

EQ 8

Fader 1

Fader 2

Fader 3

Fader 4

Fader 5

Fader 6

Fader 7

Fader 8

Pan 1

Pan 2

Pan 3

Pan 4

Pan 5

Pan 6

Pan 7

Pan 8

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

INPUT 4

DIGITAL IN L

DIGITAL IN R

Input select

4 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

Input:

For each track, make one selection from INPUT1Ð4, DIGITAL-L or DIGITAL-R.

You can also specify that the signals of the MIX buss or AUX buss be recorded.

Equalizer:

For each channel, the equalizer functions as a 3-band parametric equalizer with high (shelving

type), middle (peaking type), and low (shelving type) bands. This can be turned off if you do not

wish to use it.

Output:

The outputs of each channel are collected into a stereo signal by the MIX buss and output from the

MASTER OUT jack. The same signal is also sent from the PHONES jack and the DIGITAL OUT

connector.

W h e n th e m ix e r co rre sp o n d s to th e in p u t so u rce s (IN PUT MIX)

The mixer will function as a 6-in/10-out mixer placed before the recorder section. The mixer inputs

will correspond to the external input sources.

Input Mix mode (Input channel 1–6)

INPUT 1

REC 1-2 buss (Recorder)

REC 3-4 buss (Recorder)

REC 5-6 buss (Recorder)

REC 7-8 buss (Recorder)

MIX buss (MASTER OUT L, R)

EQ 1

EQ 2

EQ 3

EQ 4

EQ 5

EQ 6

Fader 1

Fader 2

Fader 3

Fader 4

Fader 5

Fader 6

Pan 1

Pan 2

Pan 3

Pan 4

Pan 5

Pan 6

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

INPUT 4

DIGITAL IN 5 (L)

DIGITAL IN 6 (R)

Buss select

Input:

Channels 1Ð4 correspond to INPUT1Ð4, and channels 5 and 6 correspond to DIGITAL IN (5, 6).

Moving the faders or pan knobs of channels 7 or 8 will not cause anything to happen.

Equalizer:

Normally the equalizer section will function as 2-band parametric equalizers with high (shelving

type) and low (shelving type) bands. This can be turned off if you do not wish to use it.

The V-XPANDED enhancement also allows the equalizers to be used as 3-band parametric equal-

izers. Refer to ÒUsing 3-band equalizer in INPUT MIX/TRACK MIXÓ (p.20).

Output:

The output of each channel will be sent to REC busses 1–8, and will be recorded just as they are

on tracks 1Ð8 of the recorder section. If signals are not sent to the REC busses, it will not be possible

to record on the corresponding tracks.

If you wish to output directly to the MASTER OUT jacks, such as when simply mixing without

recording into the recorder section, select the MIX buss.

5 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

W h e n th e m ix e r co rre sp o n d s to re co rd e d tra ck s (TRACK MIX)

In this mode the mixer will function as an 8-in/10-out mixer placed after the recorder section. The

mixer channels will correspond to recorded tracks.

Track Mix mode (Track channel 1–8)

Recorder

REC 1

REC 2

REC 3

REC 4

REC 5

REC 6

REC 7

REC 8

REC 1-2 buss (Recorder)

REC 3-4 buss (Recorder)

REC 5-6 buss (Recorder)

REC 7-8 buss (Recorder)

MIX buss (MASTER OUT L, R)

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

Track 7

Track 8

EQ 1

EQ 2

EQ 3

EQ 4

EQ 5

EQ 6

EQ 7

EQ 8

Fader 1

Fader 2

Fader 3

Fader 4

Fader 5

Fader 6

Fader 7

Fader 8

Pan 1

Pan 2

Pan 3

Pan 4

Pan 5

Pan 6

Pan 7

Pan 8

Buss select

Input:

The track output (1Ð8) of the recorder section will be in one-to-one correspondence with the chan-

nels (1Ð8) of the mixer section.

Equalizer:

The equalizer section will normally function as 2-band parametric equalizers with high (shelving

type) and low (shelving type) bands. These can be turned off if you do not wish to use them.

The V-XPANDED enhancement also allows the equalizers to be used as 3-band parametric equal-

izers. Refer to ÒUsing 3-band equalizer in INPUT MIX/TRACK MIXÓ (p.20).

Output:

The outputs of each channel are combined into a stereo signal by the MIX buss, and output from

the MASTER OUT jacks. The same signal will also be sent from the PHONES jack and the DIGI-

TAL OUT connector.

■ Sw itch in g th e m ix e r m o d e

The current mixer mode is shown by the indicator located at the right of MIXER MODE [SELECT].

Use the following procedure to switch the mixer mode. The reason that this procedure is required

is to prevent you from accidentally selecting a mixer mode that radically changes the internal

structure of the mixer.

To switch from INPUT➝TRACK mode to INPUT MIX mode or TRACK MIX mode, hold down

[SHIFT] and press [SELECT]. If you once again hold down [SHIFT] and press [SELECT], you will

return to INPUT➝TRACK mode. INPUT MIX mode and TRACK MIX mode will alternate each

time the [SELECT] button is pressed.

■ Re co rd in g th e cu rre n t co n d itio n o f th e m ix e r (Sce n e )

Up to 8 sets of mixer settings can be stored for each song. A stored set of mixer settings is called a

Òscene,Ó and can be recalled at the touch of a button. For example if during mixdown you wish to

compare different mixing balances, you can store each different mixer setting as a scene.

5 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

Sto rin g th e cu rre n t m ix e r se ttin g s

1 . Press [SCENE] to make the button indicator light.

When the SCENE indicator is lit, the [LOC 1/5]Ð[LOC 4/8] LOC buttons will act to store or

recall scenes. The bar display will indicate the current settings of the mixer.

2 . Store the current mixer settings as a scene.

To store the settings to a scene 1–4, press a button [LOC 1/5]–[LOC 4/8]. To store the settings

to a scene 5–8, hold down [SHIFT] and press a button [LOC 1/5]–[LOC 4/8].

When the mixer settings have been stored, the button indicator will light.

3 . When you finish storing the scene, press [SCENE] once again to turn off the button indicator.

< About the display >

The SCENE field in the display indicates the currently selected scene number. If an asterisk Ò✱Ó

appears at the beginning of the scene number, this indicates that the current mixer settings differ

from the scene settings. I.e., after recalling the scene, the faders or PAN knobs etc. have been

moved to change the mixer settings.

Re ca llin g a sce n e

* Before selecting a scene, you must stop song recording/playback. It is not possible to select a

scene during recording/playback.

1 . Press [SCENE] to make the indicator light.

When you press the button, the current settings of the faders and pan will appear in the bar

display.

2 . Press a LOC button to specify the scene that you wish to recall.

3 . When the scene has been recalled, press [SCENE] to turn off the button indicator.

Re ca llin g a sce n e w ith o u t a ffe ctin g th e cu rre n t fa d e r va lu e s

When a scene is recalled, the fader values will change to the recalled settings, but the locations of

the faders will not change. This means that the locations of the faders will not match their actual

values. When the locations do not match the values, the bar display will blink to indicate the actual

fader values.

If you want just the fader values to remain unchanged when you recall a scene, make the following

settings.

1 . Press [SYSTEM].

If a message with a question mark such as ÒSYS System PRM?Ó does not appear, press [SYS-

TEM] once again.

2 . Use PARAMETER [

][

to get the “SYS Scene/Auto Mix?” display, and press [YES].

]

3 . In the “SYS Scene Mode=” display, use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “KeepF.”

SYS Scene Mode

This setting determines the fader settings when a Scene is recalled.

All:

Fader settings will change to the settings of the scene that was recalled. In this case,

when a scene is recalled, the location of the faders on the front panel will no longer

match the actual fader settings.

KeepF:

The mixer settings of the scene that was recalled will be applied with the exception

of the fader settings. This means that even when a scene is recalled, fader settings

will still match the location of the faders on the front panel.

4 . After making the setting, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

Cle a rin g th e se ttin g s o f a sce n e

1 . Press [SCENE] to make the button indicator light.

2 . Clear the scene settings.

While holding down [CLEAR], press the LOC button for the scene that you wish to clear. The

settings will be cleared and the button indicator will go dark.

3 . After the settings have been cleared, press [SCENE] to make the button indicator go dark.

5 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

Re co rd e r se ctio n

■ Diffe re n ce s w ith a ta p e -ty p e MTR

Unlike DAT recorders, which use tape, digital disk recorders record sound (music) on a disk, as do

MD recorders. Music that is recorded on disk can be recalled and played back immediately, no

matter where it is located on the disk. This is also obvious from the difference in speed at which

you can move to the beginning of a song on a DAT recorder and on an MD recorder.

The ability to freely move to data regardless of the time or sequence at which it was recorded is

known as Òrandom access.Ó In contrast, having to move to data in the order of the time or sequence

at which it was recorded is known as Òsequential access.Ó

random access

sequential access

■ N u m b e r o f tra ck s th a t ca n b e re co rd e d / p la y e d

sim u lta n e o u sly

The recorder section of the VS-880 has eight tracks for recording/playing back a performance.

Of these, four tracks can be recorded simultaneously.

■ Virtu a l tra ck s p ro vid e d fo r e a ch tra ck (V-tra ck s)

Each track consists of eight virtual tracks, and you can select one of these as the object for record-

ing or playback. I.e., you can record a performance on 8 x 8 = 64 tracks, and select 8 of these for

playback. The virtual tracks that make up each track are referred to as V-tracks.

V-Track1

V-Track2

V-Track3

V-Track4

V-Track5

V-Track6

V-Track7

V-Track8

* You may find it useful to copy the blank virtual track sheet from the appendix of this OwnerÕs

Manual to keep track of your virtual track recordings.

5 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

Effe cts se ctio n

■ Ab o u t th e e ffe ct e x p a n sio n b o a rd (VS8 F-1 )

The VS8F-1 effect expansion board which allows high-quality stereo effects to be created within the

VS-880 is available as an option.

The VS8F-1 has two stereo effect units, and allows you to use two different types of effect simulta-

neously. For each channel you can specify the effect that will be used. Of course it is also possible

to use two effects in one channel.

For effect operation, refer also to the VS8F-1 ownerÕs manual.

VS-8 8 0 o p e ra tio n

■ Ho w o p e ra tio n s a re o rg a n ize d (Co n d itio n s)

The VS-880 provides many functions, and these functions are grouped into ÒConditions.Ó In order

to perform an operation, you must select the condition in which the desired operation is found.

The VS-880 has the following eight conditions.

● Play condition:

Here you can perform normal playback/recording. Each time the power is turned on, the VS-

880 will be in Play condition.

● Channel Edit condition:

Here you can set the status of each mixer channel, select input sources, switch V-tracks, and

make equalizer settings, etc.

● Master Block Edit condition:

Here you can make settings for the master section of the mixer, such as master level and AUX

send level.

● Song Edit condition:

Here you can perform song-related operations, such as naming a song, switching songs, and

creating a new song.

● Locator Edit condition:

Here you can modify the times of the various points specified in a song, such as locate points

and mark points.

● Track Edit condition:

Here you can edit the playback data recorded in a track, for example by copying data between

tracks or erasing it.

● Effect Edit condition:

Here you can make effect settings. This condition can be selected only if the VS8F-1 effect

expansion board (sold separately) is installed.

● System Edit condition:

Here you can make settings that affect the entire VS-880, such as disk drive settings and settings

related to MIDI synchronization.

■ Sw itch in g co n d itio n s

This section explains basic operation of the VS-880. Please be sure to read this section, so that you

will understand each type of operation.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

5 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

Button

Condition

Display

[CH EDIT] for each channel Channel Edit

CH (n) (INPUT➝TRACK mode)

IN (n) (INPUT MIX mode)

TR (n) (TRACK MIX mode)

master section [EDIT]

[SONG]

[LOCATOR]

[TRACK]

[EFFECT]

[SYSTEM]

Master Block Edit

Song Edit

Locator Edit

Track Edit

Effect Edit

System Edit

MST

SNG

LOC

TRK

EFF

SYS

* For Channel Edit condition, the channel numbers (n) will be displayed as 1Ð8 if Channel Link is

off, and as aÐd if Channel Link is on. Channel Link is a function that makes it easier to control

adjacent channels as a stereo source (p.112).

■ Se le ctin g th e o p e ra tio n m e n u

If Song Edit, Track Edit, or System Edit conditions are selected, messages ended by a question

mark such as ÒSYS System PRM?Ó will appear. This indicates the operation menu. Use PARAME-

TER [

][

] to select the operation menu, and press [YES] to finalize. When you press [YES],

the parameters which can be set from that menu will appear.

If System Condition is selected, there will be cases in which parameters are displayed directly,

without an operation menu being displayed. This is so that the previously selected parameter can

be selected. To return to the menu, press [SYSTEM] once again.

■ Se le ctin g p a ra m e te rs

Use PARAMETER [

][

] to select the parameter that you wish to change. If two or more

parameters are displayed simultaneously, use CURSOR [ ][ ] to make the value of the desired

parameter blink.

■ Mo d ify in g th e va lu e o f se ttin g s

When the value that you wish to modify is blinking, use the TIME/VALUE dial to modify the

value. Rotating the dial to the left will decrease the value, and rotating it to the right will increase

the value. If you rotate the TIME/VALUE dial while holding down [SHIFT], the value will increase

or decrease at ten times the normal rate.

■ Ex e cu tin g a n o p e ra tio n

To execute an operation such as switching songs or copying a track, use the following procedure.

In Song Edit condition, make settings for each parameter and press [YES]. A message will ask you

to confirm execution. To execute, respond by pressing [YES]. To cancel, press [NO].

In Track Edit condition, make settings for each parameter in order, and at the end a message will

ask you to confirm execution. To execute, press [YES]. To cancel, press [NO].

For some operations, an additional message will ask for confirmation. In this case, press [YES]

again to execute. A second confirmation message will appear for operations which cannot be

undone using the Undo function (p.112).

■ Sw itch in g th e tra ck sta tu s (Tra ck Sta tu s)

The status of each track (track status) is shown by the button indicators. The track status can be

switched by the [STATUS] button of each channel. To switch directly to REC track status, hold

down [REC] and press [STATUS]. To switch directly to PLAY track status, hold down [STOP] and

press [STATUS]. The track status can be switched regardless of the mixer mode you are in.

SOURCE (orange): The specified input source can be monitored.

REC (blinking red): Recording is selected for the track.

PLAY (green):

MUTE (dark):

The track will playback.

The track is muted (silent).

* The VS-880 can record up to 4 tracks simultaneously. This means that it is not possible to select a

track status of REC for five or more tracks.

5 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

■ Ch a n g in g th e cu rre n t tim e

Ab o u t th e cu rre n t tim e d isp la y

The current time shown in the display is MTC (MIDI Time Code), and is shown in the format Ò✱✱

hours ✱✱minutes ✱✱seconds ✱✱frames.Ó This corresponds to SMPTE time code as well. SMPTE

time code is a standard created by SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers) in

the United States, and is used to indicate each frame of a video image. SMPTE time code is used in

video editing, etc.

The type of time code that is used differs between devices. If you use MTC to synchronize the VS-

880 with another device, you will have to set both devices to the same type of time code. With the

factory settings, the VS-880 is set to 30 frames (non-drop) per second (p.86).

Mo vin g to th e b e g in n in g o f th e p e rfo rm a n ce (So n g To p )

To move to the earliest location in the song that contains recorded sound, use the following proce-

dure.

1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SONG TOP (REW)].

The V-track selected for each track will be checked, and you will move to the location that con-

tains the first sound recorded in the song.

Mo vin g to th e e n d o f th e p e rfo rm a n ce (So n g En d )

To move to the last location in the song that contains recorded sound, use the following procedure.

1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SONG END (FF)].

The V-track selected for each track will be checked, and you will move to the location that con-

tains the last sound recorded in the song.

Mo vin g in m e a su re / b e a t u n its

The MEASURE field in the display will indicate the measure number of the current location, and

the BEAT field will indicate the beat number of the current location. With the factory settings, these

values will be calculated for a tempo of 120 (quarter notes per minute) and a time signature of 4/4.

For details on setting the measure and beat, and how they correspond to the song, refer to

ÒSounding the metronomeÓ (p.109).

1 . Select the value that you wish to change.

To move in steps of a measure, use CURSOR [ ][ ] to make the number in the MEASURE

field blink. To move in steps of a beat, make the number in the BEAT field blink.

2 . Change the value.

Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the measure number or beat number to which you want

to move. To return to using the TIME/VALUE dial to move in steps of a frame, press CURSOR

[

] several times to make the display stop blinking.

Mo vin g in fra m e u n its

● To move in steps of 1 frame, rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

● To move in steps of 10 frames, hold down [SHIFT] and rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

● To move in steps of approximately 1/10 frame, press CURSOR [ ] and then rotate the

TIME/VALUE dial. When you press CURSOR [ ], an arrow Ò←Ó will appear at the beginning

of the displayed time code, and the frame number display will change to a sub-frame number

display (approximately 1/100 frame). To return to the frame display, press CURSOR [ ] once.

● To move in steps of approximately 1/100 frame, press CURSOR [ ] and then hold down

[SHIFT] and rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

5 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

Sto rin g a tim e lo ca tio n , m e th o d 1 (Lo ca te Po in t)

The [LOC 1/5]Ð[LOC 4/8] buttons allow you to memorize up to 8 time locations within the song.

Also, there are four banks of locate points, allowing you to register a maximum of 8 (locate points)

x 4 (banks) = 32 (locate points) time locations. The time locations memorized by these LOC buttons

are referred to as Òlocate points.Ó Since you can jump to these locations simply by pressing a but-

ton, it is convenient to use them to memorize locations which you will want to access frequently.

Locate points are also a convenient way to specify areas for looping or for auto punch-in recording.

■ Sto rin g a tim e lo ca tio n

1 . Specify the locate point number that you wish to use.

To use a locate point 1Ð4, press a [LOC 1/5]Ð[LOC 4/8] button. To use a locate point 5Ð8, hold

down [SHIFT] and press a [LOC 1/5]Ð[LOC 4/8]. When the time has been memorized, the

button indicator will light.

Ch a n g in g th e Lo ca te Ba n k

1 . Press [LOCATOR].

The current Locate Bank number will be displayed as ÒLocate Bank = 1Ó etc. At the same time,

one of the [LOC1/5]Ð[LOC4/8] indicators which corresponds to the current bank number will

blink.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

2 . While continuing to hold down [LOCATOR], press the [LOC1/5]–[LOC4/8] button correspond-

ing to the desired bank number.

The [LOCATOR] button is used both to access Locate Edit condition, and to switch the Locate

Bank. If you release your finger from [LOCATOR] without switching the Locate Bank, the dis-

play screen may change.

3 . Release the [LOCATOR] button.

4 . Use the procedure “Storing a time location” to register the Locate Point.

< If you are using a VS-880 of version 1.06 or earlier >

Locate Bank is a function that was newly added in VS-880 V-XPANDED. Thus, when using a Zip

disk or DAT backup to exchange song data with a VS-880 of version 1.06 or earlier, please be

aware of the following points.

1 . Songs created on VS-880 V-XPANDED can be read correctly even by a VS-880 of version

1.06 or earlier.

However in this case, the Locate Points that were stored in the Locate Bank that was in use

when the data was last stored will be the Locate Points for the VS-880 of version 1.06 or earli-

er.

2 . When Song Store is executed on a version 1.06 or earlier VS-880, only the Locate Points that

were valid at that time will be valid on the VS-880 V-XPANDED as well. Locate Points stored

in the expanded Locate Banks will be lost.

5 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

■ Mo vin g to a sto re d tim e lo ca tio n

1 . Use the LOC buttons to specify the locate point of the time to which you want to move.

■ Mo d ify in g a sto re d tim e lo ca tio n

1 . Move to the Locate Point that you wish to modify. Press [LOC1/5]–[LOC4/8].

2 . Press [LOCATOR] several times until “LOC Loc ✱” appears (✱ will be the locate point number

that you wish to modify).

3 . Input the desired time. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

■ De le tin g a sto re d tim e lo ca tio n

1 . While holding down [CLEAR], use the LOC buttons to specify the locate point that you wish to

clear. When a locate point has been cleared, the button indicator will go dark.

5 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

Sto rin g a tim e lo ca tio n , m e th o d 2 (Ma rk Po in ts)

The Tap Marker function lets you assign up to 1000 marks (mark points) to each song. To move to

a mark point, you can either directly specify the mark point number, or move to successive mark

points. This lets you move through a song in a way similar to using the index search buttons of a

CD player. Mark points can also be used to specify loop areas or the area for auto punch-in record-

ing.

< Mark point numbers >

Each mark point is assigned a number 000-999, in the order of its time location. This means that if

you add a new mark point at a location earlier than an existing mark point, the numbers of the

subsequent mark points will be incremented.

For example if you add a mark point located after mark point 2, subsequent mark points will be

renumbered as shown in the following diagram.

Time

* An interval of at least 0.1 seconds must exist between mark points. It will not be possible to add

a new mark point if a mark point already exists at a location closer than 0.1 seconds away.

■ Ma rk in g a tim e lo ca tio n

Ad d in g a Ma rk Po in t to th e cu rre n t tim e

1 . Press [TAP], and a mark point will be added to the current location.

Ad d in g a Ma rk Po in t w h ile p la y in g b a ck / re co rd in g a so n g

1 . Begin playing back / recording a song, and press [TAP] when you reach the desired location.

A mark point will be added at the time at which you pressed the button.

■ Mo vin g to a m a rk e d tim e lo ca tio n

Mo vin g to a Ma rk Po in t

1 . To move to the mark point located before the current time, press [PREVIOUS]. Each time you

press the button you will move to the next mark point. To move to the mark point located after

the current time, press [NEXT].

Dire ctly sp e cify in g a Ma rk Po in t

1 . Use CURSOR[ ][ ] to make the mark point number displayed in the MARKER field of the

display blink.

2 . Use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the mark point number to which you wish to move.

5 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 2 Before you start (VS-880 terminology)

■ Mo d ify in g a m a rk e d tim e lo ca tio n

1 . Move to the Mark Point whose time you wish to modify. Use [PREV][NEXT].

2 . Press [LOCATOR].

3 . Press PARAMETER[

] several times until “LOC ✱✱✱” appears (✱✱✱ is the mark point

number that you wish to modify).

4 . Input the desired time. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

The time of a mark point can be modified only within the range that lies between the preced-

ing and following mark points.

TIME

■ Cle a rin g a m a rk

Cle a rin g a Ma rk Po in t

Assigning mark points makes searching convenient, but creating too many mark points can actual-

ly make searching less convenient. It is a good idea to clear (erase) mark points that are no longer

necessary.

1 . Move to the mark point that you wish to clear (erase).

2 . While holding down [CLEAR], press [TAP] and the mark point will be cleared.

If mark points exist after the mark point that was cleared, the subsequent mark point numbers

will be incremented.

Time

Cle a rin g a ll Ma rk Po in ts

1 . While holding down [SHIFT], hold down [CLEAR] and press [TAP].

The display will ask ÒClear ALL Marker?Ó so press [YES]. To cancel without clearing, press

[NO].

6 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ch a p te r 3 Ba sic o p e ra tio n (a s a re p la ce m e n t fo r a ta p e MTR)

In this chapter we will begin by listening to the demo song

that is saved on the hard disk. Then we will explain the pro-

cedure for multi-track recording, all the way to creating a

master tape. We suggest that you follow the steps and actu-

ally try out each operation.

3 . Press [YES] once again.

The hard disk will be initialized. If you decide not to

initialize, press [NO].

* Initialization of a hard disk will take a considerable

amount of time. This is not a malfunction. Do not turn the

power off until initialization is complete.

When initialization has been completed correctly, the

VS-880 will automatically be restarted. When the VS-

880 starts up correctly, ÒPLYÓ will appear in the upper

left of the display.

Be fo re y o u b e g in

■ W h e n y o u tu rn th e p o w e r o n

When all connections have been made correctly, turn on the

power in the following procedure.

This condition is called Òplay condition.Ó

4 . Turn on the power of your audio devices, and raise the

* After a hard disk has been installed, the operation that

will occur when the VS-880 is turned on for the first time

will depend on the type of internal hard disk. The expla-

nation is divided into two sections: Ò● If a hard disk con-

taining a demo song was installedÓ and Ò● If an un-ini-

tialized hard disk was installed.Ó Please read the section

that is appropriate for your situation.

volume of the audio devices to appropriate levels.

Liste n in g to th e d e m o so n g

If a hard disk containing a demo song is installed, you can

listen to the demo song. Listen to the demo song before you

continue.

● If a h a rd d isk co n ta in in g a d e m o

so n g w a s in sta lle d

Hard disks which contain a demo song have already been

initialized, and can be used by the VS-880 just as they are.

* If a new hard disk, or a hard disk that formerly was used

by a different device is installed, it will not be possible to

hear the demo song.

1 . Move all channel faders to the 0 dB position, and pull

1 . Turn on the VS-880 power.

down the master fader.

When the VS-880 starts up correctly, ÒPLYÓ will appear

in the upper left of the display.

2 . Press [PLAY] to begin playback of the song.

This condition is called Òplay condition.Ó

3 . Gradually raise the master fader to adjust the volume.

The current time will be displayed in the TIME field,

and the bar display will indicate the level changes of

each track (lever meter).

* After power is turned on, the disk drive(s) must be prop-

erly identified, then certain required data must be loaded.

Thus, a short amount of time is needed before the unit is

ready for operation. If the display shows ÒSYS Init. Drive

= NoDrv,Ó the internal hard disk is not being detected.

Turn the power off, and make sure that the hard disk is

installed correctly.

4 . When playback ends, press [STOP] to stop.

■ Liste n in g to th e va ria tio n s o f

th e d e m o so n g

2 . Turn on the power of your audio devices, and raise the

volume of the audio devices to appropriate levels.

The demo song contains various Scenes (p.51). Each scene

contains settings for different V-tracks, mixer settings, and

effect settings. In a manner of speaking, these are variations

of the demo song. Switch scenes and compare the playback.

● If a n u n -in itia lize d h a rd d isk w a s

in sta lle d

New hard disks or hard disks which have been used by

some other device cannot be used by the VS-880 as they are.

Before such hard disks can be used by the VS-880, they

must be initialized. Use the following procedure to initialize

the hard disk.

1 . Make sure that the song is stopped.If it is playing, press

[STOP].

2 . Press [SCENE].

The Scene indicator will light.

* When a hard disk that has been used by another device is

initialized, all data that was stored on that disk will be

lost. Backup the data if necessary.

3 . Press the LOC button for the desired scene number.

For example if you wish to recall scene 2, press

[LOC2/6].

4 . Press [PLAY].

1 . Turn on the VS-880 power.

The upper line of the display will indicate ÒSYS Init.

Drive=IDE: U.Ó

The song will playback.

5 . Press [STOP].

* If the display shows ÒSYS Init. Drive = NoDrv,Ó the inter-

nal hard disk is not being detected. Turn the power off,

and make sure that the hard disk is installed correctly.

6 . Repeat steps 3–5 to compare the variations of the

song.

2 . Press [YES].

A message of ÒSYS Init. IDE: U Sure?Ó will ask for con-

firmation.

6 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

< Recording time >

Ma k in g a n e w re co rd in g

When you create a new song, you must set the Sample

Rate in addition to the Recording Mode. The recording

times for each setting are as follows (1 G byte capacity, 1

track).

It is not possible to make a new recording while the demo

song is selected. In order to record, you will have to prepare

a new song. On a cassette tape MTR, this corresponds to

inserting a new cassette tape.

Recording mode Sample rate

48.0 kHz

44.1 kHz

32.0 kHz

■ Sp e cify in g th e re co rd in g m o d e

Mastering

Multitrack 1

Multitrack 2

Live

185 minutes 202 minutes 278 minutes

371 minutes 404 minutes 557 minutes

495 minutes 539 minutes 742 minutes

594 minutes 646 minutes 891 minutes

(So n g N e w )

The VS-880 allows you to create up to 200 songs on one disk

drive. To create a new song on the currently selected disk

drive, use the following procedure.

* The above-listed recording times are approximate.

Times may be slightly shorter depending on the specifi-

cations of the disk drive and on the number of songs

that were created.

1 . Press [SONG], use PARAMETER [

][

] to get

the “SNG Song New?” display, and press [YES].

2 . The display will indicate “SNG SampleRate=,” so use

the TIME/VALUE dial to select the sample rate (48,

44.1, 32 kHz). If you will be recording digital audio sig-

nals from an external digital audio device, set this para-

meter to match the sample rate of the external device.

< If the display indicates “Disk Too Slow!” >

If this message appears while recording or playing back a

song, the disk drive was not able to keep up with the rate

at which the data needed to be written or read. In this

case, create a new song with a lower sample rate or

recording mode than the current song, and try the record-

ing once again.

3 . Press PARAMETER [

]. The display will show

“Record Mode=,” so use the TIME/VALUE dial to select

the record mode.

4 . Press [YES]. A confirmation message of “SNG Create

NewSong ?” will appear, so press [YES] twice. To can-

cel, press [NO].

< Song numbers >

Newly created songs will be given a name such as

ÒInitSong 001.Ó The number following the name is the

song number. This name can be modified later.

On the VS-880, songs on each disk drive are managed by

their song number. A newly created song will be assigned

the lowest unused song number. For example if the cur-

rent drive contains songs up to song number 5, a newly

created song will be number 6. If an earlier-numbered

song had been erased, the new song would have that

number.

When the new song has been created, you will auto-

matically return to Play condition, and the created song

will be selected.

< Recording mode >

On the VS-880, the recording mode setting allows you to

select a sound quality appropriate for the material being

recorded and a recording time appropriate for the remain-

ing capacity of your disk drive. This recording mode set-

ting is set when you create a new song. The following

recording modes are available. Use the mode appropriate

for your situation.

■ N a m in g th e so n g (So n g N a m e )

* The recording mode cannot be changed after a song has

been recorded.

When you create a song, it will automatically be given a

name like ÒInitSong001.Ó However this makes it difficult to

remember what song it is. We recommend that you assign a

unique name to your song so that data management will be

easier.

Mastering (MAS): Of the four modes, this provides the

highest sound quality; equal to a CD player or a DAT

recorder. However a song for which this mode is selected

will function as a 6-track recorder (tracks 1Ð6). Tracks 7Ð8

cannot be used. This mode is suitable for a recording in

which you will use mainly 2-channel stereo editing.

1 . Press [SONG] several times until “SNG Song

Name/Prtct?” appears.

2 . Press [YES].

Multitrack 1 (MT1): While preserving high sound quality,

the recording time will be approximately twice that of

ÒmasteringÓ mode. This mode is suitable for when you

will be doing a lot of track bouncing.

The name of the song (Song Name) will appear.

3 . Move the cursor so that the character that you wish to

modify will blink. Use CURSOR[ ][ ].

Multitrack 2 (MT2): While preserving high sound quality,

this mode offers longer recording times than Òmultitrack

1.Ó Normally you should use this mode.

Live (LIV): Of the for modes, this allows the longest

recording times. For example if you are recording 4 tracks

onto a 1 G byte disk, this mode allows more than 2 hours of

continuous recording. Since this mode allows long record-

ing without worrying about disk drive capacity, it is espe-

cially suitable for recording a live performance.

6 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

Raise the volume of your instrument as high as possible

so that the input level is high. Raise the input sensitivi-

ty as high as possible without causing the PEAK indica-

tor to light. Try to get it so the level normally moves

within the range of -12 to 0 on the level meter.

4 . Modify the character. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. By

holding down [SHIFT] as you rotate the TIME/VALUE

dial you can make the characters change more rapidly.

Song Number

Song Name

In INPUT➝TRACK mode, the channel faders and

MASTER fader affect the output level. This means that

even if you move these faders during recording, the

recorded sound will not be affected. You may adjust the

sound to a volume convenient for listening.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

3 . Press the channel 1 [STATUS] to make the button indi-

cator blink in red.

Track 1/V-track 1 has now been specified for recording.

At the default settings for channel 1, INPUT 1 is select-

ed as the input source, so in this case it will not be nec-

essary to select the input source.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

Sample Rate Recording Mode

4 . Press [REC] to make the button indicator blink in red,

and press [PLAY] to start recording.

Ge n e ra l p ro ce d u re fo r m u lti-

tra ck re co rd in g

Although the VS-880 is a digital multitrack recorder, record-

ing procedure is the same as for an analog multitrack

recorder, as shown below.

If you wish to apply effects as you record, refer to

ÒRecording while an effect is insertedÓ (p.35)

5 . When you finish recording, press [STOP].

6 . Listen to the performance that you just recorded. Press

channel 1 [STATUS] to make the button indicator light

in green (the condition in which a recorded performance

can be played back). Press [ZERO] to return to the

beginning of the song, and press [PLAY] to start play-

back.

1 . Record the basic tracks of the song; drums and bass,

etc.

2 . While playing back the drums and bass tracks, record

instruments such as guitar etc. on other tracks (over-

dubbing).

■ Sw itch in g V-tra ck s

3 . The VS-880 can simultaneously playback up to 8

tracks. If you wish to simultaneously playback more

than 8 tracks, you will need to record two or more

tracks onto a different track in order to reduce the data

to 8 or fewer tracks (track bouncing).

The VS-880 has eight tracks on which music can be recorded

and played back. Each of these tracks has eight V-tracks on

which music can be recorded. When playing back a song,

you can select one V-track for each track. In other words,

you can use up to 64 tracks to record a performance, and

select up to 8 of these tracks for playback.

4 . Adjust equalization, pan, and volume level for each

In this way, unlike when using a conventional multitrack

tape recorder, there is no need for you to erase previously-

recorded material. Also, you are free to record different

ÒtakesÓ or variations of the same material to different V-

tracks, and switch between V-tracks to compare the perfor-

mances.

track, and mix down to your master recorder.

■ Co n n e ct th e in stru m e n ts

1 . Turn down the master fader of the VS-880, and connect

your instrument to the INPUT 1 jack.

To switch V-tracks, use the following procedure.

There are two types of input jacks: INPUT A and B.

Connect to the type that matches the connector on your

cable.

1 . Press [CH EDIT] for the track whose V-track you wish

to switch, and use PARAMETER [

“V.Track=” display.

][

] to get the

■ Re co rd a p e rfo rm a n ce o n to a

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

tra ck

1 . Make sure that the INPUT➝TRACK indicator is lit.

Whenever this indicator is lit, it means you are in the

INPUT➝TRACK mode (p. 49). If the indicator is dark,

hold down [SHIFT] and press MIXER MODE

[SELECT].

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

2 . Use the INPUT SENS 1 knob to adjust the input sensi-

tivity.

2 . Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select a V-track.

3 . When the procedure is completed, press [PLAY (DIS-

PLAY)] to return to Play condition.

6 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

■ Re co rd in g a d d itio n a l tra ck s

w h ile liste n in g to th e p e rfo r-

m a n ce (O ve rd u b b in g )

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

The process of newly recording a track while playing back

previously recorded tracks is called Òoverdubbing.Ó Here

we will explain the procedure using the example of playing

back a stereo recording that was recorded on tracks 1 and 2,

and recording other instruments on tracks 3 and 4. Connect

INPUT 3Ð4 jacks to the instruments that you wish to newly

record.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

■ Re-recording only your m ista k es

1 . Make sure that the mixer mode is set to INPUT➝TRACK

mode (the INPUT➝TRACK indicator is lit). If another

mixer mode is selected, hold down [SHIFT] and press

[SELECT].

(Punch-in/ out)

Sometimes a recording will contain just one or two sections

that were not played correctly, or that you wish to re-

record. In such cases, you can use punch-in recording to re-

record only a specific area.

ÒPunch-inÓ refers to the action of switching from playback

mode to record mode. Conversely, Òpunch-outÓ refers to

the switch back to play mode. In other words, you will

punch-in at the beginning of the area that you wish to re-

record, and punch-out at the end of the area.

2 . Make sure that the track status for tracks 1/2 (the tracks

for playback) is set to PLAY (the STATUS indicator is lit

green). If the status is not PLAY, press the [STATUS]

button for that channel several times.

3 . Set the track status for tracks 3/4 (the tracks for record-

ing) to REC (the STATUS indicator is blinking red). For

track 3, press [STATUS 3] several times, and for track 4

press [STATUS 4].

Playback

Recording

Playback

4 . Select input 3 as the input source for track 3, and input

Time

4 as the input source for track 4. For track 3, press

channel 3 [CH EDIT], then press PARAMETER [

]

Start

[PLAY]

Punch-in

[REC]

Punch-out

[REC]

Stop

[STOP]

several times until “CH3 Input=” is displayed, and use

the TIME/VALUE dial to select “INPUT 3.” In the same

way, select “INPUT 4” as the input source for track 4.

* By using the Undo function (p.112) you can return to the

condition before re-recording.

5 . Make pan settings for tracks 3/4. In this example we will

be recording tracks 3/4 in stereo, so set the PAN 3

knob fully left (L63), and the PAN 4 knob fully right

(R63).

Re -re co rd in g m a n u a lly

(Ma n u a l p u n ch -in )

In this method, you punch-in and punch-out by pressing a

button or a footswitch. When you are both playing the

instrument and operating the recorder by yourself, it is usu-

ally not practical to reach over and press a button. In such

cases, use an optional footswitch.

6 . While producing sound on the instruments to be record-

ed, adjust the input levels. Adjust input 3 using the

INPUT SENS 3 knob, and input 4 using the INPUT

SENS 4 knob.

7 . Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the song.

Then press [REC] to enter record ready mode (the REC

indicator blinks red), and press [PLAY] to begin record-

ing.

Using the record button

1 . Set the track status to REC for the track that you wish

to re-record (the STATUS indicator blinks red).

8 . When you finish recording press [STOP].

2 . Playback the song from the beginning, and use the

INPUT SENS knob to adjust the level of the input

source. During song playback, you can press [STATUS]

to switch between monitoring the input source and the

track. Listen to compare the track to be re-recorded

with the input source, and adjust the level so that there

is no volume difference.

9 . Listen to the recorded result. Press [ZERO] to return to

the beginning of the song, and make the channel 3 and

4 STATUS indicators light green. Press [PLAY] to play-

back.

Input (input select)

This selects the input source of each channel. If Channel

Link is on, stereo sources can be selected.

3 . Playback the song from a location slightly before where

re-recording will begin.

When Channel Link is off:

4 . At the point where you wish to re-record, press [REC] to

punch-in, and re-record the vocal or instrumental part.

To punch-out, press [REC] (or [PLAY]) once again.

Each time you press [REC], you will alternately punch-

in and punch-out, so if there is another area that you

wish to re-record, repeat the same operation.

INPUT 1Ð4, DIGITAL-L, DIGITAL-R, MIX-L, MIX-R,

AUX-A, AUX-B

When Channel Link is on:

INPUT-12, INPUT 34, DIGITAL, MIX, AUX-AB

6 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

5 . When you finish recording, press [STOP].

■ Sp ecify b eforeha nd the loca tion

6 . Check the re-recorded result. After switching the track

status of the newly recorded tracks back to PLAY (the

STATUS indicator lights green), playback from the

beginning of the song.

for re-record ing (Auto p unch-in)

Auto punch-in recording lets you automatically punch-in

and punch-out at previously specified locations. This is con-

venient when you need to punch-in/out at a precise time,

or when you want to punch-in/out automatically so that

you can concentrate on your playing.

Using the foot switch

If you wish to use an optional footswitch to punch-in/out,

connect the footswitch to the FOOT SWITCH jack. Then use

the following procedure to set the function of the FOOT

SWITCH jack so that it can be used for punching in/out.

Sp e cify th e lo ca tio n fo r re co rd in g

Before you begin recording, set the times for punch-in and

punch-out. There are three ways to set these times. Use the

method appropriate for your situation.

1 . Press [SYSTEM]. If a message with a question mark

such as “SYS System PRM?” does not appear, press

[SYSTEM] once again.

Using locate points

2 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to get the “SYS System

1 . While holding down [AUTO PUNCH], specify the locate

point for the time at which you want to punch-in, and

then without releasing [AUTO PUNCH], specify the

locate point for the punch-out time.

PRM?” display, and press [YES].

3 . Use PARAMETER [ ][

] to get the “SYS

FootSW=” display, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to

select “Record.”

Using mark points

Adjacent mark points can be used to set the punch-in and

4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

punch-out times.

FootSw (Foot switch assign)

This sets the function of the foot switch connected to the

FOOT SWITCH jack.

1 . Move to the mark point located at the desired punch-in

time.

Play/Stop:

The song will alternately playback and

stop each time the foot switch is pressed.

The foot switch will have the same func-

tion as the [REC]. Use this to switch

between recording and playback during

manual punch-in recording.

2 . While holding down [AUTO PUNCH], press [NEXT],

and then without releasing [AUTO PUNCH], press

[PREVIOUS].

Record:

Specifying the points while the song plays back

1 . Playback the song. When you reach the desired punch-

in location, hold down [AUTO PUNCH] and press

[TAP]. Continue holding down [AUTO PUNCH], wait for

the desired punch-out location, and then press [TAP]

once again.

TapMarker: The foot switch will have the same func-

tion as the [TAP]. A Mark point will be

placed at the time location where you

press the foot switch.

The foot switch will have the same func-

tion as the [NEXT]. Each time you press

the foot switch, you will move to the next

Mark point.

The foot switch will have the same func-

tion as the [PREVIOUS]. Each time you

press the foot switch, you will move to the

previous Mark point.

Re co rd in g p ro ce d u re

1 . For the track to be re-recorded, set the track status to

GPI:

REC (the STATUS indicator blinks red).

2 . Use the INPUT SENS knob to adjust the level of the

input source. During song playback, you can press

[STATUS] to switch between monitoring the input

source and the track. Listen to compare the track to be

re-recorded with the input source, and adjust the level

so that there is no volume difference.

A GPI trigger signal received from the

FOOT SWITCH jack will control song

playback/stop.

< About GPI >

3 . If you press [AUTO PUNCH] while the song is stopped,

the AUTO PUNCH indicator will light and you will be

ready to use auto punch-in recording.

ÒGPIÓ stands for ÒGeneral Purpose Interface.Ó This is a

control jack provided on professional and consumer video

devices such as video editors and title superimposers. By

connecting this control jack to the foot switch jack of the

VS-880 and setting the Foot Switch Assign to ÒGPI,Ó the

connected device will be able to playback/stop the VS-

880.

4 . Move to a time before the location that you wish to re-

record, press [REC] to enter record ready mode, and

press [PLAY]. When the specified punch-in location is

reached, punch-in will occur automatically, so re-record

the vocal or instrumental part. When the specified

punch-out location is reached, the channel will automat-

ically return to playback mode.

5 . When you finish recording, press [STOP].

6 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

6 . Check the re-recorded result. After switching the track

status of the newly recorded tracks back to PLAY (the

STATUS indicator lights green), playback from the

beginning of the song.

Re co rd in g p ro ce d u re

1 . For the track to be re-recorded, set the track status to

REC (the STATUS indicator blinks red).

2 . Use the INPUT SENS knob to adjust the level of the

input source. During song playback, you can press

[STATUS] to switch between monitoring the input

source and the track. Listen to compare the track to be

re-recorded with the input source, and adjust the level

so that there is no volume difference.

■ Re p e a te d ly re co rd in g o ve r th e

sa m e a re a (Lo o p re co rd in g )

The loop function lets you repeatedly playback a specified

area (the loop). If the loop function is used for punch-in

recording, you will be able to hear the recorded result

immediately. If the result is not what you wanted, you can

continue re-recording.

3 . With playback stopped, press [LOOP] to make the

LOOP indicator light. Then press [AUTO PUNCH] to

make the AUTO PUNCH indicator light. You are now

ready to record.

Repeat

4 . Press [PLAY]. Playback will begin from the loop start

location. When the loop end location is reached, play-

back will return to the loop start location and continue.

Playback

Recording

Playback

5 . If you wish to re-record, press [REC] to begin recording.

When [REC] is pressed, recording will occur in the

specified area the next time the song is played back. Re-

record the new performance. On the next playback, you

can hear the newly re-recorded performance. If you are

not satisfied, press [REC] and try again.

Time

Loop end

Loop start

Punch-in

Punch-out

* To specify the area for re-recording (the punch-in point

and punch-out point), refer to the previous section ÒAuto

punch-in.Ó

6 . When you finish recording, press [STOP]. Playback the

song from the beginning to check the result once again.

Press [LOOP] to turn off the LOOP indicator, and press

[AUTO PUNCH] to turn off the AUTO PUNCH indica-

tor. After switching the track status of the newly

recorded track back to PLAY (the STATUS indicator

lights green), playback from the beginning of the song.

Sp e cify th e a re a to b e re p e a te d

Before you begin recording, specify the begin and end times

for the loop. There are three ways to specify the loop times.

Use the method appropriate for your situation.

* Make settings so that the loop completely includes the

area to be re-recorded (i.e., from the punch-in point to the

punch-out point). If the area to be re-recorded is not com-

pletely within the loop, recording may not start at the

specified location, or may be interrupted in the middle of

the area for recording.

Using locate points

1 . While holding down [LOOP], specify the locate point for

the time at which you want to begin the loop, and then

without releasing [LOOP], specify the locate point for

the end of the loop.

Using mark points

Adjacent mark points can be used to set the beginning and

end of the loop.

1 . Move to the mark point located at the desired time for

the beginning of the loop.

2 . While holding down [LOOP], press [NEXT], and then

without releasing [LOOP], press [PREVIOUS].

Specifying the points while the song plays back

1 . Playback the song. When you reach the desired loca-

tion for the beginning of the loop, hold down [LOOP]

and press [TAP]. Continue holding down [LOOP], wait

for the desired location for the end of the loop, and then

press [TAP] once again.

6 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

4 . Make settings so that the signal of the MIX buss is out-

put from the MASTER OUT jacks.

■ Co m b in in g th e p e rfo rm a n ce s

o f tw o o r m o re tra ck s in to

Press [EDIT] in the master section, and use PARAME-

a n o th e r tra ck (Tra ck b o u n cin g )

TER [

][

] to get the ÒMST Master Mode=Ó dis-

play. Then use the TIME/VALUE dial to select ÒMIX.Ó

The VS-880 can simultaneously playback up to 8 tracks. If

you wish to playback the contents of more than 8 tracks, or

if you run out of empty tracks, you can merge the contents

of two or more tracks onto a different track. This procedure

is called Òtrack bouncing.Ó

In this section, we will give the example of using the MIX

buss to mix the contents of two stereo pairs on tracks 1/2

and tracks 3/4 to tracks 5/6.

5 . Set the track status of tracks 1–4 to PLAY, and the

track status of tracks 5/6 to REC. Playback the song,

and use the faders of channels 1–4 to adjust the vol-

ume balance. At this time, raise the volume level as far

as possible without causing distortion.

6 . Return to the beginning of the song, press [REC], and

then press [PLAY] to begin recording.

7 . When you finish recording, press [STOP].

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

Performance data 1L

Performance data 1R

Performance data 2L

Performance data 2R

8 . Check the result that was recorded on tracks 5/6. In this

example, tracks 1–4 and tracks 5/6 have the same con-

tents, so set the track status of tracks 1–4 to MUTE,

and the track status of tracks 5/6 to PLAY.

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

MIX Sw (mix switch)

This selects how the signal will be sent to the MIX buss. If

ÒOffÓ is selected, the MIX Level and MIX Pan/MIX Bal

parameters will not be available.

Off:

not sent.

PreFade: The signal before passing through the chan-

nel fader will be sent to the MIX buss.

PstFade: The signal after passing through the channel

fader will be sent to the MIX buss.

Performance data 1L

Performance data 1R

Performance data 2L

Performance data 2R

Track 1

Track 2

Track 3

■ Cre a tin g a m a ste r ta p e

Track 4

Track 5

Track 6

When you finish recording the song, adjust the balance of

each track (equalizer, pan, and volume level), and record

the mix to a two-channel stereo master tape. This process is

called Òmixdown.Ó

Performance data 1L + 2L

Performance data 1R + 2R

Ad ju stin g th e to n e (Eq u a lize r)

* Repeating the track bounce operation will eventually

affect the sound quality, but this is not a malfunction.

Keep track bouncing operations to the necessary mini-

mum.

A parametric equalizer is provided for each channel.

First make equalizer adjustments separately for each chan-

nel. If you have recorded any stereo pairs, be sure that the

same settings are made for both tracks. Then, while paying

attention to the overall balance, make final adjustments for

equalizer, pan, and volume level for each channel.

1 . Assign the outputs of tracks 1–4 to the MIX buss.

Press channel 1 [CH EDIT], and then use PARAMETER

[

][

] to get the ÒCH1 MIX Sw=Ó display. Use

* If you adjust the equalizer while listening to the sound,

you may notice a clicking noise. This is not a malfunction.

If the noise is objectionable, make adjustments while the

sound is not playing.

the TIME/VALUE dial to select a setting of ÒPstFade.Ó

In the same way, set the outputs of tracks 2Ð4 to

ÒPstFadeÓ as well.

2 . Rotate the PAN 1 and PAN 3 knobs fully left (L63), and

1 . Press [CH EDIT] for the channel whose equalizer set-

the PAN 2 and PAN 4 knobs fully right (R63).

ting you wish to adjust.

3 . Select the MIX buss as the input source to be recorded

for tracks 5 and 6.

2 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to step through the

parameters that can be set for each channel. Select the

equalizer-related parameters, and use the

TIME/VALUE dial to modify the value. Use CURSOR

Press channel 5 [CH EDIT]. Then use PARAMETER

[

][

] to get the ÒCH5 Input=Ó display. Use the

TIME/VALUE dial to select ÒMIX-L.Ó In the same way,

set the output of track 6 to ÒMIX-R.Ó

[

][ ] to select the parameter to be adjusted; gain or

center frequency (or Q).

The bar display will graphically show the equalizer set-

tings.

* With these settings, it will not be possible to monitor the

output of channels 5/6. This is because the output of

tracks 5/6 that is routed through the MIX buss is not re-

input into tracks 5/6, to avoid creating a feedback loop.

6 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

EQ Switch: To use the equalizer, first turn this

ÒOn.Ó Unless this is ÒOnÓ you will not

be able to select equalizer-related

parameters.

EQM (equalizer middle)

This sets the gain (-12Ð12 dB) for the middle-range equalizer

(peaking type).

EQ Low:

Gain and center frequency for the low

range

EQM gain

(-12–12 dB)

EQ Mid:

EQM F:

Gain for the middle range

Center frequency and Q (the sharp-

ness of the change) for the middle

range

Gain

EQ Hi:

Gain and center frequency for the high

range

Frequency

3 . Make adjustments for the other channels in the same

way. When you finish making settings for all channels,

press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

EQM frequency (200 Hz – 8 kHz)

EQ Switch (equalizer switch)

If you wish to use the equalizer, set this ÒOn.Ó If not, set this

ÒOff.Ó When equalizer settings are being made, the equal-

ization curve will be shown graphically in the bar display. If

this is ÒOffÓ the equalizer-related parameters will not be

available.

EQM F (equalizer middle frequency / Q)

This sets the center frequency (200 HzÐ8 kHz) and the Q

(0.5Ð16) for the middle-range equalizer (peaking type). Q

determines the way in which the gain of the frequency

range is affected. Higher values will produce a sharper

change.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

EQM Q

(0.5–16)

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

Gain

Frequency

EQL (equalizer low)

This sets the gain (-12Ð12 dB) and center frequency (40 Hz

Ð1.5 kHz) for the low-range equalizer (shelving type).

EQL gain (-12–12 dB)

EQH (equalizer high)

This sets gain (-12Ð12 dB) and center frequency (500 HzÐ18

kHz) for the high-range equalizer (shelving type).

Gain

Frequency

EQH gain

(-12–12 dB)

Gain

EQL frequency (40 Hz – 1.5 kHz)

Frequency

EQH frequency (500 Hz – 18 kHz)

6 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

Ad ju stin g th e vo lu m e a n d p a n (Le ve l/ Pa n )

You can use the channel faders to adjust the volume level of each track, and the PAN knobs to

adjust the pan of each track, but here we will explain how to make adjustments when in Channel

Edit condition.

To adjust the volume level of each track, first adjust the volume level for the track containing the

most important part of the song (e.g., the vocal or melodic instrument). Then, relative to the vol-

ume level of that track, lower the volume levels of other tracks to create the desired balance.

1 . Press [CH EDIT] for the channel whose volume level and pan you want to adjust.

2 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to step through the parameters that can be set for each chan-

nel. Select the desired parameter, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to modify the value.

The bar display will graphically show the volume level and pan settings of each channel.

MIX Sw:

MIX Level:

MIX Pan:

Select ÒPstFadeÓ so that the channel faders can be used.

Adjust the volume level.

Adjust the pan.

3 . In the same way, make adjustments for the other channels as well. When you finish making

adjustments for all channels, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

< About the display >

If you modify the volume levels in Channel Edit condition, the position of the channel faders may

not match the actual volume level settings. In this case, an asterisk Ò✱Ó will be displayed after the

displayed position. When the bar display shows the fader position, the current position of the

channel fader will blink. The same applies to the pan display.

To make the channel faders match the actual value, move the channel faders to the actual value.

MIX Level

This sets the volume level (0Ð127) of the signal output to the MIX buss.

MIX Pan

MIX Bal (Mix balance)

On channels for which Channel Link is ÒOff,Ó this sets the panning (L63Ð0ÐR63) of the stereo signal

which is output to the MIX buss. A setting of ÒL63Ó is full left, Ò0Ó is center, and ÒR63Ó is full right.

On channels for which Channel Link is ÒOn,Ó this sets the left/right volume balance (L63Ð0ÐR63)

at which the stereo signal of the paired channels is output to the MIX buss.

Ap p ly in g e ffe cts (Lo o p )

If an optional VS8F-1 effect expansion board is installed in the VS-880, high quality stereo effects

will be available for your use.

If a VS8F-1 has been installed in your VS-880, hereÕs how to apply reverb or delay to the entire

song.

1 . Press [CH EDIT] for the channel to which you wish to apply an effect.

The specified channel number will appear in the upper left of the display.

2 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press channel 7 [CH EDIT (EFFECT-1)].

The upper line of the display will indicate ÒEFFECT 1=,Ó allowing you to make effect settings.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

* If the display indicates ÒNo Effect Board,Ó a VS8F-1 has not been installed in your VS-880. If this

message is displayed, it will not be possible to make effect settings.

If this message appears even though a VS8F-1 is installed, the VS8F-1 has not been installed cor-

rectly. Perform the shutdown procedure (p.75) and turn the power off. Then re-install the VS8F-1

correctly.

6 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

3 . Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “PstFade.”

This will cause effects to be applied. With this selection, the signal flow will be as follows.

Post

Pre

Fader

MIX buss

Pan

MASTER OUT (L, R)

Off

Post

Pre

EFFECT 1 buss

Level Pan

EFFECT 1

Level

Balance

MIX

Off

Return to

Insert

Channel 1

4 . Adjust the send level (input level) for the effect. Press PARAMETER [

] to get the

“EFFECT1 Send” display. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust the send level. Play back the

song and adjust the volume balance between the direct sound and the sound processed by the

effect.

5 . Press [EFFECT]. In response to the “EFFECT-1 PRM?” message, press [YES].

The number and name of the currently selected effect will appear, allowing you to select the

type of effect. If the display shows ÒEFFECT-2 PRM?,Ó press PARAMETER [

ÒEFFECT-1 PRM?Ó display and then press [YES].

] to get the

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

6 . Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the type of effect (Patch), and press [YES].

As you rotate the TIME/VALUE dial, the number and name of the displayed effect will

change, and will be blinking. When you press [YES], the display will stop blinking, and the

effect that is displayed will be selected.

Each of the 300 effects is assigned a number A00ÐA99, B00ÐB99 and U00ÐU99. They are

referred to as ÒPatches.Ó A00ÐA99 and B00ÐB99 are Preset Patches (which cannot be modified),

and U00ÐU99 are User Patches (whose settings can be modified). At the factory settings, the

User Patches contain the same effects as the Preset Patches A00ÐA99.

The contents of the Preset Patches are listed in the included VS8F-1 Preset Patch list sheet.

Some of the Preset Patches are of a type which add an effect sound to the original sound

(Loop), while others are of a type which modifies the original sound itself (Insert). Since in this

example we want to apply an effect to the entire song, select a Loop type effect patch.

7 . After you have selected an effect patch, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

Ea ch ch a n n e l se ttin g s

EFFECT 1 (Effect 1 switch)

Specify how the signal is sent to the EFFECT 1 buss.

Off:

The signal will not be sent.

PreFade: The signal will be taken before the channel fader.

PstFade: The signal will be taken after the channel fader.

Insert:

The effect will be inserted between the equalizer and fader of the channel.

InsertL: Insert into the L side of a stereo effect.

InsertR: Insert into the R side of a stereo effect.

InsertS: Insert the L side and R side of a stereo effect in series.

* If the effect is inserted in another channel, the value will appear as ÒÑÐ,Ó and cannot be selected.

7 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

EFFECT 1 Send (Effect 1 send level)

EFF1 RTN to (Effect 1 return to)

Specify the volume level (0Ð127) of the signal that is sent to

Select the output destination of effect 1. The busses that can

the EFFECT 1 buss. The default setting is 100.

be selected will depend on the current mixer mode.

EFFECT 1 Pan (Effect 1 pan)

EFFECT 1 Bal (Effect 1 balance)

When in INPUT➝TRACK mode

MIX: the MIX buss (stereo)

AUX: the AUX buss (stereo)

For channels on which Channel Link is ÒOff,Ó this sets the

panning (L63Ð0ÐR63) of the stereo signal which is output to

the EFFECT 1 buss. ÒL63Ó is far left, and ÒR63Ó is far right.

For channels on which Channel Link is ÒOn,Ó this sets the

left/right volume balance (L63Ð0ÐR63) of the stereo signal

from the paired channels which is output to the EFFECT 1

buss.

When in INPUT MIX mode / TRACK MIX mode

MIX: the MIX buss (stereo)

1-2: REC buss 1-2

3-4: REC buss 3-4

5-6: REC buss 5-6

7-8: REC buss 7-8

The default value is Ò0Ó (center).

EFF1 RTN Lev (Effect 1 return level)

Set the output level (0Ð127) of effect 1.

EFFECT 2 (Effect 2 switch)

Specify how the signal is sent to the EFFECT 2 buss.

Off:

The signal will not be sent.

EFF1 Bal (Effect 1 balance)

Set the left/right volume balance (L63Ð0ÐR63) of effect 1.

PreFade: The signal will be taken before the channel

fader.

PstFade: The signal will be taken after the channel

EFF2 INS Sw (Effect 2 insert switch)

fader.

Off:

The effect will not be inserted into the master out

Insert:

The effect will be inserted between the equal-

izer and fader of the channel.

(same as Ver.1).

On:

The effect will be inserted into the master out.

InsertL: Insert into the L side of a stereo effect.

InsertR: Insert into the R side of a stereo effect.

InsertS: Insert the L side and R side of a stereo effect

in series.

EFF2 SND Lev (Effect 2 send level)

Adjust the send level. The default value is 100.

* If the effect is inserted in another channel, the value will

appear as ÒÑÐ,Ó and cannot be selected.

EFF2 SND Bal (Effect 2 send balance)

Adjust the left/right volume balance. The initial value is 0

(center).

EFFECT 2 Send (Effect 2 send level)

Specify the volume level (0Ð127) of the signal that is sent to

the EFFECT 2 buss. The default setting is 100.

EFF2 RTN to (Effect 2 return to)

Select the output destination of effect 2. The busses that can

be selected will depend on the current mixer mode.

EFFECT 2 Pan (Effect 2 pan)

EFFECT 2 Bal (Effect 2 balance)

When in INPUT➝TRACK mode

MIX: the MIX buss (stereo)

AUX: the AUX buss (stereo)

When in INPUT MIX mode / TRACK MIX mode

MIX: the MIX buss (stereo)

1-2: REC buss 1-2

3-4: REC buss 3-4

5-6: REC buss 5-6

7-8: REC buss 7-8

For channels on which Channel Link is ÒOff,Ó this sets the

panning (L63Ð0ÐR63) of the stereo signal which is output to

the EFFECT 2 buss. ÒL63Ó is far left, and ÒR63Ó is far right.

For channels on which Channel Link is ÒOn,Ó this sets the

left/right volume balance (L63Ð0ÐR63) of the stereo signal

from the paired channels which is output to the EFFECT 2

buss.

The default value is Ò0Ó (center).

EFF2 RTN Lev (Effect 2 return level)

Set the output level (0Ð127) of effect 2.

Ma ste r b lo ck se ttin g s

EFF1 INS Sw (Effect 1 insert switch)

Off:

The effect will not be inserted into the master out

(same as Ver.1).

The effect will be inserted into the master out.

EFF2 Bal (Effect 2 balance)

Set the left/right volume balance (L63Ð0ÐR63) of effect 2.

On:

EFF1 SND Lev (Effect 1 send level)

Adjust the send level. The default value is 100.

EFF1 SND Bal (Effect 1 send balance)

Adjust the left/right volume balance. The initial value is 0

(center).

7 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

Re co rd in g to ta p e (Mix d o w n )

Dig ita l re co rd in g

When the balance of the tracks has been completed, use

your stereo recorder (cassette tape recorder, DAT recorder,

MD recorder, etc.) to create a stereo master tape.

In order to record the output of a digital audio device such

as a CD player, DAT recorder, MD recorder, or DCC

recorder directly into the VS-880 as a digital audio signal,

you must make the appropriate settings. There are also sev-

eral points which you must be aware of. This section

explains the process from the preparations for recording a

digital audio signal to specifying the digital audio signal as

the input source. The rest of the recording procedure is the

same as when recording an analog signal, and will be omit-

ted from the explanation.

* The digital interface of the VS-880 comforms to S/P DIF.

If you wish to record the digital signal, use a digital

recorder that is compatible with these standards.

● If you are using a cassette tape

1 . Connect the recorder to the VS-880.

Use an RCA phono type cable to connect the input

jacks of your recorder to the MASTER OUT jacks of the

VS-880.

* The digital interface of the VS-880 conforms to S/P DIF. If

you wish to record a digital signal, use a digital audio

device that is compatible with these standards.

2 . Adjust the recording level of the recorder.

Use the master fader to adjust the output level of the

VS-880, setting it as high as possible without overload-

ing the input of the recorder. Set the recording level of

the recorder so that the level meters indicate as high as

possible without causing distortion.

■ Co n ce rn in g co p y rig h t

The law prohibits the unauthorized recording, public per-

formance, broadcast, sale, or distribution etc. of a work (CD

recording, video recording, broadcast, etc.) whose copyright

is owned by a third party.

3 . Press [ZERO] on the VS-880 to return to the beginning

of the song, and put your recorder in record ready

mode.

The VS-880 does not implement SCMS. This design decision

was made with the intent that SCMS should not restrict the

creation of original compositions which do not violate copy-

right law. Roland will take no responsibility for any

infringement of copyright that you may commit in using

the VS-880.

4 . Press [PLAY] on the VS-880, and begin recording on

your recorder. If you wish to produce a fade-in or fade-

out, use the master fader of the VS-880.

5 . When you finish recording, stop the recorder and the

VS-880.

■ Ab o u t SCMS

● If you are using a DAT

ÒSCMSÓ stands for ÒSerial Copy Management System.Ó

This is a function that protects the rights of copyright hold-

ers by prohibiting recording via a digital connection for

more than two generations. When digital connections are

made between digital recorders that implement this func-

tion, SCMS data will be recorded along with the audio data.

Digital audio data which contains this SCMS data cannot

again be recorded via a digital connection.

1 . Connect the recorder to the VS-880.

Use an RCA phono type coaxial cable to connect the

digital input connector (coaxial) of your digital recorder

to the DIGITAL OUT connector of the VS-880.

2 . If you have connected a digital recorder by a digital

connection, make settings on your digital recorder so

that it will record from its digital input. Also, set the sam-

ple rate of the recorder to match the sample rate at

which the song was recorded (44.1 kHz). Many digital

recorders automatically sense the sample rate of the

recording source, so that it is unnecessary to make this

setting manually.

■ Co n n e ctin g d ig ita l d e vice s

Use a RCA phono type coaxial cable to connect the DIGI-

TAL IN connector of the VS-880 to the digital output con-

nector (coaxial) of your digital audio device.

* Some DAT recorders are not able to record a digital signal

at a sample rate of 44.1 kHz. In this case, use analog con-

nections instead, and set the digital recorder to record

from its analog input.

■ Ma tch in g th e sa m p lin g fre -

q u e n cy

In order to record a digital audio signal, the sample rate of

the song must be set to match the sample rate of the input

source. The song created when a disk drive is initialized

will have a sample rate of 44.1 kHz. If the sample rate of the

input source is other than 44.1 kHz, create a new song with

that sample rate (p.62).

* If you do not know the songÕs sample rate and recording

mode, Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SONG].

3 . Press [ZERO] on the VS-880 to return to the beginning

of the song, and put your recorder in record ready

mode.

4 . Press [PLAY] on the VS-880, and begin recording on

your recorder. If you wish to produce a fade-in or fade-

out, use the master fader of the VS-880.

5 . When you finish recording, stop the recorder and the

VS-880.

7 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

■ Se le ctin g d ig ita l in p u t a s th e

■ W h e n d ig ita l re co rd in g is n o t

so u rce

p o ssib le ...

If you wish to record a digital signal, make the following

setting so that the sample rate of the incoming digital audio

signal will determine the sample rate of the VS-880Õs master

clock.

¥ Is the digital audio device connected correctly?

¥ Is a digital signal being output from the digital out con-

nector of the digital audio device?

¥ Does the sample rate of the song match the sample rate of

the digital audio device?

¥ Are you using Vari-pitch?

¥ Is the VS-880 operating as a slave to MTC from an exter-

nal sequencer?

* With this setting, the VS-880 will not operate in the fol-

lowing situations; if no external digital device is connect-

ed, or if the external digital audio device is turned off, or

if the sample rate of the external digital audio device is

different than the VS-880Õs song. If you are not recording

from an external digital audio device, set this to ÒINTÓ.

Tu rn o ff th e Va ri-p itch fu n ctio n

The VS-880 has a Vari-pitch function (p.111) that allows you

to change the playback pitch of the song. Although the

audible result is that the pitch is being changed, in actuality,

the sample rate is being modified. This means that if you

are using the Vari-pitch function, the sample rate will not

match the input source, and digital signals cannot be

recorded. Before recording, make sure that the VARI PITCH

indicator is dark. If it is lit, press [VARI PITCH].

1 . Press [SYSTEM]. If a message with a question mark

such as “SYS System PRM?” does not appear, press

[SYSTEM] once again.

2 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to get the “SYS

System PRM?” display, and press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] to get the “SYS MasterClk=”

display, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “DIG-

ITL.”

VariPitch

* If the display indicates ÒDigital In UnLock,Ó a digital

audio signal is not being sent from the external digital

audio device, or the sample rate of the external digital

audio device differs from the sample rate of the song.

Determine the reason for this display and take the appro-

priate action.

This sets the playback pitch when the Vari-pitch function is

used. The value is displayed as a sample rate. Make vari-

pitch settings while actually listening to the song playback.

* Although the audible result of Vari-pitch is that the pitch

is being changed, in actuality, the sample rate is being

modified. This means that you cannot use Vari-pitch

while recording digital audio signals to a digital audio

device. If this is set to other than the standard pitch, digi-

tal recording will not be possible.

4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

MasterClk (Master clock)

This sets the master clock for the sample rate. When

inputting an analog source, select ÒINT.Ó When inputting a

digital source, select ÒDIGITL.Ó When ÒDIGITLÓ is selected,

it will not be possible to playback or record a song unless a

digital signal is being sent to the DIGITAL IN connector.

INT:

The sample rate will be determined by the

VS-880Õs internal clock.

DIGITL: The sample rate will be determined by the

digital signal being input from the DIGITAL

IN connector.

< Digital recording >

When you set Master Clock to Digital, the VS-880 will

operate according to the clock that is transmitted from an

external digital audio device. This means that even if an

external MIDI device is connected, it will not be possible

to synchronize the VS-880 to MTC that is transmitted from

the external MIDI device. When recording digitally, the

VS-880 must be the master for synchronized operation

(p.87).

7 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

6 . The song will be protected.

Be fo re y o u fin ish o p e ra tio n s

The display will indicate "SNG Complete" and you will

return to Play condition.

■ Sa ving the p erform a nce to d isk

(Song Store)

Re m o vin g p ro te ctio n fro m a p e rfo r-

m a n ce

Song data that you recorded or edited will be lost if you

simply turn the power off. You must be sure to use the

Shutdown procedure before turning the power off, so that

the data will be saved onto the disk drive. When you switch

songs or change the current drive, a message will ask you to

confirm whether the song should be saved.

1 . Press [SONG] several times until “SNG Song

Name/Prtct?” appears.

2 . Press [YES].

The name of the song (Song Name) will appear.

3 . Press PARAMETER[

If you wish to save the currently selected song data to a disk

drive separately from these operations, use the following

procedure.

The display will indicate ÒSNG ChangePrtct➝Off?Ó.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

* It is not possible to recover lost song data. When handling

important song data, or when using the VS-880 for an

extended session, we recommend that you save song data

frequently.

1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [STORE (ZERO)].

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

2 . A message will ask “STORE OK?” If you wish to store

the song data, press [YES]. When the song has been

stored, you will return to the previous condition.

4 . Press [YES].

You can press [NO] to cancel the removal of Protect

(i.e., it will remain protected).

■ Preventing a ccidenta l era sure of

5 . Protect will be turned off for the song.

The display will indicate ÒSNG CompleteÓ and you will

return to Play condition.

your perform a nce (Song Protect)

Even if you have stored your performance to disk, it is still

possible that the performance can be lost by being acciden-

tally recorded over or deleted. To prevent such accidents,

you can protect the performance from accidental erasure

(Song Protect).

< Song Protect >

This function corresponds to the write protect switch of a

floppy disk or magneto-optical disk. This means that even

if the protect switch is on, it will be possible to perform

that shown as below.

Pro te ctin g a p e rfo rm a n ce

¥ Track Edit

¥ Locate Point

¥ Mark Point

¥ Scene

1 . Press [SONG] several times until “SNG Song

Name/Prtct?” appears.

2 . Press [YES].

The name of the song (Song Name) will appear.

¥ Auto Mix

However if you attempt to save the results, the display

will indicate ÒErr SONG Protected.Ó

3 . Press PARAMETER[

The display will indicate ÒSNG ChangePrtct➝OnÓ.

* When turn the Song Protect ON, the display in the

CONDITION field will be indicate ÒPly.Ó

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

4 . Press [YES].

You can press [NO] to cancel Song Protect.

5 . The display will indicate "STORE Current?" If you wish

to store the current song and then protect it, press

[YES].

If you do not wish to store the current song, but prefer

to protect the song in the condition in which it was

when Song Store was last executed, press [NO].

7 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 3 Basic operation (as a replacement for a tape MTR)

If th e d isp la y a sk s “ STO RE Cu rre n t? ”

When you execute an operation such as creating a new

song, selecting a different song, or song copy on the VS-880,

a confirmation message of ÒSTORE Current?Ó will appear.

This is asking you whether you wish to store the currently

selected song to the disk drive.

■ Se le ctin g a so n g (So n g Se le ct)

This selects a different song that was saved on the current

drive (the currently selected disk drive).

If you wish to select a song that was saved on another disk

drive, first switch the current drive (p.93).

If you wish to store the currently selected song and then

execute the operation, press [YES]. If you wish to execute

the operation without saving the current song, press [NO].

If the Song Protect setting of the song is ON, pressing [YES]

will cause a message of ÒSong ProtectedÓ to be displayed

briefly. Then, without executing the operation, the VS-880

will return to the status it was in before execution was

attempted. Song Protect is a setting which can be made for

each song, to prevent accidental rewriting of a song stored

on the disk drive.

1 . Press [SONG], select “SNG Song Select?,” and press

[YES].

2 . The names of the songs saved on the current drive will

be displayed. Select a song and execute.

An asterisk Ò✱Ó will be displayed at the beginning of

the currently selected song. The sample rate of the song

will be displayed in the SYNC MODE field, and the

recording mode of the song will be displayed in the

SCENE field.

If you wish to execute the operation without saving the cur-

rently selected song, repeat the procedure once again, and

press [NO] in reply to the ÒSTORE Current?Ó message. If

you wish to save the currently selected song and then exe-

cute the operation, turn Song Protect OFF (p.74).

■ Tu rn in g th e p o w e r o ff

(Sh u t Do w n )

The recorded performance will be lost if you simply turn

the power off. In order to turn the power off safely, you

must first make sure that the performance has been saved to

hard disk, and that the hard disk heads are parked. This

procedure is referred to as Shutdown. Before turning off the

power, perform the following shutdown procedure.

Re -sta rtin g th e VS-8 8 0

To restart the VS-880 without turning off the power, use the

following procedure.

* If you turn off the power without performing the shut-

down operation, the data may not be saved correctly, or

the hard disk may be damaged.

1 . Execute the shut-down procedure.

2 . The display will indicate “PowerOFF/RESTART,” so

hold down [SHIFT] and press [RESTART (PLAY)].

1 . While holding down [SHIFT], press [SHUT/EJECT

(STOP)].

The upper line of the display will indicate

ÒSHUT/EJECT?.Ó

2 . Press [YES]. (To cancel, press [NO].)

The display indicate ÒSTORE Current?.Ó

3 . If you wish to save the current song, press [YES]. If you

do not wish to save it, press [NO]. If you have selected

the demo song, press [NO].

When shut down is complete, the display will indicate

ÒPowerOFF/RESTART.Ó

4 . Turn off the VS-880 power.

* The disk platter inside a hard disk will continue to rotate

for a time by its momentum after the power is turned off.

If a physical shock is applied to the unit during this time,

the hard disk may be damaged. Avoid moving the unit

for about 30 seconds after turning the power off.

7 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ch a p te r 4 Ed itin g a re co rd e d p e rfo rm a n ce (tra ck e d itin g )

This chapter explains the content and procedures for edit-

ing sound that has been recorded. Please read this chapter

to gain an understanding of the concepts of ÒeditingÓ that

were impractical with conventional tape MTR units.

NOW TIME

Sound Data

W h a t is e d itin g ?

One of the most important features of digital disk recorders

is that they allow re-recording and editing that does not

affect the sound quality.

TIME

PREVIEW

FROM

On a multi-track analog tape recorder, it is necessary to

erase a previously made recording in order to modify it.

Also if you wish to change the organization of a song, you

must re-record it from the beginning. This type of editing

which re-writes the original data is known as Òdestructive

editing.Ó

PREVIEW Length

PREVIEW

THROUGH

In contrast, multi-track digital disk recorders allow you to

use an Undo function to cancel the editing operation and

return to the data as it was before editing. Furthermore,

since copying data has negligible effect on the sound, you

can copy the original data before editing and save it. It is

also easy to copy parts of the data to different locations, or

to erase specified portions of the data. Editing of this type

which allows the original data to be recovered is known as

Ònon-destructive editing.Ó

Fin d in g th e lo ca tio n w h e re th e so u n d

b e g in s (e x a m p le )

1 . Make settings so that the track(s) you wish to monitor

will playback, start the song playing back, and stop at

the time where the sound begins.

2 . First press [TO] or [FROM] to playback the recorded

before and after the current time, to determine whether

the beginning of the sound is earlier or later than the

current time. Next, move the current time until you can

hear a bit of the beginning of the sound when you press

[TO]. Finally, move the current time until the sound

begins precisely when you press [FROM].

Fin d in g a d e sire d lo ca tio n

(Pre vie w )

When editing a song, you will often need to determine pre-

cise times such as where the sound begins, the beginning of

a break, or the area for auto punch-in recording, etc. On the

VS-880 you can use the Preview function to find precise

time locations.

3 . When you find the precise location where the sound

begins, place a mark point at the current time or store

the current time in a locate point so that you will be able

to easily find it later.

The Preview function has three buttons, each with a differ-

ent operation. Use the one appropriate for your situation.

Ad ju stin g th e p re vie w le n g th

1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press either [TO] or [FROM] to

adjust the preview length. While pressing [TO] or

[FROM] to check the actual playback time, use the

TIME/VALUE dial to adjust the time.

■ Usin g [TO ] a n d [FRO M]

The [TO] and [FROM] buttons let you playback a specified

area of time (1.0Ð10.0 sec) before and after the current time.

By using this function as you gradually move the area, you

can accurately determine the desired time.

2 . When you finish making settings, press [PLAY (DIS-

PLAY)] to return to Play condition.

Each button performs the following function. The preview

length is initially set to 1.0 seconds, but you may change

this as necessary.

PreviewLen (Preview length)

This sets the time length (1.0Ð10.0 sec) that is played back

when the [TO] or [FROM] button of the Preview function is

pressed.

[TO]:

The preview length length ending at

the current time will playback once.

The preview length length beginning

at the current time will playback once.

Through the current time, playback

one time for double the Preview

Length

[FROM]:

[TO]+[FROM]:

■ Scru b p la y b a ck ([SCRUB])

Press [SCRUB] when you wish to determine more accurate-

ly the location where sound begins.

Similarly to [TO] and [FROM], [SCRUB] lets you playback a

specified area before and after the current time. To select

whether the area before or the area after the current time

will be played back, press [TO] or [FROM].

7 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Editing a recorded performance (track editing)

When you press [SCRUB] the button indicator will light,

and the specified area will be played back repeatedly. When

you are finished, press [SCRUB] once again to make the

button indicator go dark.

Only the single track that is specified will be played back. If

you wish to playback other tracks, press the [SEL (CH

EDIT)] button of that track to select it. The playback time

(25Ð100 msec) is shorter than when [TO] and [FROM] are

used. The initial value of 45 msec, but you may change this

as necessary.

Ba sic p ro ce d u re

Here is the basic procedure for Track Edit condition. In the

explanations which follow, this basic procedure will be

abbreviated.

1 . If you are performing a Copy/Move/Exchange opera-

tion, select the V-track that contains the source data, so

that that data can be played back.

2 . Press [TRACK], and the Track Edit condition functions

The waveform of the sound being played back is displayed

in the bar display, providing a visual check.

will appear in the upper line of the display. Use

[TRACK] or PARAMETER [

][

] to select the

desired function, and press [YES].

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

3 . First you will select the track and V-track to which the

operation will apply. To select a track, press the [SEL

(CH EDIT)] button for that track. To select a V-track,

use the TIME/VALUE dial.

If you are performing a Copy/Move/Exchange opera-

tion, specify both the source track and the destination

track. To do this, use CURSOR [ ][ ] to make the

blinking area to a selection, and specify the desired

track. For the various operations of Track Edit condi-

tion, you can execute an operation with the same set-

tings for two or more tracks.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

Fin d in g th e lo ca tio n w h e re so u n d

b e g in s (e x a m p le )

When selecting tracks, tracks which contain playback

data will be shown in the bar display. The numbers in

the horizontal axis are track numbers, and the numbers

in the vertical axis are V-track numbers. Track areas

that contain playback data will be lit. Tracks which are

selected for modification will blink.

1 . Press [SCRUB] to make the button indicator light, and

the specified area will be played back repeatedly. To

select whether the area before or the area after the cur-

rent time will be played back, press [TO] or [FROM].

2 . Use [SEL (CH EDIT)] to select the track that you wish

to check.

3 . If you are playing back the area before the current time,

adjust the time so that you just miss hearing the sound.

If you are playing back the area following the current

time, adjust the time so that you hear the very begin-

ning of the sound.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

4 . When you have found the precise location where the

sound begins, press [SCRUB] once again to end the

procedure. Also, place a mark point at the current time

or store the current time in a locate point so that you will

be able to easily find it later.

INPUT TRACK

Blink Box

AUX MASTER

4 . Press PARAMETER [

] to step through the items,

and use the TIME/VALUE dial to make settings for each

one. To return to a previous item, press PARAMETER

Ad ju stin g th e scru b le n g th

1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SCRUB], and you will be

able to adjust the scrub length. Press [SCRUB] once

again to hear the actual playback area, and use the

TIME/VALUE dial to adjust the setting.

[

In items that require you to specify a time, you can do

so by selecting a Mark point or a Locate point, or by

using the operations explained in ÒChanging the cur-

rent timeÓ (p.56).

2 . When you finish, press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to

Play condition.

To audition the playback before and after the point, use

the Preview function (p.76).

Scrub Len (Scrub length)

This sets the time length (25Ð100 ms) that is played back

when the Preview function [SCRUB] button is pressed.

7 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Editing a recorded performance (track editing)

5 . As you press PARAMETER [

] to step through the

Re -u sin g p a rt o f th e p e rfo r-

m a n ce (Co p y )

This operation copies the playback data of a specified area

to another location. This operation lets you copy the data of

two or more tracks at once, or copy the specified data to a

specified location two or more times in succession. When

you wish to use a phrase that is recorded in a track, or when

a song contains a phrase that is repeated, the Copy opera-

tion will let you create the song more efficiently.

settings, a message will appear at the end, asking you

to confirm execution. If you wish to execute, press

[YES]. A re-confirmation message will blink, so press

[YES] once again to execute. When execution is com-

plete, you will return to Play condition.

To cancel execution, press [NO]. You will return to the

previous condition.

* If after hearing the results of the operation you wish to

return to the original data, use the Undo function (p.112).

Normally, the data will be copied starting at the specified

copy destination time. However it is also possible to specify

the copy destination time as a base time at which a specific

sound occurs. This is done using the ÒFrm (From)Ó setting

item.

For example suppose that you wish to copy a sound effect

of a time bomb ticking and then exploding, and that you

want to place the explosion at a specific timing location.

Normally, you would have to calculate the time until the

explosion in order to specify the copy destination time.

However in such cases, you can specify ÒFromÓ as Òthe

copy source time at which the explosion begins,Ó and speci-

fy ÒToÓ (the base time of the copy destination) as Òthe copy

destination time at which you want the explosion to occur.Ó

This lets you copy the data with the explosion placed at pre-

cisely the right timing.

< About the bar display >

When tracks are being selected, the bar display will indi-

cate the status of track selection. At this time, you can

view the play list in the bar display by holding down

[SHIFT] and pressing [PLAY (DISPLAY)]. To return to the

previous display, once again hold down [SHIFT] and

press [PLAY (DISPLAY)].

When an item requiring a time setting is selected, the bar

display will show the play list. At this time, you can view

the amplitude profile and the track selection status by

holding down [SHIFT] and pressing [PLAY (DISPLAY)].

The amplitude profile lets you view the waveform record-

ed in the selected track. Use the [(SEL) CH EDIT] buttons

to select the track whose amplitude profile will be dis-

played.

Example 1: Copying twice to the same track

Start

End

Time

Example 2: Copying twice to a different track

Start

End

Time

Example 3: Copying using the “Frm” setting

Start From

End

Time

7 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Editing a recorded performance (track editing)

* If playback data exists at the copy destination, that data

will be overwritten.

< An easy way to specify the time settings >

Times for the Start point, From point, End point, and To

point can be specified directly without having to display

the Track Copy page. In Play condition, use the following

procedure.

* Playback data of a channel for which Channel Link is ON

cannot be copied to a track whose channel has a Channel

Link setting of OFF. Nor is the converse possible.

1 . Move to the beginning (Start point) of the copy source

* The length of the data to be copied must be greater than

0.5 seconds. If data shorter than 0.5 seconds is copied, the

sound will not playback.

performance data.

2 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC1/5].

1 . Select the V-track that contains the copy source play-

3 . Move to the time location in the destination to which

back data, and prepare that data for playback.

the performance data will be copied (From point).

2 . Press [TRACK], select “TRK Track Copy?,” and press

[YES]. The display will let you select the copy source

track, and the copy destination track and V-track.

4 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC2/6].

5 . Move to the end location of the copy source perfor-

mance data (End point).

6 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC3/7].

Copy destination

(Track – V track)

Copy source

(Track – V track)

7 . Move to the basic time of the copy destination (To

point).

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

8 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC4/8].

If you now access the Track Copy page, the times that

were specified in steps 1Ð8 will be input as the time set-

tings for the respective points.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

Mo d ify in g th e o rg a n iza tio n

o f th e p e rfo rm a n ce (Mo ve )

3 . Use [SEL (CH EDIT)] to select the copy source track.

When the copy source track is selected, the V-track

selected for that channel will be the copy source V-

track. Next, press CURSOR [ ] to make the copy des-

tination field blink, use [SEL (CH EDIT)] to select the

copy destination track, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to

select the copy destination V-track

This operation moves the playback data of the specified area

to another location. This can be used to correct skewed tim-

ing that occurred during recording. This operation can move

the timing of two or more tracks of playback data at once.

Normally when moving playback data, the data will be

moved so that it begins at the move destination timing.

However it is also possible to move the data relative to a

location within the data at which a specific sound occurs. To

do so, use the ÒFrm (From)Ó setting.

For example suppose that you wish to move a sound effect

of a time bomb ticking and then exploding, so that the

explosion occurs at a specific timing location. Normally,

you would have to calculate the time until the explosion in

order to specify the move destination time. However in

such cases, you can specify ÒFromÓ as Òthe move source

time at which the explosion begins,Ó and specify ÒToÓ (the

base time of the move destination) as Òthe move destination

time at which you want the explosion to occur.Ó This lets

you move the data with the explosion placed at precisely

the right timing.

If you wish to perform a copy operation with the same

settings for other tracks, select the copy source and

copy destination tracks, and press CURSOR [ ] once

again. Now you can specify the new copy source and

copy destination tracks. In this case, it will not be possi-

ble to select copy destination tracks that have already

been selected as copy source tracks.

If you wish to cancel the copy operation for a track, use

PARAMETER [

][

] to display the settings for

that track, and press [CANCEL (NO)] twice.

4 . Set the following items, and execute the copy opera-

tion.

St (start point): Specify the starting time of the

copy source playback data.

End (end point): Specify the ending time of the copy

source playback data.

Example 1: Moving within the same track

Frm (from point): Specify the time of the copy source

playback data that will correspond

to the To point. Normally you will

set this to be the same as the Start

point.

To (to point):

Specify the base time of the copy

destination.

Start

End

Time

Copy Time:

Specify the number of copies

(1Ð99).

7 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Editing a recorded performance (track editing)

Example 2: Moving to a different track

3 . Use [SEL (CH EDIT)] to select the move source track.

When the move source track is selected, the V-track

selected for that channel will be the move source V-

track. Next, press CURSOR [ ] to make the move

destination field blink, use [SEL (CH EDIT)] to select

the move destination track, and use the TIME/VALUE

dial to select the move destination V-track.

If you wish to perform a move operation with the same

settings for other tracks, select the move source and

move destination tracks, and press CURSOR [ ] once

again. Now you can specify the new move source and

move destination tracks. In this case, it will not be pos-

sible to select move destination tracks that have already

been selected as move source tracks.

Start

End

Time

Example 3: Moving using the “Frm” setting

If you wish to cancel the move operation for a track, use

PARAMETER [

that track, and press [CANCEL (NO)] twice.

][

] to display the settings for

4 . Set the following items, and execute the copy opera-

tion.

St (start point): Specify the starting time of the

move source playback data.

End (end point): Specify the ending time of the

move source playback data.

Start

End

Time

From

Frm (from point): Specify the time of the move

source playback data that will cor-

respond to the To point. Normally

you will set this to be the same as

the Start point.

* If playback data exists at the move destination, that data

will be overwritten.

* Playback data of a channel for which Channel Link is ON

cannot be moved to a track whose channel has a Channel

Link setting of OFF. Nor is the converse possible.

To (to point):

Specify the base time of the move

destination.

< An easy way to specify the time settings >

Times for the Start point, From point, End point and To

point can be specified directly without having to display

the Track Move page. In Play condition, use the following

procedure.

* The length of the data to be moved must be greater than

0.5 seconds. If data shorter than 0.5 seconds is moved, the

sound will not playback.

* Do not leave sound within 0.5 seconds before or after the

section of data that is moved. Any sound which was

within 0.5 seconds of the moved data will not playback.

1 . Move to the beginning (Start point) of the move

source performance data.

1 . Select the V-track that contains the move source play-

2 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC1/5].

back data, and prepare that data for playback.

3 . Move to the time location in the destination to which

2 . Press [TRACK], select “TRK Track Move?,” and press

[YES]. The display will let you select the move source

track, and the move destination track and V-track.

the performance data will be moved (From point).

4 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC2/6].

5 . Move to the end location of the performance data that

Move destination

(Track – V track)

Move source

(Track – V track)

is being moved (End point).

6 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC3/7].

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

7 . Move to the basic time of the move destination (To

point).

8 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC4/8].

If you now access the Track Move page, the times that

were specified in steps 1Ð8 will be input as the time set-

tings for the respective points.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

8 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Editing a recorded performance (track editing)

3 . Make settings for the following items, and execute the

track erase operation.

Era sing p a rt of a p erform a nce

(Era se)

St (start point): Specify the time location at which

the data to be erased begins.

This operation erases playback data from the specified area.

If this operation is used to erase playback data, even if play-

back data exists after the area that was erased, it will not be

moved forward. To use the analogy of a tape recorder, this

operation is like recording silence over an unwanted section

of the tape.

End (end point): Specify the time location at which

the data to be erased ends.

< An easy way to specify the time settings >

Times for the Start point and End point can be specified

directly without having to display the Track Erase page.

In Play condition, use the following procedure.

1 . Move to the beginning (Start point) of the performance

data that you wish to erase.

2 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC1/5].

3 . Move to the end of the performance data that you

wish to erase (End point).

4 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC3/7].

If you now access the Track Erase page, the times that

were specified in steps 1Ð4 will be input as the time set-

tings for the respective points.

Start

End

Time

* Do not leave sound within 0.5 seconds before or after the

area to be erased. Any sound which was within 0.5 sec-

onds of the erased data will not playback.

Ex cha nging perform a nce da ta

betw een tra ck s (Ex cha nge)

1 . Press [TRACK], select “TRK Track Erase?,” and press

[YES]. The display will allow you to select the track and

V-track from which playback data will be erased.

This operation exchanges the playback data of two tracks.

Data to be erased (Track – V track)

Example: Exchanging tracks 1 and 2

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

Track1

Track2

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

Track1

Track2

2 . Use [SEL (CH EDIT)] to select the track from which

data will be erased, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to

select the V-track.

If you wish to execute the Track Erase operation with the

same settings for other tracks as well, press [SEL (CH

EDIT)] for the additional tracks that you wish to erase,

and use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the V-track

that you wish to erase. If you wish to cancel the erase

Time

* Playback data of a channel for which Channel Link is ON

cannot be exchanged with a playback data whose channel

has a Channel Link setting of OFF. Nor is the converse

possible.

operation for a track, use PARAMETER [

][

] to

display the setting of that track, and press [CANCEL

(NO)].

If you wish to select all V-tracks of a specified track, use

the TIME/VALUE dial to select Ò ✱Ó. If you wish to

select all V-tracks of all tracks, select Ò✱- ✱Ó.

8 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Editing a recorded performance (track editing)

* Do not leave sound within 0.5 seconds before or after the

area into which the data will be inserted. Any sound

which was within 0.5 seconds of the inserted data will not

playback.

1 . Select one of the V-tracks that you wish to exchange,

and prepare that data for playback.

2 . Press [TRACK], select “TRK Track Exchange?”, and

press [YES]. The display will let you select the

exchange source track and the exchange destination

track and V-track.

1 . Press [TRACK], select “TRK Insert?”, and press [YES].

The display will let you select the track and V-track into

which the blank will be inserted.

Exchange destination

(Track – V track)

Exchange source

(Track – V track)

Insert location (Track – V track)

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

3 . Use [SEL (CH EDIT)] to select the exchange source

track. When you select the exchange source track, the

V-track selected for that channel will be selected as the

exchange source V-track. Next, press CURSOR [ ] to

make the exchange destination blink, use [SEL (CH

EDIT)] to select the exchange destination track, and

use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the exchange desti-

nation V-track.

2 . Use [SEL (CH EDIT)] to select the insert destination

track, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the insert

destination V-track.

If you wish to execute the Track Insert operation with

the same settings for other tracks as well, press [SEL (CH

EDIT)] for the additional tracks that you wish to insert,

and use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the insert des-

tination V-track. If you wish to cancel the insert opera-

If you wish to execute the Track Exchange operation

with the same settings for other tracks as well, select the

exchange source and exchange destination tracks, and

then press CURSOR [ ] once again. You will be able

to specify a new set of tracks to be exchanged. In this

case, it is not possible to set the exchange destination

track to a track that was already specified as an

exchange source track.

tion for a track, use PARAMETER [

][

] to dis-

play the setting of that track, and press [CANCEL (NO)].

If you wish to insert a blank into all V-tracks of the

specified track, use the TIME/VALUE dial to select

ÒÓ✱Ó. If you wish to insert a blank into all V-tracks of

all tracks, select Ò✱- ✱Ó.

3 . Make settings for the following items, and execute the

track insert operation.

If you wish to cancel the exchange operation for certain

tracks, use PARAMETER [

][

] to display the set-

To (to point): Specify the time location at which the

blank will be inserted.

tings for those tracks, and press [CANCEL (NO)] twice.

4 . Execute the track exchange operation.

Len (length): Specify the time length of the blank.

< An easy way to specify the time settings >

The time for the To point can be specified directly without

having to display the Track Insert page. In Play condition,

use the following procedure.

In se rtin g b la n k sp a ce in to a

p e rfo rm a n ce (In se rt)

1 . Move to the time location into which you wish to insert

This operation inserts blank space at the specified location.

When you wish to add a phrase into the playback data, you

can insert a blank of the appropriate length, and then record

the phrase into the blank area.

the blank (To point).

2 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC4/8].

If you now access the Track Erase page, the time that was

specified in steps 1Ð2 will be input as the time setting for

the To point. Just specify the length of the blank (Length),

and execute Track Erase.

Blank

Time

Length

8 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Editing a recorded performance (track editing)

3 . Make settings for the following items, and execute the

track cut operation.

De le tin g a p o rtio n o f a

p e rfo rm a n ce (Cu t)

St (starting point): Specify the starting time location

of the data which is to be cut.

This operation cuts playback data from the specified area.

When playback data is cut using this operation, any play-

back data following the data that was cut will move for-

ward to fill the gap. To use the analogy of a tape recorder,

this operation is like cutting an unwanted portion out of an

audio tape, and splicing the ends.

End (end point): Specify the ending time location

of the data which is to be cut.

< An easy way to specify the time settings >

Times for the Start point and End point can be specified

directly without having to display the Track Cut page. In

Play condition, use the following procedure.

1 . Move to the beginning of the area that you wish to

delete (Start point).

2 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC1/5].

3 . Move to the end of the area that you wish to delete

(End point).

4 . Hold down [TRACK] and press [LOC3/7].

If you now access the Track Cut page, the times that were

specified in steps 1Ð4 will be input as the time settings for

the respective points.

Start

End

Time

* Do not leave sound within 0.5 seconds before or after the

area to be cut. Any sound which was within 0.5 seconds

of the cut data will not playback.

1 . Press [TRACK], select “TRK Cut?”, and press [YES].

The display will let you select the track and V-track from

which playback data will be cut.

Cutting source (Track – V track)

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

2 . Use [SEL (CH EDIT)] to select the track from which

data will be cut, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select

the V-track from which data will be cut.

If you wish to execute the Track Cut operation with the

same settings for other tracks as well, press [SEL (CH

EDIT)] for the additional tracks that you wish to cut,

and use the TIME/VALUE dial to specify the V-track

that you wish to cut. If you wish to cancel the cut oper-

ation for a track, use PARAMETER [

][

] to dis-

play the setting of that track, and press [CANCEL

(NO)].

If you wish to cut data from all V-tracks of the specified

track, use the TIME/VALUE dial to select Ò✱Ó. If you

wish to cut data from all V-tracks of all tracks, select Ò✱

- ✱Ó.

8 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 4 Editing a recorded performance (track editing)

1 . Press [TRACK], select “TRK Time Comp/Exp.?”, and

press [YES]. The display will let you select the track

and V-track to which the operation will apply.

Mo d ify in g th e p la y b a ck

tim e o f th e p e rfo rm a n ce

(Tim e com pression/ ex pa nsion)

Affected data (Track – V track)

This operation allows you to expand or compress the play-

back time of a song to the specified time length. You can

specify a compression/expansion of 75Ð125%, but extreme

settings will produce a more adverse effect on the sound

quality. We recommend that you normally keep compres-

sion/expansion within a range of 93Ð107 %.

Usually when playback time is compressed or expanded,

the playback pitch is affected correspondingly. For example

if the playback time is halved, the playback pitch will rise

one octave. On the VS-880, you can select whether the play-

back pitch will change in correspondence to the compres-

sion/expansion ratio, or whether the original playback

pitch will be preserved.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

2 . Use [SEL (CH EDIT)] to select the track to be affected,

and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the V-track. If

you wish to select all V-tracks of the selected track, use

the TIME/VALUE dial to select “✱- ✱”.

* Time Compression/Expansion creates a new song with a

different playback time. For this reason, it will not be pos-

sible to execute it if the current drive does not have suffi-

cient space.

If you wish to execute the Time Compression/Expansion

operation with the same settings for other tracks as well,

press [SEL (CH EDIT)] for the additional tracks that you

wish to compress or expand, and use the TIME/VALUE dial

to specify the V-track that will be compressed or expanded. If

you wish to cancel the Compression/Expansion operation

* It is not possible to make settings where the times from

the Start Point to the End Point or from the Start Point to

the To Point are less than 0.5 seconds.

for a track, use PARAMETER [

][

] to display the

setting of that track, and press [CANCEL (NO)].

* When compressing the data, do not compress it to a time

length of 0.5 seconds or shorter. If it is compressed to 0.5

seconds or less, it will not be played.

3 . Make settings for the following items, and execute the

operation.

Strt (start point): Specify the time location at which

the change in playback time will

start.

Example 1: Compression

End (end point): Specify the time location at which

the change in playback time will

end.

To (to point):

Specify the ending time location

that will result from the compres-

sion/expansion.

Pitch:

If you want the playback pitch to

change as a result of the compres-

sion/expansion, set this to ÒVari.Ó

If not, set this to ÒFix.Ó

Start

End

Time

Type:

Specify the type of conversion.

Select ÒAÓ for vocals or narrations,

ÒBÓ for slow-tempo songs such as

slow ballads, and ÒCÓ for fast-

tempo songs such as rock.

Example 2: Expansion

Amplitude:

Specify the volume level ratio (50,

60, 70, 80, 90, 100%) that will result

from conversion. Normally you

should use the default value of Ò60

%.Ó If the volume level after con-

version is too low, use the Undo

function to return to the original

data, increase the amplitude set-

tings, and try the operation again.

However be aware that excessively

high settings can cause noise to

occur in the data.

Start

End To

Time

* To cancel the operation, press [CANCEL (NO)].

8 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ch a p te r 5 Use w ith MIDI d e vice s

This chapter explains how the VS-880 handles MIDI mes-

sages, and the following operations that can be done using

MIDI messages.

■ MIDI m e ssa g e s

The VS-880 uses the following types of MIDI message.

● Using a MIDI sound source to play the metronome

● Synchronized operation with a MIDI sequencer

● Controlling the mixer from a MIDI sequencer (Compu-

mix)

Note messages

These messages are used to play notes. On a keyboard,

these message transmit the key (note number) that was

pressed, and how strongly it was pressed (velocity). On the

VS-880, these messages are used when you use a MIDI

sound source to play the metronome sound.

Ab o u t MIDI

Program Change messages

This section explains the basic concepts of MIDI, and how

the VS-880 handles MIDI messages.

These messages are for the purpose of selecting sounds, and

contain a program number of 1Ð128. The VS-880 V-XPAND-

ED uses these messages to select scenes and effects.

Control Change messages

■ W h a t is MIDI

In general, these messages are used to transmit information

such as vibrato, hold, and volume etc., that makes a perfor-

mance more expressive. The various functions are differen-

tiated by a controller number from 0Ð127, and the controller

number is defined for each function. The functions that can

be controlled on any given device will depend on that

device.

MIDI stands for ÒMusical Instrument Digital Interface.Ó It is

a worldwide standard that allows electronic musical instru-

ments and personal computer to exchange musical perfor-

mance data and messages such as sound selections. Any

MIDI-compatible device can transmit musical data (as

appropriate for the type of device) to any other MIDI-com-

patible device, regardless of its manufacturer or model type.

On the VS-880, these messages are used in a completely dif-

ferent way than on most instruments; they are used to con-

trol mixer parameters.

■ MIDI co n n e cto rs

MIDI messages (the data handled by MIDI) are transmitted

and received using the following three types of connectors.

On the VS-880, MIDI OUT and MIDI THRU are handled by

a single connector, which can be switched to act as the

desired connector. (p.90)

Exclusive messages

Unlike note messages and control change messages, exclu-

sive messages are used to transmit settings that are unique

to a particular device. On the VS-880, exclusive messages

can be used to control mixer parameters (in the same way as

control change messages). Normally, control change mes-

sages are easier to handle, so they should be used rather

than exclusive messages. Exclusive messages intended for

different units are distinguished by their Device ID, rather

than by MIDI channel. When exclusive messages are to be

transmitted or received, you must set the Device ID of both

units to a matching setting.

MIDI IN:

This receives MIDI messages from exter-

nal MIDI devices.

MIDI OUT:

This transmits MIDI messages from the

VS-880.

MIDI THRU: This re-transmits all MIDI messages that

were received at MIDI IN, without modi-

fying them.

■ MIDI ch a n n e ls

■ MIDI im p le m e n ta tio n ch a rt

MIDI is able to send information over a single MIDI cable

independently to two or more MIDI devices. This is made

possible by the concept of MIDI channels. You can think of

MIDI channels as being somewhat similar in function to the

channels on a television. By changing the channel of a TV

set, you can view a variety of programs being transmitted

by different broadcast stations. This is because data is

received only from the transmitter whose channel is select-

ed on the receiver.

MIDI allows a variety of electronic musical instruments to

communicate with each other. However it is not necessarily

the case that all devices will be able to communicate using

all types of MIDI message. They can only communicate

using those types of MIDI message that they have in com-

mon.

Each ownerÕs manual for a MIDI device includes a MIDI

Implementation Chart. This chart shows you at a glance the

types of MIDI message that can be transmitted and

received. By comparing the implementation charts of two

devices, you will be able to see the types of message with

which they will be able to communicate.

In the same way, a MIDI device whose receive channel is set

to Ò1Ó will receive only the data being transmitted by anoth-

er MIDI device whose transmit channel is also set to Ò1.Ó

8 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Use with MIDI devices

Usin g MIDI to sw itch th e tra ck sta tu s

You can use MIDI control change messages to switch the status of each track (Track Status). MIDI

channels 1Ð8 correspond to tracks 1Ð8 respectively. Use controller number 29 to switch the track

status.

Depending on the data value of controller number 29, the track status will change as follows.

● When stopped

VALUE

STATUS

0Ð31

32Ð63

64Ð95

96Ð127

MUTE➝MUTE

PLAY➝MUTE

REC➝MUTE

MUTE➝PLAY

PLAY➝PLAY

REC➝PLAY

MUTE➝REC

PLAY➝REC

REC➝REC

SOURCE➝REC

MUTE➝SOURCE

PLAY➝SOURCE

REC➝SOURCE

SOURCE➝SOURCE

SOURCE➝MUTE SOURCE➝PLAY

● During playback or recording

VALUE

STATUS

0Ð31

32Ð63

64Ð95

Ñ (*1)

REC➝REC

96Ð127

Ñ (*1)

REC➝SOURCE (*2)

MUTE➝X (*1)

PLAY➝MUTE

Ñ (*1)

MUTE➝PLAY

PLAY➝PLAY

Ñ (*1)

SOURCE➝MUTE Ñ (*1)

SOURCE➝REC (*2) SOURCE➝SOURCE

(*1) Ignored.

(*2) Cannot be switched while recording.

Sy n ch ro n izin g w ith a MIDI se q u e n ce r

The VS-880 can be operated in synchronization with a MIDI sequencer. Synchronization can be

accomplished in one of the following three ways. Use the method that is appropriate for your situ-

ation. However if MIDI Clock (Tempo Map, or Sync Track) is used, it will be possible to synchro-

nize a MIDI sequencer from the VS-880 (VS-880 as master), but it will not be possible to synchro-

nize the VS-880 from the sequencer (VS-880 as slave).

● Using MTC (MIDI time code)

● Using the tempo map

● Using the sync track

* For details on MIDI sequencer operation, refer to the ownerÕs manual for your sequencer.

■ Usin g MTC

This section explains how the VS-880 can be synchronized with a MIDI sequencer that implements

MTC (MIDI Time Code). When using MTC, you can choose whether to have the VS-880 be the

master that controls the MIDI sequencer, or whether the MIDI sequencer will be the master that

controls the VS-880.

< Types of MTC >

The VS-880 allows you to select the following types of MTC. Check the specifications of the MIDI

devices that you are using, and select the appropriate type of MTC on the VS-880.

30:

30 frames per second non-drop format. This is used by audio devices such as analog

tape recorders, and for NTSC format black and white video (used in the US and Japan,

etc.).

29N: 29.97 frames per second non-drop format. This is used for NTSC format color video

(used in the US and Japan, etc.).

29D: 29.97 frames per second drop format. This is used for NTSC format broadcast color

video (used in the US and Japan, etc.)

25:

25 frames per second frame rate. This is used in SECAM format / PAL format video

(used in Europe, etc.), and for audio equipment and film.

24:

24 frames per second frame rate. This is used for film in the US.

8 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Use with MIDI devices

MTC Type

Sy n ch ro n izin g to th e VS-8 8 0 (Ma ste r)

When you want to synchronize the MIDI sequencer to the

VS-880, use the following procedure.

This sets the type of MTC. Check the specifications of the

MIDI devices that you are using, and select the appropriate

type of MTC on the VS-880.

1 . Use a MIDI cable to connect the VS-880 and the MIDI

30:

30 frames per second non-drop format. This is

used by audio devices such as analog tape

recorders, and for NTSC format black and white

video (used in the US and Japan, etc.).

sequencer as follows.

(

)

MIDI

DIGITAL 5,6 FOOT

PHONES

SWITCH

OUT THRU

29N: 29.97 frames per second non-drop format. This is

used for NTSC format color video (used in the

US and Japan, etc.).

29D: 29.97 frames per second drop format. This is

used for NTSC format broadcast color video

(used in the US and Japan, etc.)

OUT

25:

25 frames per second frame rate. This is used in

SECAM format / PAL format video (used in

Europe, etc.), and for audio equipment and film.

24 frames per second frame rate. This is used for

film in the US.

M I D I I N

MIDI sequencer

(implements MTC)

24:

< Non-drop format and drop format >

NTSC format VCRs use two formats; non-drop and drop.

In non-drop format, the frames are continuous. However

in drop format, two frames are skipped at the beginning

of each minute except for the minutes which fall at ten-

minute intervals.

2 . Make sure that the MIDI OUT/THRU connector is set

for use as a MIDI OUT connector. With the factory set-

tings, MIDI OUT is selected.

In most video production and music production, continu-

ous frames are easier to handle, so non-drop format is

widely used. However in broadcast studios, where time

code must match actual clock time, drop format is widely

used.

Press [SYSTEM], select “SYS MIDI PRM?”, select

“SYS MID: MIDIThr=”, and make sure that it is set to

“Out.”

3 . Make settings so that MTC will be used for synchro-

nization.

Press [SYSTEM], select “SYS Sync/Tempo ?”, and set

the following parameters.

Gen.:

Set this to ÒMTC.Ó

MTC Type: Select the desired type of MTC.

4 . This completes synchronization settings for the VS-880.

Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

5 . Make settings on your MIDI sequencer so that it will

synchronize to incoming MTC, and prepare it to begin

playback of MIDI song data. When you start playback

on the VS-880, the MIDI sequencer will begin playback

in synchronization.

Gen (Sync generator)

This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. When using a

synchronization signal from the VS-880 to synchronize

external MIDI devices, set this to the desired type of syn-

chronization signal.

Off:

Synchronization signals will not be transmit-

ted.

MTC:

MIDI Time Code will be transmitted.

MIDIClk: MIDI Clock will be transmitted.

SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track

will be transmitted.

8 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Use with MIDI devices

Gen (Sync generator)

Synchronizing to a MIDI sequencer (Sla ve)

When you want to synchronize the VS-880 to the MIDI

sequencer, use the following procedure.

This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. When using a

synchronization signal from the VS-880 to synchronize

external MIDI devices, set this to the desired type of syn-

chronization signal.

1 . Use a MIDI cable to connect the VS-880 and the MIDI

sequencer as follows.

Off:

Synchronization signals will not be transmit-

ted.

(

)

MIDI

DIGITAL 5,6 FOOT

PHONES

SWITCH

OUT THRU

MTC:

MIDI Time Code will be transmitted.

MIDIClk: MIDI Clock will be transmitted.

SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track

will be transmitted.

OUT

ErrLevel (Error level)

When MTC from an external MIDI device is used to syn-

chronize the VS-880, this parameter sets the interval (0Ð10)

at which the MTC reception status will be checked. If MTC

is not transmitted continuously, the VS-880 will check the

MTC, and will halt synchronized operation if a problem is

found. In such cases, increase the checking interval so that

synchronized operation will continue even if there are slight

problems with MTC reception.

MIDI sequencer

(implements MTC)

M I D I O U T

MTC Type

2 . Make settings so that the VS-880 will synchronize to

incoming MTC messages.

This sets the type of MTC. Check the specifications of the

MIDI devices that you are using, and select the appropriate

type of MTC on the VS-880.

Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SYSTEM]. The display

in the SYNC MODE field will change from ÒINTÓ to

ÒEXT,Ó and the VS-880 will synchronize to MTC mes-

sages from an external device.

30:

30 frames per second non-drop format. This is

used by audio devices such as analog tape

recorders, and for NTSC format black and white

video (used in the US and Japan, etc.).

3 . Select the type of MTC.

Press [SYSTEM], select ÒSYS Sync/Tempo ?Ó, select

ÒSYS Syn: MTC Type=Ó, and select the type of MTC.

29N: 29.97 frames per second non-drop format. This is

used for NTSC format color video (used in the

US and Japan, etc.).

29D: 29.97 frames per second drop format. This is

used for NTSC format broadcast color video

(used in the US and Japan, etc.)

4 . This completes synchronization settings on the VS-880.

Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

5 . Make settings on your MIDI sequencer so that it will

transmit MTC. On the VS-880, press [PLAY] to prepare

for playback. Start playback on the MIDI sequencer,

and the VS-880 will begin playback in synchronization.

25:

25 frames per second frame rate. This is used in

SECAM format / PAL format video (used in

Europe, etc.), and for audio equipment and film.

24 frames per second frame rate. This is used for

film in the US.

24:

Source (Sync source)

This determines how the VS-880 will synchronize with

other devices.

< Non-drop format and drop format >

INT: The VS-880 will be controlled by its own internal

clock. Select this setting when you are not syn-

chronizing with other devices, or when you want

external MIDI devices to be controlled by syn-

chronization signals from the VS-880.

NTSC format VCRs use two formats; non-drop and drop.

In non-drop format, the frames are continuous. However

in drop format, two frames are skipped at the beginning

of each minute except for the minutes which fall at ten-

minute intervals.

EXT: The VS-880 will be controlled by synchronization

signals (MTC) from an external MIDI device. In

this case, the VS-880 will not operate unless it is

receiving MTC signals. Select this setting when

you want to use MTC from an external MIDI

device to control the VS-880.

In most video production and music production, continu-

ous frames are easier to handle, so non-drop format is

widely used. However in broadcast studios, where time

code must match actual clock time, drop format is widely

used.

In particular when using computer-based MIDI sequencing

software, the MTC that is transmitted may be unstable. As

far as possible, we recommend that the VS-880 be used as

the timing standard (Master).

8 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Use with MIDI devices5 Use with MIDI devices

< Switching the display of the TIME field >

■ Usin g th e te m p o m a p

When MTC is being received from an external MIDI device

for synchronization, you can select whether the time dis-

played in the TIME field will be Òbased on the external

MIDI deviceÓ or Òbased on the VS-880.Ó

Even if your MIDI sequencer does not support MTC or

MMC, you can use MIDI Clock for synchronization if the

sequencer supports Song Position Pointer messages. There

are two methods of synchronization using MIDI Clock;

using the tempo map and using the sync track. In this sec-

tion, the method of using the tempo map is explained.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System

PRM ?” appears.

2 . Press [YES].

< Notice when using the tempo map for synchronization >

When using the tempo map, use a song that was recorded

using the metronome. The tempo and time signature of

the metronome are determined by the tempo map, so if

you have been recording in time with the metronome, the

recorded performance will match the timing of the tempo

map. However if you created the tempo map after record-

ing the song, the timing of the song will not match the

tempo map, and correct synchronization will not be possi-

ble.

3 . Press PARAMETER[

4 . The display will indicate “TimeDispFmt=”. Rotate the

TIME/VALUE dial.

TimeDispFmt (Time display format)

This sets the way in which the standard time is shown in

the TIME field of the display. Normally, leave this set to

ÒREL.Ó If you are using MTC to synchronize the VS-880

from an external MIDI device, set this to ÒABSÓ if appro-

priate.

For details on using the metronome, refer to ÒSounding

the metronomeÓ (p.109).

REL: The starting time of the song will be displayed

as Ò00h00m00s00.Ó

ABS: The time specified by Offset will be added to the

display.

W h a t is th e te m p o m a p ?

The tempo of a song is determined by the ÒTempo Map.Ó

The tempo map lets you specify changes in tempo for each

measure. Starting at the specified measure, it changes to a

given tempo at the given beat. Tempo maps are numbered

sequentially from the beginning of the song as tempo map

1, tempo map 2, and tempo map 3, etc.

Tempo map 1 is already specified at the beginning of the

song, and determines the initial tempo of the song. To

change the tempo at a subsequent measure, create a new

tempo map at each location where you want the tempo to

change. Up to 50 tempo maps can be created.

5 . Press PARAMETER[

6 . The display will indicate “Ofs=.” Rotate the

TIME/VALUE dial.

Ofs (Offset)

When using MTC from an external device to synchronize

the VS-880, the Offset setting lets you match the song play-

back timing with the MTC timing.

Set the Offset to the difference between ÒMTC timeÓ and

the Òtime that you want the song to playback.Ó For exam-

ple if you want song time Ò00h10m00s00Ó to playback

when MTC time Ò01h00m00s00Ó is reached, set the offset as

follows.

(01h00m00s00) - (00h10m00s00) = (00h50m00s00)

Tempo Map 1

7 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

Tempo Map 1 Tempo Map 2 Tempo Map 3

Time

8 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Use with MIDI devices

Cre a tin g a te m p o m a p

To change the initial tempo of the song, use the following

procedure to change the setting of tempo map 1.

Sy n ch ro n ize d o p e ra tio n

1 . Use a MIDI cable to connect the VS-880 and the MIDI

sequencer as follows.

1 . Press [SYSTEM]. If a message with a question mark

such as “SYS System PRM?” does not appear, press

[SYSTEM] once again.

(

)

MIDI

DIGITAL 5,6 FOOT

PHONES

SWITCH

OUT THRU

2 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to get the “SYS

Sync/tempo?” display, and press [YES].

OUT

3 . Use PARAMETER [ ][ ] to make the display

read “SYS Syn: Tmap1=120.”

The display below means that tempo map 1 starts at

measure 1, and specifies a time signature of 4/4 and a

tempo of 120 quarter notes per minute.

M I D I I N

Measure

Time signature

Tempo map number Tempo

TIME

CONDITION MARKER#

2 . Make sure that the MIDI OUT/THRU connector is set

for use as a MIDI OUT connector.

With the factory settings, MIDI OUT is selected.

Press [SYSTEM], select ÒSYS MIDI PRM?Ó, select ÒSYS

MID: MIDIThr=Ó, and make sure that it is set to ÒOut.Ó

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

4 . Set the tempo and time signature.

3 . Make settings so that MIDI Clock will be used for syn-

chronization.

Each time you press CURSOR [ ], the blinking area

will step through the tempo map number, tempo, start-

ing measure, and time signature. Move the blinking

area to the value that you wish to change, and use the

TIME/VALUE dial to modify the value. (It is not possi-

ble to change the starting measure of tempo map 1.)

When you press CURSOR [ ], the tempo map number

will blink.

Press [SYSTEM], select ÒSYS Sync/Tempo ?Ó, select

ÒSYS Syn:Gen.=Ó, and set this to ÒMIDIclk.Ó

4 . This completes synchronization settings for the VS-880.

Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

5 . Make settings on your MIDI sequencer so that it will

synchronize to incoming MIDI clock messages, and

prepare it to begin playback of MIDI song data.

5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

When you start playback on the VS-880, the MIDI

sequencer will begin playback in synchronization.

Tempo

This sets the tempo (25.0Ð250.0) of the tempo map. The mea-

sure and beat shown in the display, the metronome sound,

and the MIDI Clock signals sent from the VS-880 will be

according to this tempo setting.

MIDIThr (MIDI thru switch)

This selects the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU connec-

tor. With the factory settings, this is set to ÒOut.Ó

Out: The connector will transmit MIDI messages from

the VS-880. Select this when you want to transmit

metronome Note messages or mixer parameter

settings (control change messages or exclusive

messages).

Measure

This sets the starting measure (1Ð999) of the tempo map.

The measure and beat shown in the display, the metronome

sound, and the MIDI Clock signals sent from the VS-880

will be according to this tempo setting.

Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN connec-

tor will be retransmitted from the connector

without change.

Beat

This sets the time signature (1/1Ð8/1, 1/2Ð8/2, 1/4Ð8/4,

1/8Ð8/8) of the tempo map. The beats shown in the display,

the metronome sound, and the MIDI Clock signals sent

from the VS-880 will be according to this time signature set-

ting.

9 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Use with MIDI devices

Gen (Sync generator)

■ Usin g th e sy n c tra ck

This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. When using a

synchronization signal from the VS-880 to synchronize

external MIDI devices, set this to the desired type of syn-

chronization signal.

In this section, the method of using the sync track is

explained.

In addition to the tracks for recording audio signals, the VS-

880 has a separate sync track for recording MIDI Clock sig-

nals. This means that unlike conventional analog multitrack

recorders, it is not necessary to reserve one of the audio

tracks for recording the sync signal.

Off:

Synchronization signals will not be transmit-

ted.

MTC:

MIDI Time Code will be transmitted.

To use the sync track, the MIDI clock of the MIDI song data

to which you want to synchronize must first be recorded

onto the sync track. Then, transmit the recorded MIDI clock

data to the MIDI sequencer to synchronize the MIDI song

data. In this way, while the method of using the tempo map

explained in the previous section synchronizes the perfor-

mance to the VS-880 song, this method of using the sync

track synchronizes the performance to the MIDI song data.

Thus, this is a convenient method to use when the MIDI

song data has been created earlier than the VS-880 song.

In particular, when synchronizing to MIDI song data in

which the tempo gradually becomes faster or slower, using

the tempo map allows more precise following of tempo

changes, compared to the tempo map in which tempo is set

for each measure.

MIDIClk: MIDI Clock will be transmitted.

SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track

will be transmitted.

Ch a n g in g th e te m p o d u rin g th e p e r-

fo rm a n ce

To modify tempo map settings, use the following proce-

dure.

< Limitations on changing the starting measure >

Tempo maps are numbered from the beginning of the

song as tempo map 1, tempo map 2, tempo map 3, etc.

This means that it is not possible to modify the starting

measure of a tempo map to make it earlier than the start-

ing measure of the previous tempo map, or later than the

starting measure of the following tempo map. For exam-

ple if tempo map 2 has a starting measure of Ò8Ó and

tempo map 4 has a starting measure of Ò16,Ó the starting

measure of tempo map 3 can be modified only in the

range of Ò9Ð15.Ó

< Notice for synchronization >

The MIDI clock data recorded in the sync track is trans-

mitted after song playback or recording begins. This

means that if the music begins at the moment that play-

back begins, the MIDI sequencer will have to start playing

back the MIDI song data at the same time that it receives

the first MIDI clock data. In some cases, this can cause

synchronization to be initially unstable.

1 . Press [SYSTEM].

If this problem occurs, insert several measures of blank

space at the beginning of the VS-880 song and the MIDI

sequencer song.

If a message with a question mark such as ÒSYS System

PRM?Ó does not appear, press [SYSTEM] once again.

2 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to get the “SYS

Sync/tempo?” display, and press [YES].

3 . Use PARAMETER [ ][ ] to get the “SYS Syn:

Tmap1=” display, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to

select the tempo map that you wish to change.

4 . Press CURSOR [ ] to make the blinking area to the

item (tempo, starting measure, time signature) that you

wish to change, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to modi-

fy the value.

* Since tempo map 1 is the initial tempo of the song, it is

not possible to modify the starting measure setting of Ò1.Ó

5 . When you finish making settings, press CURSOR [

]

to make the tempo map number blink, and press [PLAY

(DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

9 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 5 Use with MIDI devices

With the factory settings, MIDI OUT is selected.

Press [SYSTEM], select ÒSYS MIDI PRM?Ó, select ÒSYS

MID: MIDIThr=Ó, and make sure that it is set to ÒOut.Ó

Re co rd in g MIDI clo ck m e ssa g e s

1 . Use a MIDI cable to connect the VS-880 and the MIDI

sequencer as follows.

3 . Make settings so that the MIDI clock data recorded on

the sync track will be used for synchronization.

(

)

MIDI

DIGITAL 5,6 FOOT

PHONES

SWITCH

OUT THRU

Press [SYSTEM], select ÒSYS Sync/Tempo ?Ó, select

ÒSYS Syn:Gen.=Ó, and set this to ÒSyncTr.Ó

4 . This completes synchronization settings for the VS-880.

Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

OUT

5 . Make settings on your MIDI sequencer so that it will

synchronize to incoming MIDI clock messages, and

prepare it to begin playback of MIDI song data.

M I D I O U T

When you start playback on the VS-880, the MIDI

sequencer will begin playback in synchronization.

MIDIThr (MIDI thru switch)

This selects the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU connec-

tor. With the factory settings, this is set to ÒOut.Ó

Out: The connector will transmit MIDI messages from

the VS-880. Select this when you want to transmit

metronome Note messages or mixer parameter

settings (control change messages or exclusive

messages).

2 . Press [SYSTEM], select “SYS Sync/Tempo ?”, and

select “SYS SYN: Sync Tr.Rec?”

Press [YES], and the display will indicate ÒWait for

Start,Ó and the sync track will be ready to record MIDI

clock data.

Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN connec-

tor will be retransmitted from the connector

without change.

3 . Start playback of the MIDI song data, and the MIDI

clock data will be recorded on the sync track.

Gen (Sync generator)

* While MIDI clock data is being recorded onto the sync

track, the input sources can be monitored, but audio

tracks cannot be recorded or played back.

This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. When using a

synchronization signal from the VS-880 to synchronize

external MIDI devices, set this to the desired type of syn-

chronization signal.

4 . When the MIDI song data finishes playing back, the VS-

880 will automatically stop recording MIDI clock data,

and will return to Play condition.

Off:

Synchronization signals will not be transmit-

ted.

MTC:

MIDI Time Code will be transmitted.

Sy n ch ro n ize d o p e ra tio n

MIDIClk: MIDI Clock will be transmitted.

SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track

will be transmitted.

1 . Use a MIDI cable to connect the VS-880 and the MIDI

sequencer as follows.

(

)

MIDI

DIGITAL 5,6 FOOT

PHONES

SWITCH

OUT THRU

W h e n y o u e x p e rie n ce p ro b -

le m s w ith sy n ch ro n iza tio n

OUT

¥ Is the MIDI Thru switch set to Out?

¥ Is the sync generator set correctly?

¥ Is the sync source set correctly?

¥ If you are using MTC, are both devices set to the same

type of MTC?

M I D I I N

¥ If you are using the sync track, are MIDI clock messages

recorded in the sync track?

2 . Make sure that the MIDI OUT/THRU connector is set

for use as a MIDI OUT connector.

9 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ch a p te r 6 Use w ith a Zip d rive

Disk drives such as hard disks or magneto-optical disks can

Se le ct th e Zip d rive a s th e

re co rd in g d e stin a tio n

(Drive Se le ct)

If you wish to record a song on another disk drive or parti-

tion, use the following procedure to switch the current

drive.

be connected to the SCSI connector of the VS-880.

This chapter will explain the procedure for using the VS-880

with a Zip drive in particular. Read this chapter when you

wish to record a performance on a Zip drive. If you are

using the VS-880 with a hard disk or magneto-optical disk

instead, read ÒZip driveÓ as Òhard diskÓ or Òmagneto-opti-

cal disk.Ó

1 . If you wish to specify a removable disk drive as the cur-

rent drive, insert the disk.

Co n n e ctin g a Zip d rive

2 . Press [SYSTEM].

If a message with a question mark such as ÒSYS System

PRM?Ó does not appear, press [SYSTEM] once again.

Zip drives can be connected to the SCSI connector of the

VS-880. For details on how to make Zip drive connections,

and how to make the necessary settings, refer to ÒUsing an

external disk driveÓ (p.130).

3 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to get the “SYS Drive

Select” display, and press [YES]. When you press

[YES], the connected disk drives will be scanned.

4 . Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the disk drive.

The internal hard disk is displayed as ÒIDE,Ó and exter-

nal disk drives are displayed as ÒSC0ÐSC7Ó (the num-

ber is the SCSI ID number). Numbers following the disk

drive name are partition numbers. For example to select

the Zip drive, specify ÒSC5:0Ó.

In itia lizin g th e d isk

(Drive In itia lize )

Before using a new disk drive or a disk drive that was used

by another device, you must initialize the disk drive so that

it can be used by the VS-880. Use the following procedure.

5 . When you have made your selection, press [YES].

The display will indicate ÒSYS Change to,Ó so press

[YES] once again to execute the change of current drive.

To cancel, press [NO].

1 . Insert a disk into the Zip drive.

2 . Press [SYSTEM].

If a message with a question mark such as ÒSYS System

PRM?Ó does not appear, press [SYSTEM] once again.

3 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to get the “SYS Drive

Initialize” display, and press [YES].

4 . The display will indicate “Init.Drive,” so use the

TIME/VALUE dial to select the disk drive that you wish

to initialize (IDE, SC0–SC7).

The number of the disk drive indicates its SCSI ID num-

ber.

5 . Press PARAMETER [

] to get the “PhysicalFmt” dis-

play, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select whether or

not the disk will be physically formatted.

If the disk drive has been used by another device, select

ÒOn.Ó If the disk drive is new, physical formatting has

probably been performed, so in this case select ÒOff.Ó

6 . Press PARAMETER [

] to get the “Partition” display.

Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the size of the parti-

tion. Normally you will select “1000 MB.”

7 . Press [YES] to get the “SYS Init.SC5:U OK ?” display.

Press [YES], and a message of ÒSYS Init.SC5: U Sure?Ó

will ask for confirmation. Press [YES] once again to exe-

cute initialization. To cancel initialization, press [NO].

When initialization ends correctly, the VS-880 will auto-

matically re-start, and enter Play condition.

* When initializing a large-capacity disk drive, be aware

that some time will be required. This is not a malfunction.

The progress of initialization will be shown in the display,

so be sure not to turn the power off until initialization is

complete.

9 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Use with a Zip drive

4 . Press PARAMETER

[

]

to get the “SNG

Sa vin g p e rfo rm a n ce d a ta

o n a Zip d isk (So n g Co p y )

The VS-880 allows you to copy song data to another disk

drive. By connecting a magneto-optical disk drive or a

removable hard disk drive (hereafter referred to as remov-

able disk drives) to the VS-880 and copying song data to

that disk, you can backup song data.

The VS-880 also allows you to backup song data to a DAT

recorder. However when the time required to perform the

backup and questions of reliability are considered, it is bet-

ter to use a removable disk drive. Roland recommends that

you use this method to make your backups.

If you are using a removable disk drive as a place to backup

song data, you may use a slower drive that is not suitable

for song recording or playback.

Dest.Drive=” display, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to

select the copy destination disk drive.

The internal hard disk will be shown as ÒIDE,Ó and

external disk drives will be shown as ÒSC0ÐSC7.Ó The

number following each disk drive indicates the parti-

tion number.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

5 . Press [YES], and “SNG Copy to ✱✱✱:✱” will appear

(“✱✱✱:✱” indicates the disk drive and partition number

of the copy destination). If it is OK to copy the data,

press [YES] twice. To cancel the operation, press [NO].

If ÒALLÓ is specified as the target, a confirmation mes-

sage will ask you whether you want to initialize the

copy destination disk drive. If you wish to initialize the

copy destination disk drive and copy the song data,

press [YES]. In this case, all song data that had been

saved on the copy destination disk drive will be lost. If

you wish to copy without initializing, press [NO].

When the copy operation is successfully completed,

you will return to Play condition.

■ Sa ving on a single disk (Pla ya ble)

Normally you will use this method to copy song data. With

this method, even if song data already exists in the copy

destination disk drive, the newly copied song will be added

to the data.

1 . When copying song data to an external disk drive, con-

nect the disk drive as explained in “Connecting a disk

drive” (p.130).

2 . Press [SONG], use PARAMETER [

][

] to get

the “SNG Song Copy” display, and press [YES].

If you have connected a removable disk drive, the dis-

play will indicate ÒSNG CpyMode=.Ó Use the

TIME/VALUE dial to set this to ÒPlayable.Ó

< If the display indicates “Disk Memory Full” >

If this message appears during copying, the copy opera-

tion has been halted either because the disk drive has

insufficient free space, or the copy destination disk drive

would contain more than 200 songs (the maximum num-

ber of songs). However any song data which has been

completely copied before this message appeared will still

be usable.

3 . Press PARAMETER

[

]

to get the “SNG

CpyTarget=” display, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to

select the song that you wish to copy.

If you wish to copy the currently selected song, select

Ò1 Song.Ó To copy all songs from the current drive,

select ÒAll.Ó

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

● Playable

Normally you will use this method to copy song data. If

song data is copied using this method, you can specify the

copy destination disk drive as the current drive, and direct-

ly perform operations such playback or undoing a record-

ing.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

9 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Use with a Zip drive

This section explains the procedure for copying song data to

a Zip drive (SCSI ID number 5) as an external disk drive.

■ When the d a ta ca nnot b e

sa ved on a sing le d isk (Archive)

1 . Connect the Zip drive as explained in “Using an exter-

● Archive

nal disk drive” (p.130).

Use this method when you are using a removable disk drive

and several disks will be required to copy the specified song

data.

2 . Press [SONG], use PARAMETER [

][

] to get

the “SNG Song Copy” display, and press [YES].

When song data is copied using this method, the song data

will be converted into a data format specifically for saving

(archive format). This means that it will not be possible to

directly playback etc. the song data by specifying the saving

destination disk drive as the current drive. If you wish to

use the song data which was copied, you will need to load

the archive data into the current drive using the appropriate

procedure.

3 . The display will indicate “SNG CpyMode=,” so use the

TIME/VALUE dial to set this to “Archive.”

4 . Press PARAMETER

[

]

to get the “SNG

ArcTarget=” display, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to

select the song that you wish to copy.

If you wish to copy the currently selected song, select

Ò1 Song.Ó To copy all songs from the current drive,

select ÒAll.Ó

< Optimize >

Even when overdubbing and punch-in recording are

repeated, the original data that was rewritten (the

unwanted data) will remain on the disk. By erasing this

unwanted data from the disk, you can decrease the size

occupied by the song.

If the song will not fit on a single disk, try using Optimize

(p.113). In some cases this will make the song data com-

pact enough to be saved on a single disk.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

5 . Press PARAMETER [

] to get the “SNG Arc.Drive=”

Pro ce d u re fo r sa vin g o n m u ltip le

d isk s (Sto re In )

display, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the

copy destination disk drive.

Here we will copy the data to a Zip drive, so select

ÒSC5:U.Ó

For this operation, you will be able to select only

removable disk drives which are connected to the SCSI

connector. It is not possible to select the current drive

(the internal hard disk) as the copy destination drive.

Use this method when using a removable disk drive and

two or more disks are required in order to copy the speci-

fied song data.

In order to use song data which has been copied with this

method, you must use the procedure of the following page

to load the archived song data from the removable disk

back into the current drive.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

< Disk handling >

When using this operation to copy song data, the disk will

be initialized to hold archive-type song data. This means

that this operation can be executed using even a disk

which has not been initialized by the VS-880. However be

aware that if you use this operation to copy data to a disk

which already contains song data, all of the previously

saved song data will be lost.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

A disk on which song data has been archived cannot be

selected as the current drive in the way that a disk con-

taining conventional song data can be. If you attempt to

select an archive disk as the current drive, it will be recog-

nized as an un-initialized disk drive.

6 . Press PARAMETER [

] to get the “SNG Arc.Func=”

display, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “Stow

In.”

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

9 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 6 Use with a Zip drive

In step 3, select Ò1 Song.Ó If two or more songs were

saved to the Zip disk, the names of the saved songs will

also be displayed. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select

the name of the song you wish to copy, and press [YES]

twice.

7 . Insert a Zip disk into the Zip drive, and press [YES].

The display will ask ÒSNG Stow In SC5:U?Ó If it is OK

to copy the data, press [YES] twice. To cancel the opera-

tion, press [NO].

8 . The display will ask, “Store Current?” If you wish to

store the current song, press [YES]. If you decide not to

store, press [NO].

7 . The display will ask “Store Current?” If you wish to store

the current song, press [YES]. If you decide not to

store, press [NO].

9 . The display will ask, “You’ll Lose Data/Continue ?” If

you press [YES] the Song Copy operation will be exe-

cuted. If you decide to cancel the Song Copy operation,

press [NO].

8 . If you have selected “All” in step 3, the display will ask

“Init. IDE:0 OK?” This message is asking you to confirm

that you wish to initialize the loading destination drive

(the internal hard disk). If you wish to initialize the drive

and then load, press [YES]. If you decide not to initial-

ize, press [NO].

* All data stored on the Zip disk will be lost. Do not use a

Zip disk that contains song data you wish to keep.

1 0 . If the amount of song data is more than can be copied

onto one Zip disk, the disk will be ejected, and the dis-

play will request “PleaseInsertDisk.” Insert the next

disk, and press [YES].

* If at this point you press [YES], all songs saved on the

internal hard disk will be lost. Normally you should press

[NO]. If the loading destination hard disk does not have

sufficient space, you should first make a backup copy of

the internal hard disk, and then press [YES].

You will return to step 9.

At this time, write the disk numbers on the disk labels

so that you will remember the sequence in which they

were inserted.

9 . Loading will be executed. If the copy operation involved

two or more disks, the disk will be ejected, and you will

be prompted to “PleaseInsertDisk.” Insert the next disk

and press [YES].

1 1 . If the copy operation involved two or more disks, the

display will say “Insert Disk #” (# indicating the disk

insertion sequence) at the end. Insert each disk in the

correct order, and press [YES].

When the data has been loaded correctly, you will

return to Play condition.

When copying has been completed successfully, you

will return to Play condition.

If y o u h a ve p ro b le m s sa vin g

th e d a ta

Pro ce d u re fo r lo a d in g fro m m u ltip le

d isk s (Ex tra ct)

¥ Is the Zip drive connected correctly?

When you wish to use archive-song data that was saved to

a removable disk drive, use the following procedure to load

the song data into the current drive.

¥ Is the copy destination drive specified correctly?

¥ Does the disk drive have enough free area?

¥ Is the destination drive writeable?

1 . Press [SONG], use PARAMETER [

][

] to get

the “SNG Song Copy?” display, and press [YES].

2 . The display will indicate “SNG CpyMode=.” Use the

TIME/VALUE dial to select “Archives.”

3 . Press PARAMETER [>>] to get the “SNG ArcTarget=”

display, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the

song that you wish to load.

To load the data of a single song, select Ò1 Song.Ó To

load all the song data, select ÒAll.Ó

4 . Press PARAMETER [

] to get the “SNG Arc.Drive=”

display, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the disk

drive from which the data will be loaded.

Here we will read from a Zip drive, so select SC5:U.

5 . Press PARAMETER [

] to get the “SNG Arc.Func=

display, use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “Extract.”

6 . Insert a Zip disk into the Zip drive, and press [YES].

The display will ask “SNG Extract SC5:0?” If it is OK to

copy the data, press [YES] twice. To cancel the opera-

tion, press [NO].

9 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ch a p te r 7 Use w ith a DAT re co rd e r (DAT b a ck u p )

This chapter explains the procedures for using a DAT

Sa vin g p e rfo rm a n ce d a ta to

recorder in conjunction with the VS-880. Read this chapter

when you wish to save a song to a DAT recorder.

Song data created on the VS-880 can be saved using a DAT

recorder. This procedure is referred to as Òbackup.Ó The

procedure of loading the previously backed up song data

a DAT re co rd e r (Ba ck u p )

This procedure backs up the data of the specified song from

the currently drive.

into the VS-880 is referred to as Òrecover.Ó The song data

that is backed up includes the data of all V-tracks, and song

settings such as locate points, mark points, and scene set-

VS-880Õs DIGITAL OUT connector to the digital input

tings.

1 . Connect your DAT recorder to the VS-880.

Use an RCA phono type coaxial cable to connect the

connector (coaxial) of your DAT recorder. Set your

DAT recorder to record digital signals.

Make backups of your data as a precaution against unfore-

seen problems, or when your disk drive is full and no more

* Normally, the sample rate at which data is transmitted is

recording is possible. We recommend that important data

set at 48 kHz. This sample rate has no relation to the sam-

be backed up twice, using separate tapes.

ple rate of the song data. If your DAT recorded requires

Since DAT tapes are easily transported, this is convenient

you to set the sample rate, set it to 48 kHz.

when you wish to exchange song data with a friend who

also has a VS-880, or when you have a VS-880 both at home

and in the studio.

2 . Press [SONG]. Then use PARAMETER [

][

] to

get the “SNG DAT Backup?” display, and press [YES].

3 . The display will indicate “SNG Bak=,” so use the

TIME/VALUE dial to select the song that you wish to

backup. If you wish to backup all song data in the cur-

rent drive, select “ALL.”

< Cautions for backup >

Backup cannot be done using devices other than a DAT

recorder, such as an MD recorder or a DCC recorder.

If a backup requires two or more tapes, use tapes of iden-

tical length so that they will be used most effectively.

Also, be sure to note the recorded sequence on the labels

of each tape.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

Do not use 180 minute DAT tapes, since they contain thin-

ner tape and are prone to problems such as stretching and

becoming entangled in the recorder mechanism.

If your DAT recorder processes the data internally so that

the playback data is different than the recorded data,

backup cannot be performed correctly.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

When song data is being backed up, sound will not be

output from the analog output jacks of the VS-880.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

When backing up song data, turn the volume down to the

minimum position for any playback equipment (amps

etc.) that are connected to the DAT recorder. The song

data being sent to the DAT recorder consists of special sig-

nals that are recorded on disk. If this sound is monitored

from the DAT recorder at a high volume, your speakers

and/or your hearing may be damaged.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

4 . Specify the time at which the backup operation will be

Roland will take no responsibility in the event that data is

lost due to a backup failure. Also, Roland can not guaran-

tee any backed up data regardless of the capabilities or

condition of the DAT recorder.

paused.

Press PARAMETER [

display. Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set a time that is

slightly shorter than the maximum length of your tape.

If you are using two or more tapes of different record-

ing lengths, specify the length of the shortest tape.

] to get the ÒSNG Tape Len=Ó

5 . Specify whether or not the data transmission will be

slowed down.

Press PARAMETER [

] to get the ÒSNG Backup

Wait=Ó display. If you are using a disk drive that reads

and writes data more slowly, such as a magneto-optical

disk drive, set this ÒON.Ó If this setting is ÒON,Ó the

backup will take longer, but there will be fewer prob-

lems with data transmission.

9 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Use with a DAT recorder (DAT backup)

6 . Have ready the required number of tapes.

< Capacity that can be backed up and time required >

A 60 minute tape can save a song of approximately 330

MB. For example if the internal hard disk (540 MB) is used

to its full capacity, a 120 minute tape (or two 60 minute

tapes) will be necessary. However as the number of songs

increases, the capacity that can be stored will decrease. For

your reference, the backup operation will display the

number of tapes that will be necessary.

Since a 120 minute tape can backup a 660MB song, it will

take approximately 100 minutes to backup the internal

hard disk (540 MB) if it has been used to its full capacity

(approximately 36 minutes, calculated with 8 tracks of

MT2 at 44.2kHz).

The MEASURE field will show the approximate length

of time required to perform the backup. The SYNC

MODE field will show the number of tapes required for

the backup. Prepare the displayed number of tapes.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

7 . Begin the backup. Press [YES] to get the “Backup

Ready?” display, and press [YES].

Loa d ing p erform a nce d a ta

The display will indicate ÒPlease Rec DAT,Ó so put

your DAT recorder in record mode. Press [YES] once

again, the backup will begin. At this time, time dis-

played in the MEASURE field will begin counting

down.

If the backup does not fit on a single tape, the backup

will be paused at the specified time. At that time, insert

the next tape, resume recording on the DAT recorder,

and press [YES]. The backup will continue.

from a DAT record er (Recover)

To load song data that was backed-up on a DAT recorder,

use the following procedure. If two or more songs were

saved together during the backup, the data of all songs will

be loaded.

1 . Connect the recorder to the VS-880.

Using an RCA phono type coaxial cable, connect the

DIGITAL IN connector of the VS-880 to the digital out-

put of your DAT recorder.

* To halt the operation, press [NO]. You can halt the opera-

tion even during the backup, but in this case it will not be

possible to recover the song data back into the VS-880.

2 . Insert the tape which contains the song data into the

DAT recorder. If the song data is backed up on two or

more tapes, insert the first tape.

8 . When the backup operation is completed, the display

will indicate “Please Stop DAT.” Press [YES] to end the

procedure, and stop the DAT recorder.

Then prepare the tape to playback from the beginning.

3 . Press [SONG]. Then use PARAMETER [

][

] to

9 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

get the “SNG DAT Recover?” display, and press [YES].

Bak (backup):

Select the song that you wish to backup. If you wish to

4. Begin the recover operation. Use PARAMETER [ ][

to get the “SNG Recover Ready?” display, and press [YES].

]

backup all song data on the current drive, select ÒALL.Ó

The display will indicate ÒInit ✱✱✱:✱ OK?.Ó If you

wish to initialize the current drive and recover the song

data, press [YES]. In this case, all song data which had

been saved on the current drive will be lost. If you wish

to recover without initializing, press [NO].

Tape Len (Tape length):

Specify the interval at which backup will be paused. Set this

appropriately for the length of tape on which you are

recording.

5 . The display will indicate “Please Play DAT.” Begin play-

back of the song data, and loading will begin.

If the data was backed up on two or more tapes, the

recover operation will pause when the tape finishes

playing back. Insert the next tape, press [YES], and

begin playback.

Backup Wait:

If this is ÒOn,Ó the data transmission speed will be slower.

When using a disk drive whose data read/write speed is

slower, turn this ÒOn.Ó

SampleRate:

Specify the sample rate used for the backup. Normally you

will set this to 48 kHz.

* To halt the operation, press [NO]. You can halt the opera-

tion even during recover, but in this case it will not be

possible to playback the song data.

6 . When the recover operation is completed, the display

will indicate “Please Stop DAT.” Press [YES] to end the

procedure, and stop the DAT recorder.

7 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

9 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 7 Use with a DAT recorder (DAT backup)

■ Check ing the na m es of the per-

form a nce da ta tha t w a s sa ved

(Na m e)

This operation lets you check the names of song data that

was saved to a DAT recorder. Even if you have saved the

data of two or more songs in a single backup operation, you

can check the name of each song.

This operation also allows you to load selected song data

into the VS-880. When the Recover operation is used, the

data for all songs which were saved together by the backup

operation will be loaded. However with this operation

(Name), only the song data that you specify will be loaded.

■ Ch e ck in g th e sto ra g e sta tu s o f

p e rfo rm a n ce d a ta th a t w a s

sa ve d (Ve rify )

This operation checks the condition of song data that was

recorded to DAT tape.

If the data is not recorded correctly, it is possible that the

tape has been scratched or stretched. If the original song

data still exists in the disk drive, perform the backup opera-

tion once again to a different DAT tape.

1 . Press [SONG], select “SNG DAT Recover?” and press

[YES].

2 . Select “SNG Verify Ready?” and press [YES]. The dis-

1 . Digitally connect the DAT recorder to the VS-880, and

play will indicate “Please Start DAT.”

cue the song.

3 . Start tape playback, and checking of the song data will

begin.

2 . Press [SONG], select “SNG DAT Recover?” and press

[YES].

If the backup occupies two or more tapes, the operation

will pause when the tape playback ends. Insert the next

tape and press [YES], and start tape playback again.

If no problems were found with the condition of the

backed up song data, the display will indicate

ÒComplete.Ó If a problem was found, a warning mes-

sage will be displayed. Song data for which a warning

message was displayed could not be read correctly.

3 . Select “SNG Name Ready?” and press [YES]. The dis-

play will indicate “Please Play DAT.”

4 . Begin tape playback, and the song names will be

checked.

When checking is completed, the song names will be

displayed. If two or more song names were saved

together, rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to check the

song names.

4 . When the “Please Stop DAT” message appears, press

If you only wanted to check the song names, press

[PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

[YES] and stop the DAT recorder.

5 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

5 . If you wish to load song data, select the desired song

name, and press [YES].

A confirmation message will appear, asking you

whether you want to initialize the current drive. If you

wish to initialize, press [YES]. If not, press [NO]. The

display will indicate ÒPlease Play DAT.Ó

6 . Playback the song data from the beginning, and the

song data will be loaded.

If the backup occupies two or more tapes, the operation

will pause when a tape finishes playing back. At this

time, the display will indicate the number of the tape

that should now be inserted. Insert the specified tape

and press [YES], and start tape playback.

* If you wish to cancel the operation, press [NO]. It is possi-

ble to cancel even during the Recover operation, but in

this case, the song data will not be playable.

7 . When the recover operation is completed, the display

will indicate “Please Stop DAT.” Press [YES] to end the

procedure, and stop the DAT recorder.

8 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

9 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ch a p te r 8 Usin g th e in te rn a l e ffe cts

When a VS8F-1 effect expansion board is installed, you will be able to use two stereo effect units.

This chapter explains various examples of how the effects can be used. Read it in conjunction with

the VS8F-1 ownerÕs manual and ÒEffect relatedÓ (p.23) on this manual.

Ex a m p le s o f h o w th e e ffe cts ca n b e u se d

Here are several examples of ways in which the effects can be used. Apply these examples as

appropriate for your situation.

■ Ap p ly in g re ve rb to a re co rd e d p e rfo rm a n ce (Lo o p )

Here we will explain the settings for adding reverb to the playback of track 1. In this case, the sig-

nal flow will be as follows.

MIX(L, R)

EFFECT1(L, R)

EFFECT2(L, R)

MIX Sw

Track 1

Fader

Pan

MASTER OUT(L, R)

EFFECT1

Level

Lev/Bal

EFFECT2

Level

Channel 1

1 . Make sure that the mixer mode is INPUT➝TRACK.

2 . Press channel 1 [CH EDIT(Input/BUSS)].

3 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to get the “MIX Sw=” display.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select “PstFade” so that the channel faders will

adjust the playback level.

If you do not want the direct sound to be output from the MIX buss, select ÒOff.Ó

MIX Sw (mix switch)

This selects how the signal will be sent to the MIX buss. If ÒOffÓ is selected, the MIX Level and MIX

Pan/MIX Bal parameters will not be available.

Off:

not sent.

PreFade: The signal before passing through the channel fader will be sent to the MIX buss.

PstFade: The signal after passing through the channel fader will be sent to the MIX buss.

5 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press channel 7 [EFFECT-1(CH EDIT)].

6 . The signal will be sent to the EFFECT buss. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example,

select “PstFade.”

EFFECT 1 (Effect 1 switch)

Specify how the signal is sent to the EFFECT 1 buss.

Off:

The signal will not be sent.

PreFade: The signal will be taken before the channel fader.

PstFade: The signal will be taken after the channel fader.

Insert:

The effect will be inserted between the equalizer and fader of the channel.

InsertL: Insert into the L side of a stereo effect.

InsertR: Insert into the R side of a stereo effect.

InsertS: Insert the L side and R side of a stereo effect in series.

* If the effect is inserted in another channel, the value will appear as ÒÑÐ,Ó and cannot be selected.

7 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒEFFECT1 Send=Ó.

1 0 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Using the internal effects

8 . Adjust the send level to effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

This adjusts the amount of effect for each channel.

EFFECT 1 Send (Effect 1 send level)

Specify the volume level (0Ð127) of the signal that is sent to the EFFECT 1 buss. The default setting

is 100.

9 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒEFFECT1 Pan=Ó.

1 0 . Adjust the panning of the input to effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

EFFECT 1 Pan (Effect 1 pan)

For channels on which Channel Link is ÒOff,Ó this sets the panning (L63Ð0ÐR63) of the stereo signal

which is output to the EFFECT 1 buss. ÒL63Ó is far left, and ÒR63Ó is far right.

For channels on which Channel Link is ÒOn,Ó this sets the left/right volume balance (L63Ð0ÐR63)

of the stereo signal from the paired channels which is output to the EFFECT 1 buss.

The default value is Ò0Ó (center).

1 1 . Press [EDIT(SOLO) several times until “MST EFF1 RTN to=” is displayed.

1 2 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select “MIX” so that the signal will be sent from

master out.

EFF1 RTN to (Effect 1 return to)

Select the output destination of effect 1. The busses that can be selected will depend on the current

mixer mode.

When in INPUT➝TRACK mode

MIX: the MIX buss (stereo)

AUX: the AUX buss (stereo)

1 3 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒEFF1 RTN Lev=Ó.

1 4 . Adjust the output level of effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

This adjusts the overall amount of effect.

EFF1 RTN Lev (Effect 1 return level)

Set the output level (0Ð127) of effect 1.

1 5 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒEFF1 RTN Bal=Ó.

1 6 . Adjust the left/right volume balance of effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

EFF1 Bal (Effect 1 balance)

Set the left/right volume balance (L63Ð0ÐR63) of effect 1.

1 7 . Press [EFFECT] several times until “EFF EFFECT-1 PRM ?” is displayed.

1 8 . Press [YES].

1 9 . Select effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select an effect such as A00

RV:LargeHall.

2 0 . Press [YES].

When the song is played back, you will hear reverb applied to it.

1 0 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Using the internal effects

■ Ap p ly in g re ve rb a s y o u re co rd (Lo o p )

Here we will explain how an effect can be applied to the input source of INPUT 1, and the direct

sound and effect sound recorded in stereo on tracks 1 and 2. This is convenient when you wish to

record a vocal with reverb applied, etc. In this case, the signal flow will be as follows.

MIX(L, R)

REC 1-2

Input Mix : Channel 1 (INPUT 1)

EFFECT1(L, R)

BUSS Sw

Fader

Pan

EFFECT2(L, R)

Lev/Bal

EFFECT1

Level

Effect1

EFFECT2

Level

Lev/Bal

Channel 1

Track Mix : Channel 1, 2

Recorder

MIX Sw

Fader

Pan

MASTER OUT(L, R)

EFFECT1

Level

Track 1

EFFECT2

Level

Channel 1

1 . Make sure that the mixer mode is INPUT MIX.

2 . Press channel 1 [CH EDIT(Input/BUSS)].

3 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to get the “IN1 BUSS Sw=” display.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select “PstFade” so that the channel faders will

adjust the recording level.

BUSS Sw (buss switch)

This selects the way in which the signal is sent to the buss selected by Buss Select. If ÒOffÓ is select-

ed, the BUSS Sel, BUSS Level, and BUSS Pan/BUSS Bal parameters will not be available.

Off:

not sent.

PreFade: The signal before passing through the channel fader will be sent to the buss.

PstFade: The signal after passing through the channel fader will be sent to the buss.

5 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒIN1 BUSS SelÓ.

6 . Select the track(s) that you wish to record. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example,

select “1-2” since we want to record on tracks 1 and 2.

BUSS Sel (buss select)

This selects the output destination buss (MIX, 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8). The numerals of the value indicate

the REC buss numbers.

INPUT MIX mode

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

7 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press channel 7 [EFFECT-1(CH EDIT)].

8 . The signal will be sent to the EFFECT buss. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example,

select “PstFade” so that the channel faders will adjust the send level.

1 0 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Using the internal effects

EFFECT1 (Effect 1 switch)

Select how the signal will be sent to the EFFECT1 buss.

Off:

PreFade: The signal from before the channel fader will be sent.

PstFade: The signal that passed through the channel fader will be sent.

Insert: Insert between the equalizer and fader.

The signal will not be sent.

InsertL: Insert into the L side of a stereo effect.

InsertR: Insert into the R side of a stereo effect.

InsertS: Insert the L side and R side of a stereo effect in series.

* If the effect is inserted in another channel, the value will appear as ÒÑÐ,Ó and cannot be selected.

9 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒEFFECT1 Send=Ó.

1 0 . Adjust the send level to effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

EFFECT 1 Send (Effect 1 send level)

Specify the volume level (0Ð127) of the signal that is sent to the EFFECT 1 buss. The default setting

is 100.

1 1 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒEFFECT1 Pan=Ó.

1 2 . Adjust the pan of the signal being input to effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

EFFECT 1 Pan (Effect 1 pan)

For channels on which Channel Link is ÒOff,Ó this sets the panning (L63Ð0ÐR63) of the stereo signal

which is output to the EFFECT 1 buss. ÒL63Ó is far left, and ÒR63Ó is far right.

For channels on which Channel Link is ÒOn,Ó this sets the left/right volume balance (L63Ð0ÐR63)

of the stereo signal from the paired channels which is output to the EFFECT 1 buss.

The default value is Ò0Ó (center).

1 3 . Switch the mixer mode to TRACK MIX. Press [SELECT].

1 4 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to make the display read “TR1 BUSS Sw=”.

1 5 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select “PstFade” so that the channel faders will

adjust the recording level.

BUSS Sw (buss switch)

This selects the way in which the signal is sent to the buss selected by Buss Select. If ÒOffÓ is select-

ed, the BUSS Sel, BUSS Level, and BUSS Pan/BUSS Bal parameters will not be available.

Off:

not sent.

PreFade: The signal before passing through the channel fader will be sent to the buss.

PstFade: The signal after passing through the channel fader will be sent to the buss.

1 6 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒTR1 BUSS SelÓ.

1 7 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select “MIX” so that the signal will be sent from

master out.

BUSS Sel (buss select)

This selects the output destination buss (MIX, 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8). The numerals of the value indicate

the REC buss numbers.

TRACK MIX mode

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

1 0 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Using the internal effects

1 8 . Press [EDIT(SOLO)] several times until the display reads “MST EFF1 RTN to=”.

1 9 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select “1-2” since we will be recording on

tracks 1 and 2.

EFF1 RTN to (Effect 1 return to)

Select the output destination of effect 1. The busses that can be selected will depend on the current

mixer mode.

When in INPUT MIX mode / TRACK MIX mode

MIX: the MIX buss (stereo)

1-2: REC buss 1-2

3-4: REC buss 3-4

5-6: REC buss 5-6

7-8: REC buss 7-8

2 0 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒEFF1 RTN Lev=Ó.

2 1 . Adjust the output level of effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

EFF1 RTN Lev (Effect 1 return level)

Set the output level (0Ð127) of effect 1.

2 2 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒEFF1 RTN Bal=Ó.

2 3 . Adjust the left/right volume balance of effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

EFF1 Bal (Effect 1 balance)

Set the left/right volume balance (L63Ð0ÐR63) of effect 1.

2 4 . Press [EFFECT] several times until the display reads “EFF EFFECT-1 PRM ?”.

2 5 . Press [YES].

2 6 . Select effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select an effect such as A00

RV:LargeHall.

2 7 .. Press [YES].

2 8 . Set the track status of tracks 1 and 2 to REC.

When you begin recording, the direct sound and reverb sound will be recorded.

■ Ap p ly in g a vo co d e r w h ile y o u re co rd (In se rt)

Here we will explain how you can connect an instrument such as a keyboard to INPUT 1 and a mic

to INPUT 2, and record a vocoded sound in stereo onto tracks 1 and 2. In this case the signal flow

will be as follows.

MIX(L, R)

MIX Sw

Level

Fader

Pan

Lev/Bal

MASTER OUT(L, R)

EFFECT1

Level

Track 1

EFFECT2

Level

Channel 1

Effects

MIX Sw

Level

Fader

Pan

EFFECT1

Level

Track 2

EFFECT2

Level

Channel 2

1 0 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Using the internal effects

1 . Make sure that the mixer mode is INPUT➝TRACK.

2 . Connect an instrument such as a keyboard to the INPUT1 jack, and a mic to the INPUT2 jack.

3 . Press channel 1 [CH EDIT].

4 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press channel 7 [EFFECT-1(CH EDIT)].

The display will indicate ÒEFFECT1=Ó.

5 . Insert the effect. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select “InsertL” so that the

sound of the instrument will be inserted into the left channel.

EFFECT1 (Effect 1 switch)

Select how the signal will be sent to the EFFECT1 buss.

Off:

The signal will not be sent.

PreFade: The signal from before the channel fader will be sent.

PstFade: The signal that passed through the channel fader will be sent.

Insert:

Insert between the equalizer and fader.

InsertL: Insert into the L side of a stereo effect.

InsertR: Insert into the R side of a stereo effect.

InsertS: Insert the L side and R side of a stereo effect in series.

* If the effect is inserted in another channel, the value will appear as ÒÑÐ,Ó and cannot be selected.

6 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒEFF1 InsSend=Ó.

7 . Adjust the send level to effect 1 (Vocoder). Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

EFF1 InsSend (Effect 1 insert send level)

Specify the volume level (0Ð127) of the signal that will be inserted into the effect. The default value

is 100.

8 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒEFF1 InsRtn=Ó.

9 . Adjust the return level from effect 1 (Vocoder). Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

EFF1 InsRtn (Effect 1 insert return level)

Specify the volume level (0Ð127) of the signal that is output from the effect. The default value is

100.

1 0 . Press PARAMETER [

] twice.

The display will indicate ÒEQ/EffPreInsÓ.

1 1 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select “On” so that the sound that has passed

through the effect will be recorded.

EQ/EffPreIns (Equalizer/effect pre-insert switch)

Select whether the equalizer and effect will be inserted during recording.

Off: They will not be inserted (same as Ver.1).

On: The signal into which the equalizer and effect have been inserted will be recorded.

1 2 . Press channel 2 [CH EDIT].

1 3 . As in steps 4–11, make settings as when inserting an effect. However in step 5, select

“InsertR” so that the mic sound will be inserted into the right channel.

1 4 . Press [EFFECT] several times until “EFF EFFECT-1 PRM ?” appears.

1 5 . Press [YES].

1 6 . Select effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select an effect such as A84

Vocoder.

1 7 . Press [YES].

1 8 . Set the track status of tracks 1 and 2 to REC.

When you begin recording, the vocoded sound will be recorded.

1 0 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Using the internal effects

■ Ap p ly in g re ve rb w h ile b o u n cin g tra ck s (Lo o p )

Here we will explain the settings for applying an effect to previously-recorded tracks and record-

ing the sound to another track. For example, this will be convenient when you wish to apply

reverb to an entire song and mix it down.

In this example we will apply reverb to tracks 1Ð6 and bounce them to tracks 7 and 8. In this case,

the signal flow will be as follows.

MIX(L, R)

EFFECT1(L, R)

EFFECT2(L, R)

Channel 1–6

Recorder

MIX Sw

Fader

Track 1

Pan

MASTER OUT(L, R)

EFFECT1

Level

Lev/Bal

Effect1

EFFECT2

Level

Channel 1

Channel 7, 8

Recorder

MIX Sw

Fader

Pan

EFFECT1

Level

Track 7

EFFECT2

Level

Channel 7

1 . Make sure that the mixer mode is INPUT➝TRACK.

2 . Press channel 1 [CH EDIT(Input/BUSS)].

3 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to make the display read “CH1 MIX Sw=”.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select “PstFade” so that the channel faders will

adjust the recording level.

MIX Sw (mix switch)

This selects how the signal will be sent to the MIX buss. If ÒOffÓ is selected, the MIX Level and MIX

Pan/MIX Bal parameters will not be available.

Off:

not sent.

PreFade: The signal before passing through the channel fader will be sent to the MIX buss.

PstFade: The signal after passing through the channel fader will be sent to the MIX buss.

5 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press channel 7 [EFFECT-1(CH EDIT)].

6 . Send the signal to the EFFECT buss. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select

“PstFade” so that the channel faders will adjust the send levels.

EFFECT1 (Effect 1 switch)

Select how the signal will be sent to the EFFECT1 buss.

Off:

The signal will not be sent.

PreFade: The signal from before the channel fader will be sent.

PstFade: The signal that passed through the channel fader will be sent.

Insert:

Insert between the equalizer and fader.

InsertL: Insert into the L side of a stereo effect.

InsertR: Insert into the R side of a stereo effect.

InsertS: Insert the L side and R side of a stereo effect in series.

* If the effect is inserted in another channel, the value will appear as ÒÑÐ,Ó and cannot be selected.

7 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒCH1 EFFECT1 Send=Ó.

8 . Adjust the send level to effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

1 0 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Using the internal effects

EFFECT 1 Send (Effect 1 send level)

Specify the volume level (0Ð127) of the signal that is sent to the EFFECT 1 buss. The default setting

is 100.

9 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒCH1 EFFECT1 Pan=Ó.

1 0 . Adjust the panning of the signal that will be input to effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

EFFECT 1 Pan (Effect 1 pan)

For channels on which Channel Link is ÒOff,Ó this sets the panning (L63Ð0ÐR63) of the stereo signal

which is output to the EFFECT 1 buss. ÒL63Ó is far left, and ÒR63Ó is far right.

For channels on which Channel Link is ÒOn,Ó this sets the left/right volume balance (L63Ð0ÐR63)

of the stereo signal from the paired channels which is output to the EFFECT 1 buss.

The default value is Ò0Ó (center).

1 1 . Repeat steps 2–10 to make settings for channels 2–6 in the same way.

1 2 . Press channel 7 [CH EDIT].

1 3 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press channel 1 [EFFECT-1(Input/BUSS)].

1 4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select “MIX-L” so that the signal of the MIX bus

will be recorded.

Input (input select)

This selects the input source of each channel. If Channel Link is on, stereo sources can be selected.

When Channel Link is off: INPUT 1Ð4, DIGITAL-L, DIGITAL-R, MIX-L, MIX-R, AUX-A,

AUX-B

When Channel Link is on: INPUT-12, INPUT 34, DIGITAL, MIX, AUX-AB

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

1 5 . Press channel 8 [CH EDIT].

1 6 . Repeat steps 13, 14 to make settings for channel 8 in the same way. However in step 16,

select “MIX-R” so that the R side of the MIX buss will be recorded.

1 7 . Press [EDIT(SOLO)] several times until “MST EFF1 RTN to=” appears.

1 8 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select “MIX”.

EFF1 RTN to (Effect 1 return to)

Select the output destination of effect 1. The busses that can be selected will depend on the current

mixer mode.

When in INPUT➝TRACK mode

MIX: the MIX buss (stereo)

AUX: the AUX buss (stereo)

1 9 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒEFF1 RTN Lev=Ó.

2 0 . Adjust the output level of effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

EFF1 RTN Lev (Effect 1 return level)

Set the output level (0Ð127) of effect 1.

1 0 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 8 Using the internal effects

2 1 . Press PARAMETER [

]. The display will indicate “EFF1 RTN Bal=”.

2 2 .. Adjust the left/right volume balance of effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

EFF1 Bal (Effect 1 balance)

Set the left/right volume balance (L63Ð0ÐR63) of effect 1.

2 3 . Press [EFFECT] several times until the display reads “EFF EFFECT-1 PRM ?”.

2 4 .. Press [YES].

2 5 . Select effect 1. Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select an effect such as A00

RV:LargeHall.

2 6 . Press [YES].

2 7 . Set the track status of tracks 7 and 8 to REC.

When you begin recording, the direct sound and reverb sound will be recorded.

If th e e ffe ct d o e s n o t so u n d a s y o u e x p e ct

¥ Is a signal being sent to the EFFECT buss?

¥ Is the send level to the effect raised?

¥ Is the return level from the effect raised?

¥ Is the return from the effect set correctly?

¥ Is the effect level raised?

¥ Is the direct level raised?

¥ Are the left/right channels inserted correctly?

¥ Is the send level to the effect raised for each channel?

¥ Is the master send level to the effect raised?

1 0 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ch a p te r 9 O th e r co n ve n ie n t fu n ctio n s

* When transmitting a Note message as the metronome, set

So u n d in g th e m e tro n o m e

the MIDI Thru switch to ÒOut.Ó You will also need to

make settings for the Metronome Channel, Accent Note,

Accent Velocity, Normal Note, and Normal Velocity

(p.110).

No matter how accurately one tries to play, listening to the

recording play back sometimes reveals inaccuracies in

rhythm or tempo. The VS-880 provides a metronome (click)

that can be sounded at a specified tempo. By listening to the

metronome as you play your instrument, you will be able to

record a more accurate performance.

MetroLevel (Metronome level)

Adjust the volume level (0Ð127) of the metronome sound.

When using the metronome, you will need to set the tempo

and time signature. For a newly created song, the time sig-

nature is 4/4 and the tempo is 120 quarter notes per minute.

By making the appropriate settings, you can change this

tempo/time signature or make the tempo change mid-way

through the song.

This tempo setting will also be the basis for the measure

number and beat number that appears in the display. If you

first set the tempo for a song before you start recording, and

then use the metronome as you record, you will be able to

view and move the current time location as measures and

beats. Also, you will be able to use measure numbers to

specify the area for song editing, so that you can edit the

song in a more musical way.

MetroMd (Metronome mode)

Specify how the metronome will sound.

RecOnly:

The metronome will sound only during

recording.

Rec&Play:

The metronome will sound during both

recording and playback.

4 . This completes the metronome settings. Press [PLAY

(DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

■ Usin g a n e x te rn a l MIDI so u n d

so u rce to p la y th e m e tro n o m e

A MIDI sound source can be used to play the metronome

with a sound of your choosing.

< Using the metronome during recording >

1 . Use a MIDI cable to connect the VS-880 and your MIDI

The metronome will begin sounding when recording or

playback begins. However you may sometimes wish to

hear a count-in on the metronome to help you catch the

tempo before recording begins. In such cases, you can set

aside the first few measures of the recording to be only for

the count-in, and not record on those measures.

sound source as follows.

(

)

MIDI

DIGITAL 5,6 FOOT

PHONES

SWITCH

OUT THRU

The metronome sound is only for the purpose of helping

you keep your playing in time, and will not be recorded

with the sound of your instrument.

OUT

M I D I I N

HereÕs how to specify how the metronome will sound.

1 . Press [SYSTEM]. If a message with a question mark

such as “SYS System PRM?” does not appear, press

[SYSTEM] once again.

2 . Make sure that the MIDI OUT/THRU connector is set

for use as a MIDI OUT connector.

2 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to get the “SYS

With the factory settings, MIDI OUT is selected.

Press [SYSTEM], select ÒSYS MIDI PRM?Ó, select ÒSYS

MID: MIDIThr=Ó, and make sure that it is set to ÒOut.Ó

System PRM?” display, and press [YES].

3 . Use PARAMETER [ ][ ] to access the following

parameters, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to set each

parameter.

3 . Make settings so that the metronome will sound using

MIDI. Press [SYSTEM], select “SYS System PRM?”,

and set the following parameters.

MetroOUT (Metronome output)

When you wish to use a metronome to keep time as you

record, the metronome sound (click) can be output from the

VS-880. The timing of the metronome sound will depend on

the tempo map settings (p.89).

MetroOUT: Set this to ÒMIDI.Ó If this is not set to

ÒMIDI,Ó the parameters of the follow-

ing step can not be selected.

MetroMd:

If you want the metronome to sound

only during recording, select ÒRec

Only.Ó If you want it to sound during

both recording and playback, select

ÒRec&Play.Ó

Off:

The metronome sound will not be output.

INT: The metronome sound will be output from the

MASTER OUT jacks.

MIDI: A Note message will be transmitted from MIDI

OUT connector as the metronome. Select this

when you wish to play the metronome using a

sound of an external MIDI sound source.

1 0 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Other convenient functions

GPI:

The foot switch will have the same function

as the [PREVIOUS]. Each time you press the

foot switch, you will move to the previous

Mark point.

A GPI trigger signal received from the

FOOT SWITCH jack will control song play-

back/stop.

4 . Make settings for the MIDI messages that will produce

the metronome sound. Press [SYSTEM], select “SYS

MIDI PRM?”, and set the following parameters.

MetroCh:

Select the MIDI channel on which the

metronome note messages will be

transmitted. Set this to match the

MIDI receive channel of your MIDI

sound source.

< About GPI >

Acc.Note:

Select the note number (C_0ÐG_9) for

the downbeat of the metronome. If

you are playing a drum set, this will

select the percussion instrument.

Specify the velocity (1Ð127) of the

metronome downbeat.

Select the note number (C_0ÐG_9) for

the upbeats of the metronome. If you

are playing a drum set, this will select

the percussion instrument.

ÒGPIÓ stands for ÒGeneral Purpose Interface.Ó This is a

control jack provided on professional and consumer video

devices such as video editors and title superimposers. By

connecting this control jack to the foot switch jack of the

VS-880 and setting the Foot Switch Assign to ÒGPI,Ó the

connected device will be able to playback/stop the VS-

880.

Acc.Velo:

Nrm.Note:

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

You will return to Play condition.

Nrm.Velo:

Specify the velocity (1Ð127) of the

upbeats of the metronome.

5 . This completes metronome settings. Press [PLAY (DIS-

Sto p p in g a u to m a tica lly

(Ma rk e r sto p )

PLAY)] to return to Play condition.

You can cause song playback to stop automatically at a

mark point.

Usin g a fo o t sw itch to p la y-

b a ck / sto p

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System PRM

?” appears.

A foot switch connected to the FOOT SWITCH jack can be

used instead of the [PLAY] button. This is convenient when

both hands are occupied, such as when playing the guitar

on stage.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

Marker Stop=” appears.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until the display indi-

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select

cates “SYS System PRM ?”.

“On”.

2 . Press [YES].

Marker Stop

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

Turn this ÒOnÓ when you want song playback to automati-

Foot Sw=” appears.

cally halt at time locations where a Mark point exists.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

“Play/Stop”.

You will return to Play condition.

FootSw (Foot switch assign)

This sets the function of the foot switch connected to the

FOOT SWITCH jack.

Play/Stop:

Record:

The song will alternately playback and stop

each time the foot switch is pressed.

The foot switch will have the same function

as the [REC]. Use this to switch between

recording and playback during manual

punch-in recording.

TapMarker: The foot switch will have the same function

as the [TAP]. A Mark point will be placed at

the time location where you press the foot

switch.

The foot switch will have the same function

as the [NEXT]. Each time you press the foot

switch, you will move to the next Mark

point.

1 1 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Other convenient functions

VariPitch

Ch a n g in g th e p itch d u rin g

p la y b a ck (Va ri-p itch )

This sets the playback pitch when the Vari-pitch function is

used. The value is displayed as a sample rate. Make vari-

pitch settings while actually listening to the song playback.

When recording an ensemble, all the instruments normally

tune to an instrument such as an acoustic piano whose tun-

ing cannot easily be changed. However it is sometimes nec-

essary to record (overdub) an acoustic piano onto an exist-

ing recording. In this case if the pitch of the recording is dif-

ferent than the pitch of the acoustic piano, something must

be done about it.

* Although the audible result of Vari-pitch is that the pitch

is being changed, in actuality, the sample rate is being

modified. This means that you cannot use Vari-pitch

while recording digital audio signals to a digital audio

device. If this is set to other than the standard pitch, digi-

tal recording will not be possible.

In such cases, use the Vari-pitch function. Vari-pitch

changes the playback speed of the recorder. When the play-

back speed changes, the pitch of the playback will also

change. In this way, by changing the playback speed, you

can make the pitch of the recording match the pitch of the

instrument to be newly recorded. Vari-pitch can be used not

only to compensate for pitch differences, but also creatively

to produce special effects.

Liste n in g o n ly to a sp e cific

ch a n n e l (So lo )

When making equalizer adjustments or during mixdown, it

is often convenient to be able to monitor just the sound of a

specific channel. Although it would be possible to individu-

ally mute each of the channels that you didnÕt want to hear,

this is inconvenient. In such cases, you can use the Solo

function to monitor only a specific channel and mute all the

other channels.

If you wish to use the Vari-pitch function, use the following

procedure to set the pitch.

* The audible result of Vari-pitch is a change in playback

speed, but in actuality the sample rate is being modified.

This means that when recording a digital signal into the

VS-880 or when recording the digital output of the VS-880

into another device, you must return Vari-pitch to the

normal pitch. Recording will not be possible with settings

other than normal pitch.

To use the Solo function, use the following procedure.

1 . On the channel that you wish to monitor, press [STA-

TUS] to select the signal that you wish to monitor; either

the input source or the track.

2 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SOLO (EDIT)] in the

master section.

1 . Press [VARI PITCH] to make the button indicator light.

When the button indicator is lit, the playback pitch will

change in accordance with the Vari-pitch setting. Since

Vari-pitch is initially set to normal pitch, the playback

pitch will not change yet.

The display will briefly indicate ÒSOLO Mode ON,Ó

indicating that the Solo function is on. The display in

the CONDITION field will alternate between the name

of the current condition and Òsol,Ó also indicating that

the Solo function is on.

2 . To modify the Vari-pitch setting, hold down [SHIFT] and

press [VARI PITCH].

3 . Press [STATUS] for the channel that you wish to moni-

tor, and only that channel will be monitored.

The display will indicate the current Vari-pitch setting

(sample rate). While playing back the song to check the

actual pitch, use the TIME/VALUE dial to modify the

setting.

The STATUS indicator will light green if you are moni-

toring the recorder, or blink orange if you are monitor-

ing the input source. At this time you can make adjust-

ments to the channel fader, pan, and equalizer.

Monitor and Mute will alternate each time you press

[STATUS], allowing you to monitor two or more chan-

nels. Channels which were muted before the Solo func-

tion was turned on cannot be monitored even if their

[STATUS] button is pressed. Also, when you are moni-

toring just one channel, pressing the [STATUS] button

of that channel will let you monitor all channels.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

4 . To turn off the Solo function, hold down [SHIFT] and

press the [SOLO (EDIT)] button of the master section

once again.

3 . When you finish making settings, press [PLAY (DIS-

PLAY)] to return to Play condition.

The display will briefly indicate ÒEXIT SOLO Mode,Ó

and the Solo function will be turned off.

You can also return to Play condition by holding down

[SHIFT] and pressing [VARI PITCH] once again.

* If you begin punch-in recording when Solo is on, Solo

will automatically be turned off.

4 . Now when you press [VARI PITCH] to make the indica-

tor light, playback will occur at the specified pitch.

1 1 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Other convenient functions

Sim u lta n e o u sly a d ju stin g a

ste re o so u rce (Ch a n n e l Lin k )

Un d o in g a re co rd in g o r

e d itin g o p e ra tio n

When recording or playing back a stereo source, normal

mixer operation requires you to control the left and right

channels separately. This makes it inconvenient to control

the left/right volume balance or equalizer settings. In such

cases, turn on the Channel Link function so that a pair of

channels can be controlled in stereo.

When Channel Link is on, odd- and even-numbered adja-

cent channels will paired as shown below, and the settings

of each odd-numbered channel will be the same as the set-

tings of the corresponding even-numbered channel. When

the settings of one channel are modified, the settings of the

paired channel will change in the same way.

Channel 1: stereo a (left)

While using the VS-880, there may be times when a record-

ing does not proceed as you wish, or when you would like

to re-do an operation. In such cases, use the Undo function.

The Undo function cancels the operation that you have per-

formed, and returns the data to its previous condition. To

cancel the last-performed Undo operation, you can use the

Redo function.

When using the Undo function, you will specify the number

of previous steps that will be undone. For example, suppose

that you use punch-in recording to perform five consecutive

re-recordings of the same location. If you later decide to

return to the condition of the second recording (step 2), you

would set the Undo function to return to the condition of

three steps earlier (Undo Level 3).

Channel 2: stereo a (right)

Channel 3: stereo b (left)

Channel 4: stereo b (right)

Channel 5: stereo c (left)

Channel 6: stereo c (right)

Channel 7: stereo d (left)

Channel 8: stereo d (right)

recording 5

recording 4

recording 3

The PAN knob and faders of each channel will function as

follows.

recording 2

recording 1

Undo level 3

Odd-numbered channel faders:

will adjust the volume level of the stereo signal output

to the MIX buss or the REC buss.

Odd-numbered channel PAN knobs:

will adjust the left/right volume balance of the stereo

signal output to the MIX buss or the REC buss.

Even-numbered channel faders:

will adjust the volume level of the stereo signal output

to the AUX buss (A, B).

Even-numbered channel PAN knobs:

will adjust the left/right volume balance of the stereo

signal output to the AUX buss (A, B).

Time

If, after executing the Undo operation, you decide to return

to the condition of step 5, execute the Redo operation.

However if you once again record (step 3Õ) after returning

to the condition of recording number 2, the recordings 3Ð5

that were canceled by the Undo operation will be lost. This

means that if after step 3Õ you use the Undo operation to

return to the previous step, you will return to the condition

of step 2.

To turn on Channel Link, use the following procedure.

1 . Press [CH EDIT] for one of the channels for which you

■ Re co rd in g / e d itin g o p e ra tio n s

want to turn on Channel Link.

w h ich ca n b e u n d o n e (Un d o )

2 . Press PARAMETER [

] to get the “Channel Link=”

Recording or editing operations performed after creating a

song are recorded together with the song data as its opera-

tion history, and the data itself is also preserved without

being erased. For example, suppose that you perform 10

recording operations on song 1 and then create song 2. The

operation history of song 2 is newly recorded from the time

when song 2 was created. If you subsequently select song 1

again, the history of the 10 previous recording operations

will still be there.

display, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to turn it “On.” In

the bar display, the channels for which Channel Link

was turned on will blink.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

The Undo function refers to the operation history of the cur-

rently selected song, and restores the song to the condition

in which it was the specified number of operations ago. In

the case of song 1 in this example, you will be able to cancel

the 10 recording operations that were performed. A maxi-

mum of 999 levels of operation history is recorded for each

song.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

3 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

1 1 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 9 Other convenient functions

■ Ca n ce lin g th e la st-p e rfo rm e d

W h e n th e d isk h a s little

Un d o (Re d o )

re m a in in g sp a ce

The Redo function can be executed if the UNDO indicator is

lit. If the song data is saved, for example by your doing

STORE Current or selecting another song, the UNDO indi-

cator will go out and the Undo function will no longer be

available.

■ De le ting only unne e d e d p e rfor-

m a nce d a ta (Song O p tim ize )

When operations such as overdubbing and punch-in

recording are repeated, the old data will remain in the disk

drive. In some cases, significant amounts of memory can be

occupied by this unnecessary data, decreasing the available

space on the current drive, and shortening the length of

time available for recording.

1 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [UNDO]. When Redo is

executed, the UNDO indicator will go dark.

■ Ca n ce lin g o n ly th e la st-p e r-

The Optimize operation erases this unnecessary data from

the disk drive, increasing the available disk space.

fo rm e d o p e ra tio n

If you most frequently use the Undo function to undo just

the previously performed recording/editing operation (i.e.,

undo level 1), you may prefer not to be bothered with the

messages that appear when the [UNDO] button is pressed.

In this case, make the following settings so that just the pre-

vious operation will be undone immediately when the

[UNDO] button is pressed.

1 . Press [SONG], and select “SNG Song Optimize?”,

press [YES].

2 . The display will ask “SongOptimize Ok?”, so press

[YES].

3 . The display will ask “Optimize Sure ?”, so press [YES]

and the Optimize operation will be executed.

1 . Press [SYSTEM]. If a message with a question mark

such as “SYS System PRM?” does not appear, press

[SYSTEM] once again.

Depending on the situation, an appreciable length of

time will be required for the Optimize operation to be

completed. This is not a malfunction. Do not turn the

power off until the Optimize operation is completed.

2 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to get the “SYS

System PRM?” message, and press [YES].

3 . Use PARAMETER [ ][ ] to get the “SYS UNDO

■ De le tin g o n e so n g o f p e rfo r-

m a n ce d a ta (So n g Era se )

This erases song data from the current drive.

MESSAGE=,” and use the TIME/VALUE dial to set this

“Off.”

4 . When the setting has been made, press [PLAY (DIS-

1 . Press [SONG], select “SNG Song Erase?,” and press

PLAY)] to return to Play condition.

[YES].

UNDO MSG (Undo message)

2 . The names of the songs stored on the current drive will

appear. Select the song that you wish to erase, and

execute.

If, when [UNDO] is pressed, you want the previous opera-

tion to be undone immediately without a confirmation mes-

sage appearing, set this ÒOff.Ó Normally you should set this

ÒOn.Ó

An asterisk Ò✱Ó will appear at the beginning of the cur-

rently selected song. If the currently selected song has

been erased, the lowest-numbered song in the current

drive will be selected.

1 1 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ch a p te r 1 0 O ve ra ll se ttin g s a n d sta tu s ch e ck in g

●Post Level

If th e d isp la y a re a is d ifficu lt

The volume of each channel after passing through the

channel faders will be displayed. The AUX and MASTER

fields indicate the respective volume levels of the signal

after passing through the AUX knob and the master

to re a d (Co n tra st)

Depending on the location where the VS-880 is placed, the

display may sometimes be difficult to read. In such cases,

fader.

use the following procedure to adjust the display contrast

(0Ð15).

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

Adjustment procedure 1

1 . Press [SYSTEM]. If a message with a question mark

such as “SYS System PRM?” does not appear, press

[SYSTEM] once again.

2 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to get the “SYS

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

System PRM?” display, and press [YES].

3 . Use PARAMETER [ ][ ] to get the “SYS LCD

Contrast=” display and then use the TIME/VALUE dial

to adjust the contrast.

●Play List

The way in which sound is recorded in the various tracks

before and after the current time will be displayed.

4 . When you finish making the setting, press [PLAY (DIS-

PLAY)] to return to Play condition.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

Adjustment procedure 2

1 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] once. Then hold down [PLAY

(DISPLAY)] and rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to adjust

the contrast. The display will show the current setting.

2 . When you finish making the setting, release [PLAY

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

(DISPLAY)].

●Fader/Pan

Sw itch in g th e co n te n ts o f

th e d isp la y (Ba r Disp la y )

In Play condition, you can hold down [SHIFT] and press

[DISPLAY (PLAY)] to switch the contents of the bar display.

In Edit condition, the contents of the display will change

depending on the selected parameter or operation.

The settings of the master fader and the PAN knob and

fader of each channel will be displayed. If the displayed

location of the PAN knobs or faders is different than the

actual location (as when the mixer mode has been

switched), the current location of the PAN knob or fader

will blink.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

●Pre Level

The volume of each channel before passing through the

channel faders will be displayed. The AUX and MASTER

fields indicate the respective volume levels of the signal

after passing through the AUX knob and the master

fader.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

1 1 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Overall settings and status checking

8 . Press [YES].

Disp la y in g m e a su re s/ b e a ts

9 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

If both the metronome is being used and MIDI clock mes-

sages are being transmitted, the measure and beat of the

song can be displayed in the MEASURE field and BEAT

field of the display screen. When you are running in syn-

chronization with an external device or recording a song

along with a previously-created tempo map, this allows you

to operate the VS-880 just as though you were operating a

MIDI sequencer.

Syn:Gen=” appears.

1 0 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select

either “MIDIClk” or “SyncTr”.

Gen (Sync generator)

This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. When using a

synchronization signal from the VS-880 to synchronize

external MIDI devices, set this to the desired type of syn-

chronization signal.

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

Off:

Synchronization signals will not be transmit-

ted.

MIDI Time Code will be transmitted.

MTC:

MIDIClk: MIDI Clock will be transmitted.

SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track

will be transmitted.

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

1 1 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

You will return to Play condition.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System PRM

?” appears.

2 . Press [YES].

Ch e ck in g th e size o f a

re co rd e d p e rfo rm a n ce

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

MetroOut=” appears.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. Here you can select

You can see the Song Name, Song Number, Sample Rate,

Recording Mode, and the actual used capacity of the current

song by the following operation.

either “INT” or “MIDI.”

MetroOut (Metronome output)

1 . Stop the song playback. When the song is performed,

When you wish to use a metronome to keep time as you

record, the metronome sound (click) can be output from the

VS-880. The timing of the metronome sound will depend on

the tempo map settings (p.90).

press [STOP].

2 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

3 . Hold down [SHIFT] and press [SONG]. The display will

Off:

The metronome sound will not be output.

indicate Song Information briefly.

INT: The metronome sound will be output from the

MASTER OUT jacks.

MIDI: A Note message will be transmitted from MIDI

OUT connector as the metronome. Select this

when you wish to play the metronome using a

sound of an external MIDI sound source.

Song Number

Song Name

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

* When transmitting a Note message as the metronome, set

the MIDI Thru switch (p.109) to ÒOut.Ó You will also need

to make settings for the Metronome Channel, Accent

Note, Accent Velocity, Normal Note, and Normal

Velocity (p.110).

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

5 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS

Recording Mode

Song Capacity

Sample Rate

MeasureDisp=” appears.

6 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select

“Auto”.

* The actual used capacity of the song is displayed as 1 MB

= 1,000,000 bytes. The displayed value is the approximate

standard value.

MeasureDsp (Measure Display)

Always: Always display the MEASURE field and

BEAT field.

Auto:

Do not display the MEASURE field and

BEAT field when not necessary.

7 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS Sync/Tempo

?” appears.

1 1 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 10 Overall settings and status checking

Re sto rin g th e m ix e r se ttin g s

to th e in itia l sta te

If th e re is n o in te rn a l h a rd

d isk

After you have made repeated tries at mixing, you can

restore the various condition settings of Channel edit,

Master Block edit and System edit to the initial state in

which they were when the song was created.

However the volume level and pan of each channel and the

volume level of the master section will be according to the

positions of the pan knobs and fader on the top panel.

Even if there is no internal hard disk, the VS-880 can be

used by connecting only an external drive such as a Zip

drive to the SCSI connector. In this case, approximately 30

seconds extra time will be required for the system to start

up after the power is turned on, while the system checks to

see whether an internal hard disk is connected. You can

avoid having to wait this extra time by making settings so

that an IDE drive is not used.

* Even if you restore the mixer settings to their initial state,

the song, scene, tempo map and sync track data will not

be lost. Furthermore, the IDE drive, SCSI self ID, scene,

Shift Lock, and Numerics Type settings will not return to

their default state.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS DISK PRM ?”

appears.

2 . Press [YES].

The display will indicate ÒSYS DSK:IDE Drv=Ó.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System PRM

3 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial.

?” is displayed.

IDE Drv (IDE drive)

2 . Press [YES].

On: The internal hard disk will be used.

Off: The internal hard disk will not be used.

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until “SYS Init

Mix/SysPRM ?” is displayed.

4 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

4 . Press [YES].

You will return to Play condition.

A message will ask you to confirm that you really want

to restore the mixer to the initial settings.

5 . Press [YES]. To cancel the operation press [NO].

When the mixer settings return to the initial state, you

will be in Play condition.

1 1 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ch a p te r 1 1 Ta k in g a d va n ta g e o f th e VS-8 8 0 (id e a s a n d e x a m p le s)

Along with the functions explained in earlier chapters, this chapter explains some actual ways in

which the VS-880 can be used effectively.

Re co rd in g m u ltip le so u rce s to o n e tra ck

Here we will explain how the sources input to INPUT 1Ð3 can be recorded on track 1. This is conve-

nient, for example, when you wish to put up a separate mic for hi-hat, snare and cymbal and record

the sound of the entire drum set onto a single track. In this case, the signal flow will be as follows.

MIX(L, R)

Input Mix : Channel 1–3 (INPUT 1–3)

REC 1-2

BUSS Sw

Fader

Pan

EFFECT1

Level

EFFECT2

Level

Channel 1

Track Mix : Channel 1

Recorder

MIX Sw

Fader

Pan

MASTER OUT(L, R)

EFFECT1

Level

Track 1

EFFECT2

Level

Channel 1

1 . Make sure that the mixer mode is INPUT MIX.

2 . Press channel 1 [CH EDIT(Input/BUSS)].

3 . Use PARAMETER [

][

] to make the display read “IN1 BUSS Sw=”.

4 . Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial. For this example, select “PstFade” so that the channel faders will

adjust the recording level.

BUSS Sw (buss switch)

This selects the way in which the signal is sent to the buss selected by Buss Select. If ÒOffÓ is select-

ed, the BUSS Sel, BUSS Level, and BUSS Pan/BUSS Bal parameters will not be available.

Off:

not sent.

PreFade: The signal before passing through the channel fader will be sent to the buss.

PstFade: The signal after passing through the channel fader will be sent to the buss.

5 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒIN1 BUSS SelÓ.

6 . Select the track(s) on which you wish to record. Here we want to record on track 1, so select

“1-2”.

BUSS Sel (buss select)

This selects the output destination buss (MIX, 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8). The numerals of the value indicate

the REC buss numbers.

INPUT MIX mode

CONDITION MARKER#

TIME

INPUT TRACK

AUX MASTER

1 1 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 11 Taking advantage of the VS-880 (ideas and examples)

St (Start point):

Specify the starting time

of the copy source data.

7 . Since we are recording on track 1, turn the pan knob of

channel 1 fully toward the L position.

For V-track

ÒLOC 1.Ó

specify

8 . As in steps 2–8, make the same settings for channels 2

and 3.

Frm (From point): Specify the time of the

copy source data which

will be copied to the To

Point. For V-track 1, speci-

fy ÒLOC 1Ó just as you did

for the Start Point.

9 . Set the track status of track 1 to REC.

When you begin recording, the sources being input to

INPUT 1Ð3 will be recorded together onto track 1.

End (End point): Specify the ending time of

the copy source data. For

V-track 1, specify ÒLOC

2.Ó

Co lle ctin g ju st th e se ctio n s

th a t y o u lik e

After listening to the recordings on each V-track, suppose

that you wanted to use the intro from V-track 1 and the

break from V-track 2, etc. In such cases, copy the desired

sections to a different V-track to assemble the sections into a

single V-track.

To (To point):

Specify the base time of

the copy destination. For

V-track 1, specify ÒLOC 1Ó

just as you did for the

Start Point.

The following procedure shows an example in which sec-

tions recorded on V-tracks 1, 2, and 3 of track 1 are assem-

bled by copying them onto V-track 4.

Copy Time:

Specify the number of

copies (1Ð99). In this

example, specify Ò1.Ó

6 . As you repeatedly press PARAMETER [

], a confir-

V-track 1

V-track 2

V-track 3

V-track 4

mation message will appear at the end. Press [YES] to

execute the copy.

When the copy has been completed, you will return to

Play condition.

7 . Using the same procedure as steps 2–6, copy the

desired areas of V-tracks 2 and 3 to V-track 4. When

you have finished copying, select V-track 4 and check

the playback of the assembled data.

LOC 1 LOC 2 LOC 3 LOC 4 LOC 5 Time

1 . Switch V-tracks, and register Locate points for the times

at which you wish to copy data from them (p.14). For

this example, use LOC 1–5.

2 . Prepare V-track 1 of track 1 for playback.

3 . Press [TRACK], use PARAMETER [

][

] to get

the “TRK Track Copy?” display, and press [YES]. The

display will allow you to select the copy source track,

and copy destination track and V-track.

4 . Specify the copy source and copy destination track.

Press [SEL (EDIT)] of track 1, and V-track 1 of track 1

will be selected as the copy source. Next, press CUR-

SOR [ ] to make the copy destination field blink,

press [SEL (EDIT)] of track 1, and use the

TIME/VALUE dial to select V-track 4 as the copy desti-

nation.

5 . As you repeatedly press PARAMETER [

], the copy

setting items will be displayed consecutively. For these

items, use [LOC 1/5]–[LOC 4/8] to make settings.

1 1 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 11 Taking advantage of the VS-880 (ideas and examples)

< If noise between segments is obtrusive >

Co p y in g a n 8 -tra ck MTR

In the seams or breaks that occur when recording is begun

or ended or when a phrase is copied, obtrusive noise may

occur. The VS-880 fades-in and fades-out these breaks so

that this noise will not be heard. If objectionable noise

occurs, you can adjust the length of the fade-in and fade-

out.

p e rfo rm a n ce to th e VS-8 8 0

If you wish to re-record a recording of more than 4 channels

from another MTR to the VS-880, it will not be possible to

record all tracks at once. This means that in some cases, the

recorded data will become skewed in time. This section

explains how to correct the skew that may occur in such

cases.

The VS-880 can record up to 4 track simultaneously. This

means that, for example, if you wish to record from an 8-

track MTR onto the VS-880, you will have to record in two

passes of 4 channels each. If your MTR implements MTC

(MIDI Time Code) or MMC (MIDI Machine Control), the

MTR and the VS-880 can be synchronized for recording so

that the timing of the two passes is identical. However if

your MTR cannot be synchronized with the VS-880, the tim-

* It is not possible to set the fade-in/fade-out time to 0.

Thus in some cases, such as if you copy a sustained

sound such as strings and use it elsewhere, the break

may be even more noticeable than if there had been no

fade.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS System

PRM ?” appears.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] several times until

ing at which recording begins will be slightly different.

In such cases, you should record a sound on all tracks

which will act as a marker before re-recording the perfor-

mance to the VS-880. The marker sound should be one that

it is easy to cue to, such as a clock striking the hour. After

recording all the data to the VS-880, you can slide the data

of the tracks so that the marker sounds are precisely

aligned, thus correcting any time deviation that the tracks

may have.

“FadeLength” appears.

4 . Specify the fade-in/fade-out time. Rotate the

TIME/VALUE dial.

FadeLength (Fade length)

When recording is begun or ended, unpleasant noise may

occur. So that this noise is not heard when the song is

played back, the VS-880 fades the start and end of the

recording in and out. This parameter sets the fade in/out

time (2, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 ms).

Here, we will explain in broad outline the procedure for re-

recording 8 tracks from an MTR to the VS-880. For details

on each step, refer to the relevant pages given.

* The Fade Length that was specified on a VS-880 Ver.1

will be modified as follows when the system is expand-

ed. Reset the value as necessary.

M a r k e r s o u n d

Ver.1

V-XPANDED

T r a c k

5 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

You will return to Play condition.

T r a c k

1 1 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 11 Taking advantage of the VS-880 (ideas and examples)

INPUT➝TRACK mode

1 . Re-record the playback of tracks 1–4 from the MTR to

tracks 1–4 of the VS-880. Then register the time at

which the marker sound appears as locate point 1.

“Storing a time location” (p.57)

MIDI channel

Mixer channel

“Finding a desired location (Preview)” (p.76)

2 . Re-record the playback of tracks 5–8 from the MTR to

tracks 5–8 of the VS-880. In the same way for this data

as well, register the time at which the marker sound

appears as locate point 2.

master

3 . If there is a difference in timing between locate points 1

and 2, move one of the sets of tracks forward or back-

ward so that both marker sounds will sound simultane-

ously.

INPUT MIX mode / TRACK MIX mode

MIDI channel

Mixer channel

track channel 1

track channel 2

track channel 3

track channel 4

track channel 5

track channel 6

track channel 7

track channel 8

input channel 1

input channel 2

input channel 3

input channel 4

input channel 5

input channel 6

master

For example if you wish to move tracks 5Ð8 to the tim-

ing of tracks 1Ð4, select tracks 5Ð8 as move source, and

select the same tracks as the move destination. Then set

ÒStÓ to locate point 2, ÒEndÓ as the end of the playback

data, ÒFrmÓ as locate point 2, ÒToÓ as locate point 1,

and then execute the move operation.

“Modifying the organization of the performance (Move)”

(p.79)

4 . Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)] to return to Play condition.

Playback the song, and check that the tracks are all

aligned correctly.

Co n tro llin g th e m ix e r fro m a

MIDI se q u e n ce r

Controller numbers correspond to the channel parameters

as follows.

Controller numbers

Mixer parameters

EQ L Gain

EQ L Freq.

EQ M Gain

EQ M Freq.

EQ M Q

EQ H Gain

EQ H Freq.

MIX Send Level

MIX Send Pan/Bal

AUX Send Level

AUX Send Pan/Bal

EFF1 SND Level

EFF1 SND Balance

EFF2 SND Level

EFF2 SND Balance

TRACK STATUS

The VS-880 can transmit mixer settings and operations as

MIDI messages. If VS-880 mixer settings and operations

during song playback are recorded as MIDI song data to a

MIDI sequencer, the song can later be played back to auto-

matically control the VS-880Õs mixer from the MIDI

sequencer. This type of control is called ÒCompu-mix.Ó

The mixer can be controlled using Control Change mes-

sages or System Exclusive messages.

Here, we will explain the general process for when using

control change messages. For details refer to the appropri-

ate pages.

< When using exclusive messages >

When performing a compu-mix, you should normally use

control change messages. However if the use of control

change messages would affect other MIDI devices in your

setup, you may use system exclusive messages instead.

Controller numbers correspond to the master section para-

meters as follows.

Controller numbers

Mixer parameters

Master Level

Co rre sp o n d e n ce b e tw e e n MIDI ch a n -

n e ls a n d co n tro lle r n u m b e rs

Master Balance

AUX Level

AUX Balance

MIDI channels correspond with mixer channels as follows.

Channels for which Channel Link is on will use control

change messages of the MIDI channel of the odd-numbered

mixer channel. Control change messages received on the

MIDI channel of the even-numbered mixer channel will be

ignored.

EFF1 RTN Level

EFF1 RTN Balance

EFF2 RTN Level

EFF2 RTN Balance

EFF1 SND Level

EFF1 SND Balance

EFF2 SND Level

EFF2 SND Balance

1 2 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 11 Taking advantage of the VS-880 (ideas and examples)

4 . When the song playback ends, stop the VS-880.

Pre p a ra tio n s

The mixer settings have now been recorded. Save the

MIDI song data on a floppy disk, etc.

1 . Use two MIDI cables to connect the VS-880 and the

MIDI sequencer as follows.

< Recording the initial settings of the mixer beforehand >

If you want to record just the initial settings of the mixer

before playing back the song, use the following procedure.

(

)

MIDI

DIGITAL 5,6 FOOT

PHONES

SWITCH

OUT THRU

1 . After making the initial settings for song playback,

store the settings as a scene. In this case, make set-

tings so that fader settings will also change when a

scene is recalled.

OUT

”Storing the current mixer settings” (p.52)

M I D I O U T

2 . Start recording on the MIDI sequencer, and recall the

VS-880 scene.

When the scene is recalled, the settings of the scene

will be transmitted and recorded on the MIDI

sequencer. Recall the scene while the song is stopped.

It is not possible to recall a scene while a song is play-

ing back.

M I D I I N

After storing the scene, do not change the settings of

the mixer until you start recording mixer operations.

If you change the mixer settings before you start

recording, the compu-mix will not reproduce the

mixer operations correctly.

2 . Press [SYSTEM], select “SYS MIDI PRM?”, and press

[YES]. Make the following settings for the relevant para-

meters.

MIDIThr: Out

CtrLocal: On

CtrType: C.C.

Pe rfo rm in g a co m p u -m ix

3 . When you finish making settings, press [PLAY (DIS-

1 . Cue the MIDI song data and the VS-880 song.

PLAY)] to return to Play condition.

2 . Start playback on the VS-880, and the mixer will be

controlled by the MIDI song data as the song plays

back.

4 . Make settings on both devices so that the MIDI

sequencer will synchronize to the VS-880. On the MIDI

sequencer, make settings so that MIDI messages

received at its MIDI IN connector will not be re-transmit-

ted from its MIDI OUT connector.

3 . When playback ends, stop the VS-880.

“Synchronizing with a MIDI sequencer” (p.86)

< If you want channel fader and pan knob operations to be

ignored >

< Notice for synchronization >

While playing back a compu mix, there may be times when

you want the actual volume level and pan to remain unaf-

fected even if the channel faders and pan knobs of the top

panel are operated. In such cases, use the following proce-

dure.

So that the compu-mix will be accurately played back,

record the initial settings of the mixer at the beginning of

the MIDI song data. However if the music begins at the

moment that playback begins, the VS-880 will have to

adjust its mixer settings at the same moment that song

playback begins. In some cases, this can cause the initial

operation to slow down.

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI PRM

?” appears.

If this problem occurs, insert several measures of blank

space at the beginning of the VS-880 song and the MIDI

sequencer song.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

] until “SYS MID:CtrLocal=”

appears.

CtrLocal (Mixer control local switch)

On: Settings will change.

Re co rd in g m ix e r o p e ra tio n s

Off: Settings will not change.

1 . Make the initial mixer settings in preparation for playing

back the song.

4 . Press [PLAY].

You will return to Play condition.

2 . Put the MIDI sequencer in record mode, and begin

playback on the VS-880.

3 . When playback begins, immediately hold down [SHIFT]

and press [SCENE] to record the initial settings of the

mixer. Then, as you listen to the song, adjust the faders

etc. of the mixer as appropriate.

1 2 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 11 Taking advantage of the VS-880 (ideas and examples)

O p e ra tin g th e VS-8 8 0 fro m a n o th e r d e vice (MMC)

The VS-880 supports MMC. This means that when two VS-880 units are synchronized or when a

VS-880 is used in conjunction with an MMC-supporting MIDI sequencer etc., operations such as

song playback, stop and fast-forward can be performed by operating only the master device.

* Depending on the MIDI device that you are using, some devices may not support the MMC

functionality of the VS-880. In this case, the VS-880 cannot be operated as explained in this

ownerÕs manual. The MMC functionality supported by the VS-880 is described in detail in the

separately sold MIDI Implementation. If you wish to purchase a copy, contact a nearby Roland

service center or your dealer.

< About MMC >

MMC is an acronym for ÒMIDI Machine Control.Ó This is a rule that defines how MIDI system

exclusive messages can be used to control multiple recording devices from a single device. The

VS-880 supports MMC. In addition to song playback, stop and fast-forward, you can also select

the tracks for recording, etc.

■ Sy n ch ro n izin g th e o p e ra tio n o f tw o VS-8 8 0 u n its

Here we will explain how the operation of two VS-880 units can be synchronized. One VS-880 will

be the master, and the other VS-880 will be the slave. Make connections as follows.

MASTER OUT L, R

MIDI IN

INPUT 1, 2

MIDI OUT

SLAVE

MASTER

Se ttin g s fo r th e m a ste r VS-8 8 0

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI PRM ?” appears.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . The display will indicate “SYS MID:DeviceID=”. Make sure that the device ID number is “17”.

DeviceID (Device ID)

This sets the Device ID number (1Ð32) that is used when exchanging exclusive messages (mixer

parameters) with an external MIDI device. Exclusive messages can be transmitted and received

between devices which have the same Device ID number setting.

4 . Press PARAMETER [

5 . The display will indicate “SYS MID:MIDIThr=”. For this example, select “Out” so that MTC can

be transmitted.

MIDIThr (MIDI thru switch)

This selects the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU connector. With the factory settings, this is set to

ÒOut.Ó

Out: The connector will transmit MIDI messages from the VS-880. Select this when you want

to transmit metronome Note messages or mixer parameter settings (control change mes-

sages or exclusive messages).

Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN connector will be retransmitted from the con-

nector without change.

1 2 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 11 Taking advantage of the VS-880 (ideas and examples)

Source (Sync source)

6 . Press PARAMETER [

] twice.

This determines how the VS-880 will synchronize with

other devices.

INT: The VS-880 will be controlled by its own internal

7 . The display will indicate “SYS MID:SysEx.Tx.=”. For

this example, select “On” so that MMC can be transmit-

ted.

clock. Select this setting when you are not syn-

chronizing with other devices, or when you want

external MIDI devices to be controlled by syn-

chronization signals from the VS-880.

SysEx.Tx (System exclusive transmit switch)

If you wish to transmit exclusive messages, set this ÒOn.Ó In

order for exclusive messages to be transmitted, the MIDI

Thru Switch must also be turned ÒOut.Ó

EXT: The VS-880 will be controlled by synchronization

signals (MTC) from an external MIDI device. In

this case, the VS-880 will not operate unless it is

receiving MTC signals. Select this setting when

you want to use MTC from an external MIDI

device to control the VS-880.

8 . Press PARAMETER [

9 . The display will indicate “SYS MID:MMC=”. For this

example, select “MASTER” so that MMC can be trans-

mitted.

1 5 . Press PARAMETER [

MMC (MMC mode)

This setting determines how the VS-880 will implement

MMC.

1 6 . The display will indicate “SYS Syn:Gen=”. For this

example, select “MTC” so that MTC can be transmitted.

Off:

MMC will neither be transmitted nor

received.

Gen (Sync generator)

This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. When using a

synchronization signal from the VS-880 to synchronize

external MIDI devices, set this to the desired type of syn-

chronization signal.

MASTER: MMC will be transmitted. The VS-880 will be

the master device for external MIDI equip-

ment.

SLAVE: MMC will be received. The VS-880 will be a

slave device for external MIDI equipment.

Off:

Synchronization signals will not be transmit-

ted.

1 0 . Press PARAMETER [

] twice.

MTC:

MIDI Time Code will be transmitted.

1 1 . The display will indicate “SYS MID:CtrType=”. For this

MIDIClk: MIDI Clock will be transmitted.

SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track

will be transmitted.

example, select “Off”.

CtrType (Mixer control type)

Select the type of MIDI messages that will be used when

transmitting mixer settings to an external MIDI device, or

when MIDI messages from an external MIDI device are

used to control the mixer. Normally, you should select

Control Change messages.

1 7 . Press PARAMETER [

] twice.

The display will indicate ÒSYS Syn:MTC Type=Ó.

1 8 . Make sure that MTC Type is “30”.

MTC Type

Off:

MIDI messages related to mixer operation will

not be transmitted or received.

This sets the type of MTC. Check the specifications of the

MIDI devices that you are using, and select the appropriate

type of MTC on the VS-880.

C.C.: Control Change messages

Excl: Exclusive messages

30:

30 frames per second non-drop format. This is

used by audio devices such as analog tape

recorders, and for NTSC format black and white

video (used in the US and Japan, etc.).

< About mixer control type >

When mixer settings of the master unit are transmitted via

control change message or exclusive message to the slave

unit, operating the channel faders or pan of the master

unit will cause the channel faders of the slave unit to be

modified in the same way. To prevent this, we will turn

the setting ÒOffÓ in this example.

29N: 29.97 frames per second non-drop format. This is

used for NTSC format color video (used in the

US and Japan, etc.).

29D: 29.97 frames per second drop format. This is

used for NTSC format broadcast color video

(used in the US and Japan, etc.)

25:

25 frames per second frame rate. This is used in

SECAM format / PAL format video (used in

Europe, etc.), and for audio equipment and film.

24 frames per second frame rate. This is used for

film in the US.

1 2 . Press [SYSTEM] three times.

The display will indicate ÒSYS Sync/Tempo ?Ó.

24:

1 3 . Press [YES].

The display will indicate ÒSYS Syn:Source=Ó.

1 4 . Make sure that Sync Source is “INT”.

1 2 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 11 Taking advantage of the VS-880 (ideas and examples)

Source (Sync source)

< Non-drop format and drop format >

This determines how the VS-880 will synchronize with

other devices.

NTSC format VCRs use two formats; non-drop and drop.

In non-drop format, the frames are continuous. On the

other hand, drop format skips the first two frames at the

beginning of each minute (except for 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50

minutes), in order to be compatible with NTSC format

color video.

In most video production and music production, continu-

ous frames are easier to handle, so non-drop format is

widely used. However in broadcast studios, where time

code must match actual clock time, drop format is widely

used.

INT: The VS-880 will be controlled by its own internal

clock. Select this setting when you are not syn-

chronizing with other devices, or when you want

external MIDI devices to be controlled by syn-

chronization signals from the VS-880.

EXT: The VS-880 will be controlled by synchronization

signals (MTC) from an external MIDI device. In

this case, the VS-880 will not operate unless it is

receiving MTC signals. Select this setting when

you want to use MTC from an external MIDI

device to control the VS-880.

1 9 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

You will return to Play condition.

1 1 . Press PARAMETER [

] three times.

The display will indicate ÒSYS Syn:MTC Type=Ó.

Se ttin g s fo r th e sla ve VS-8 8 0

1 2 . Set the MTC type to match the setting of the master

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI PRM ?”

unit. For this example, set it to “30.”

appears.

MTC Type

2 . Press [YES].

This sets the type of MTC. Check the specifications of the

MIDI devices that you are using, and select the appropriate

type of MTC on the VS-880.

The display will indicate ÒSYS MID:DeviceID=Ó.

3 . Set the device ID number to match the setting of the

master unit. For this example, set it to “17.”

30:

30 frames per second non-drop format. This is

used by audio devices such as analog tape

recorders, and for NTSC format black and white

video (used in the US and Japan, etc.).

DeviceID (Device ID)

This sets the Device ID number (1Ð32) that is used when

exchanging exclusive messages (mixer parameters) with an

external MIDI device. Exclusive messages can be transmit-

ted and received between devices which have the same

Device ID number setting.

29N: 29.97 frames per second non-drop format. This is

used for NTSC format color video (used in the

US and Japan, etc.).

29D: 29.97 frames per second drop format. This is

used for NTSC format broadcast color video

(used in the US and Japan, etc.)

4 . Press PARAMETER [

] twice.

5 . The display will indicate “SYS MID:SysEx.Rx.=”. For

25:

25 frames per second frame rate. This is used in

SECAM format / PAL format video (used in

Europe, etc.), and for audio equipment and film.

24 frames per second frame rate. This is used for

film in the US.

this example, select “On” so that MMC can be received.

SysEx.Rx (System exclusive receive switch)

If you wish to receive exclusive messages, set this ÒOn.Ó

Exclusive messages can be received when in Play condition.

24:

< Non-drop format and drop format >

6 . Press PARAMETER [

NTSC format VCRs use two formats; non-drop and drop.

In non-drop format, the frames are continuous. On the

other hand, drop format skips the first two frames at the

beginning of each minute (except for 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50

minutes), in order to be compatible with NTSC format

color video.

In most video production and music production, continu-

ous frames are easier to handle, so non-drop format is

widely used. However in broadcast studios, where time

code must match actual clock time, drop format is widely

used.

7 . The display will indicate “SYS MID:MMC=”. For this

example, select “SLAVE” so that MMC will be received.

MMC (MMC mode)

This setting determines how the VS-880 will implement

MMC.

Off:

MMC will neither be transmitted nor

received.

MASTER: MMC will be transmitted. The VS-880 will be

the master device for external MIDI equip-

ment.

SLAVE: MMC will be received. The VS-880 will be a

slave device for external MIDI equipment.

1 3 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

8 . Press [SYSTEM] three times.

You will return to Play condition.

The display will indicate ÒSYS Sync/Tempo ?Ó.

With these settings, operating the master VS-880 unit will

cause the slave VS-880 unit to operate in synchronization.

9 . Press [YES].

The display will indicate ÒSYS Syn:Source=Ó.

1 0 . For this example, select “EXT” so that the unit will oper-

ate according to the MTC that is received.

1 2 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 11 Taking advantage of the VS-880 (ideas and examples)

SysEx.Rx (System exclusive receive switch)

If you wish to receive exclusive messages, set this ÒOn.Ó

Exclusive messages can be received when in Play condition.

■ O p e ra tin g th e VS-8 8 0 fro m a n

MMC-co m p a tib le d e vice

Here we will explain the settings for operating the VS-880 in

synchronization with a computer-based sequencer program

that supports MMC and MTC. Make connections as follows.

7 . Press PARAMETER [

] twice.

The display will indicate ÒSYS MID:MMC=Ó.

8 . For this example, select “SLAVE” so that MMC can be

received.

MIDI

MMC (MMC mode)

This setting determines how the VS-880 will implement

MMC.

MASTER OUT

Off:

MMC will neither be transmitted nor

received.

MIDI

INPUT

(1, 2)

MIDI

OUT

MIDI MIDI

OUT OUT

MASTER: MMC will be transmitted. The VS-880 will be

the master device for external MIDI equip-

ment.

MIDI I/F

SLAVE: MMC will be received. The VS-880 will be a

slave device for external MIDI equipment.

9 . Press PARAMETER [

] twice.

1 0 . Press [SYSTEM] three times.

The display will indicate ÒSYS Sync/Tempo ?Ó.

VS-880

1 1 . Press [YES].

The display will indicate ÒSYS Syn:Source=Ó.

COMPUTER

1 2 . Make sure that the Sync Source is “INT”.

With these settings, the sequencer program will be the mas-

ter for MMC, and the VS-880 will be the master for MTC.

The sequencer program will be able to control playback,

stop, and track status selection etc. on the VS-880.

Source (Sync source)

This determines how the VS-880 will synchronize with

other devices.

INT: The VS-880 will be controlled by its own internal

clock. Select this setting when you are not syn-

chronizing with other devices, or when you want

external MIDI devices to be controlled by syn-

chronization signals from the VS-880.

Ma k e se ttin g s fo r th e VS-8 8 0

1 . Press [SYSTEM] several times until “SYS MIDI PRM ?”

appears.

EXT: The VS-880 will be controlled by synchronization

signals (MTC) from an external MIDI device. In

this case, the VS-880 will not operate unless it is

receiving MTC signals. Select this setting when

you want to use MTC from an external MIDI

device to control the VS-880.

2 . Press [YES].

3 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒSYS MID:MIDIThr=Ó.

4 . For this example, select “Out” so that MTC can be

transmitted.

1 3 . Press PARAMETER [

MIDIThr (MIDI thru switch)

The display will indicate ÒSYS Syn:Gen.=Ó.

This selects the function of the MIDI OUT/THRU connec-

tor. With the factory settings, this is set to ÒOut.Ó

Out: The connector will transmit MIDI messages from

the VS-880. Select this when you want to transmit

metronome Note messages or mixer parameter

settings (control change messages or exclusive

messages).

1 4 . For this example, select “MTC” so that MTC can be

transmitted.

Gen (Sync generator)

This selects the type of synchronization signal that will be

transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector. When using a

synchronization signal from the VS-880 to synchronize

external MIDI devices, set this to the desired type of syn-

chronization signal.

Thru: MIDI messages received at the MIDI IN connec-

tor will be retransmitted from the connector

without change.

Off:

Synchronization signals will not be transmit-

ted.

5 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒSYS MID:SysEx.Rx.=Ó.

MTC:

MIDI Time Code will be transmitted.

MIDIClk: MIDI Clock will be transmitted.

SyncTr: MIDI Clock data recorded on the sync track

will be transmitted.

6 . For this example, select “On” so that MMC can be

received.

1 2 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 11 Taking advantage of the VS-880 (ideas and examples)

1 5 . Press PARAMETER [

The display will indicate ÒSYS Syn:MTC Type=Ó.

] twice.

■ If y o u h a ve p ro b le m s w ith

sy n ch ro n iza tio n

1 6 . Set the MTC type to match the setting of the master

¥ Does the device you are using support the VS-880Õs

MMC?

unit. For this example, set it to “30.”

¥ Do the device ID numbers match?

¥ Is the MIDI Thru switch set to Out?

¥ Is the Sync Generator set correctly?

¥ Is the Sync Source set correctly?

MTC Type

This sets the type of MTC. Check the specifications of the

MIDI devices that you are using, and select the appropriate

type of MTC on the VS-880.

¥ Is the same type of MTC selected for both devices?

30:

30 frames per second non-drop format. This is

used by audio devices such as analog tape

recorders, and for NTSC format black and white

video (used in the US and Japan, etc.).

29N: 29.97 frames per second non-drop format. This is

used for NTSC format color video (used in the

US and Japan, etc.).

29D: 29.97 frames per second drop format. This is

used for NTSC format broadcast color video

(used in the US and Japan, etc.)

25:

25 frames per second frame rate. This is used in

SECAM format / PAL format video (used in

Europe, etc.), and for audio equipment and film.

24 frames per second frame rate. This is used for

film in the US.

24:

< Non-drop format and drop format >

NTSC format VCRs use two formats; non-drop and drop.

In non-drop format, the frames are continuous. On the

other hand, drop format skips the first two frames at the

beginning of each minute (except for 10, 20, 30, 40 and 50

minutes), in order to be compatible with NTSC format

color video.

In most video production and music production, continu-

ous frames are easier to handle, so non-drop format is

widely used. However in broadcast studios, where time

code must match actual clock time, drop format is widely

used.

1 7 . Press [PLAY(DISPLAY)].

You will return to Play condition.

Ma k e se ttin g s fo r th e se q u e n ce r

p ro g ra m

Make the following settings for the sequencer program that

you are using. For details on making the settings, refer to

the ownerÕs manual for your sequencer program.

Device ID number 17

MTC

Receive

MTC Type

MMC

30 fps

Transmit (Master)

1 2 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 11 Taking advantage of the VS-880 (ideas and examples)

Use the ÒAUX LevelÓ parameters of track channels 1

and 2 and the AUX knob of the master section to adjust

the level of the signal sent to the external effect unit.

Use the faders of channel 1 and 2 to adjust the signal

level from the effect sound. However this balance will

depend on the effect that you use, so you should adjust

the volume level on the external effect unit, and leave

the VS-880 fixed at an appropriate volume level.

Usin g e x te rn a l e ffe ct u n its

This section gives two examples of using external effect

devices. Refer to these explanations when you wish to use

your own effect devices.

■ Ap p ly in g a n e ffe ct d u rin g

p la y b a ck

When using external effects, use the AUX SEND jacks as

effect send jacks. Here, we will use the example of applying

effects to a stereo performance recorded on tracks 1/2. We

will use the INPUT 1 and 2 jacks as effect return jacks.

Connect your effect device as shown below.

■ Ap p ly in g a n e ffe ct w h ile

b o u n cin g tra ck s

Track bouncing is the procedure by which the data record-

ed on two or more tracks is merged. At this time, you may

apply effects to specific tracks.

Here, we will give the example of bouncing two stereo

recordings made on tracks 1/2 and tracks 3/4 onto tracks

7/8 as you apply effects only to tracks 1/2.

INPUT B

INPUT A

Connect your effect device as explained in the previous sec-

tion.

MASTER OUT

AUX SEND

1 . Switch the mixer mode to TRACK MIX mode.Hold down

[SHIFT] and press [SELECT].

When you switch to TRACK MIX mode, the TRACK

indicator will light. If the INPUT MIX indicator is lit,

press [SELECT] once again.

I N P U T

O U T P U T

2 . Assign the outputs of tracks 1 and 2 to the AUX buss

alone.

Press channel 1 [CH EDIT], and set the relevant para-

meters as follows. Use PARAMETER [

][

] to

1 . Switch the mixer mode to TRACK MIX mode.Hold down

[SHIFT] and press [SELECT].

select parameters, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to set

the value. Make the same settings for channel 2.

TR1 BUSS Sw=Off

When TRACK MIX mode is selected, the TRACK MIX

indicator will light. If the INPUT MIX indicator is lit,

press [SELECT] once again.

TR1 AUX Sw=PreFade

TR1 AUX Pan=L63 (TR2 AUX Pan=R63)

2 . Assign the outputs of tracks 1 and 2 to the AUX buss

alone.

3 . Assign the outputs of tracks 3 and 4 to REC buses 7-8.

Make settings in the same way as in step 2.

TR3 BUSS Sw=PstFade

Press channel 1 [CH EDIT], and set the relevant para-

meters as follows. Use PARAMETER [

][

] to

TR3 BUSS Sel=7-8

TR3 BUSS Pan=L63 (TR4 BUSS Pan=R63)

select the parameters, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to

set the values. Make the same settings for channel 2.

TR1 BUSS Sw=Off

4 . Assign the outputs of tracks 7 and 8 to the MIX buss.

TR7 BUSS Sw=PstFade

TR1 AUX Sw=PreFade

TR1 AUX Pan=L63 (TR2 Pan=R63)

TR7 BUSS Sel=MIX

TR7 BUSS Pan=L63 (TR8 BUSS Pan=R63)

3 . Press [Select] to switch to INPUT MIX mode.

5 . Press [SELECT] to switch to INPUT MIX mode.

4 . Assign the output of inputs 1 and 2 to the MIX buss.

Make settings using the same procedure as in step 2.

IN1 BUSS Sw=PstFade

6 . Assign the outputs of inputs 1 and 2 to REC buses 7-8.

IN1 BUSS Sw=PstFade

IN1 BUSS Sel=7-8

IN1 BUSS Pan=L63 (IN2 BUSS Pan=R63)

IN1 BUSS Sel=MIX

IN1 BUSS Pan=L63 (IN2 BUSS Pan=R63)

7 . Make settings so that the signals of the MIX buss are

output from the MASTER OUT jacks.

5 . Make settings so that the signal of the MIX buss is out-

put from the MASTER OUT jacks.

Press the master section [EDIT], and then use PARA-

Press the master block [EDIT]. Then use PARAMETER

METER [

][

] to get the “MST Master Mode=”

[

][

] to get the “MST Master Mode=” display,

display, and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “MIX.”

and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select “MIX.”

8 . Now effects can be applied. Press [PLAY (DISPLAY)]

6 . Now the effects can be applied. Press [PLAY (DIS-

to return to play condition.

PLAY)] to return to Play condition.

7 . Playback the song, and adjust the way in which effects

are applied.

1 2 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter 11 Taking advantage of the VS-880 (ideas and examples)

9 . Set the track status of track 1–4 to PLAY, and the track

status of tracks 7 and 8 to REC. Then playback the

song and adjust the way in which effects are applied.

When you finish adjusting, record.

Use the track channels 1 and 2 ÒAUX LevelÓ and the

master section AUX knob to adjust the signal level sent

to the external effect unit. Use the faders of input chan-

nels 1 and 2 to adjust the signal level from the effect.

However this will change depending on the effect

device that you use, so it is best to adjust the volume

level on the external effect device, and fix the VS-880 at

an appropriate volume level.

1 2 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ap p e n d ice s

Usin g a n e x te rn a l d isk d rive (Ab o u t SCSI) ... 1 3 0

Tro u b le sh o o tin g .......................................... 1 3 2

Erro r m e ssa g e s ........................................... 1 3 4

Sp e cia l k e y o p e ra tio n s ................................ 1 3 6

Pa ra m e te r list ............................................. 1 3 8

MIDI im p le m e n ta tio n ch a rt .......................... 1 4 3

Mix e r se ctio n b lo ck d ia g ra m ....................... 1 4 4

Glo ssa ry ..................................................... 1 4 5

Sp e cifica tio n s .............................................. 1 4 6

Ab o u t th e V-XPAN DED stick e r ..................... 1 4 7

In d e x .......................................................... 1 4 9

Tra ck sh e e t ................................................. 1 5 2

1 2 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Usin g a n e x te rn a l d isk d rive (Ab o u t SCSI)

The SCSI connector of the VS-880 allows you to connect

■ Co n n e cto rs a n d ca b le s

disk drives such as hard disks and magneto-optical disk

drives. This section explains the procedure required for

using an external disk drive.

SCSI cables are used to connect disk drives as shown below.

Since there is no difference between a SCSI input and out-

put, it does not matter which connector you use. This type

of connections is referred to as a ÒSCSI chainÓ or a Òdaisy

chain.Ó

* Disk drives are precision devices. If they are connected or

used incorrectly, not only may they fail to operate correct-

ly, but the data on the disk can be lost or even the disk

drive itself may be damaged. In addition to the explana-

tion in this section, please be sure to read and observe the

explanations in the manual for your disk drive.

VS-880

Disk drive 0

Disk drive 1

Disk drive 2

* A disk drive being used for the first time with the VS-880

must be initialized by the VS-880. When a disk drive is

initialized, all data on that disk drive will be lost. Before

using a disk drive that has been used by another device,

make sure that it is OK to erase the data.

Use the following SCSI cables (optional) to connect disk dri-

ves. There are two types of SCSI cables, depending on the

shape of their connector. Purchase the type of cable that is

appropriate for your disk drive.

< About IDE >

ÒIDEÓ stands for ÒIntegrated Device and Electronics.Ó This

is the standard data transmission method used by the

hard disk drives of recent personal computers. The

HDP88 series hard disk drives (sold separately) that can

be installed in the VS-880 are IDE compatible.

C-5025-6: Amphenol 50-pin connector ↔ 25-pin D-sub

type connector, 6 feet (approximately 182 cm)

C-5050-3: Amphenol 50-pin connector ↔ Amphenol 50-

pin connector, 3 feet (approximately 91 cm)

< About SCSI >

ÒSCSIÓ stands for ÒSmall Computer System Interface.Ó

This is a data transmission method that can transmit large

amounts of data in a short time. Since the VS-880 has a

SCSI connector, external SCSI devices such as hard disks

or removable disk drive etc. can be connected.

When making connections, observe the following points.

¥ Keep SCSI cables as short as possible, and use only cables

which have an impedance (110 ohms +/-10%) that is com-

patible with the SCSI standard, and are completely shield.

¥ Do not allow the total length of all SCSI cables connecting

the chain of disk drives to exceed 6.5 meters.

< Removable disk drives >

Many types of disk drive allow you to remove the disks.

In this manual, these disk drives are referred to as

Òremovable disk drives.Ó

¥ Do not connect or disconnect SCSI cables when the power

of any device is turned on.

■ Te rm in a to rs

The device at each end of a SCSI chain must have a termina-

tor (a terminating resistance). Since the VS-880 is one end of

the SCSI chain, it contains an internal terminator. This

means that a terminator must be connected only to the

external drive which is the last in the chain. For details on

attaching a terminator, refer to the ownerÕs manual of your

disk drive.

Co n n e ctin g a d isk d rive

Up to 7 disk drives can be connected to the SCSI connector

of the VS-880. This section will explain how to make disk

drive connections, and how to make the necessary settings.

Whenever you connect a SCSI device, be sure to check the

following points.

If your disk drive takes an external terminator, make set-

tings so that the +5 terminator power is supplied from the

SCSI connector (terminator) of that disk drive. Unless the

terminator power is supplied, the operation of the SCSI

chain will not be stable. However if the fuse inside the disk

drive has been blown, etc., so that power is not being sup-

plied, attaching a terminator will have the opposite effect of

causing operation to become more unstable. In such cases,

consult the manufacturer of your disk drive.

● Connectors and cables

● Terminators

● SCSI ID numbers

1 3 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using an external disk drive (About SCSI)

■ SCSI ID n u m b e rs

Each disk drive is distinguished by its SCSI ID number (0Ð7). This means that when two or more

disk drives are connected, you must make settings so that the SCSI ID numbers of the disk drives

do not conflict (coincide). If the SCSI ID numbers conflict, the VS-880 will not be able to correctly

recognize the disk drives.

With the factory settings, the VS-880 is set to SCSI ID number 7. Set the disk drives you are con-

nected to ID numbers other than 7.

■ Pa rtitio n s

The VS-880 is able to manage either 500 M bytes or 1000 M bytes of disk space at one time. If you

use a disk drive that is larger than this, the disk must be partitioned into 500 M bytes / 1000 M

bytes partitions. (A partition is a way of dividing a disk into separate areas.) Unless you have a

special reason to divide a disk into smaller areas, you should use 1000 M bytes partitions. The VS-

880 can divide a disk drive into up to 4 partitions.

¥ If a 420 M bytes disk drive is partitioned with a 500 M bytes partition, a single 420 M bytes parti-

tion will be created.

¥ If a 1.2 G bytes disk drive is partitioned with 1000 M bytes partitions, a 1000 M bytes partition

and a 200 M bytes partition will be created.

¥ If a 4.2 G bytes disk drive is partitioned with 1000 M bytes partitions, four 1000 M bytes parti-

tions will be created. The remaining 200 M bytes cannot be used.

Disk drive (420 M bytes)

Disk drive (1.2 G bytes)

Partition 1

Partition 2

(420 M bytes)

(1000 M bytes)

(200 M bytes)

Disk drive (4.2 G bytes)

Partition 1

(1000 M bytes)

Partition 2

(1000 M bytes)

Partition 3

(1000 M bytes)

Partition 4

(1000 M bytes)

200 M bytes

In this way, each partition of a disk drive is handled by the VS-880 as a separate disk drive. When

using the VS-880, you must specify which partition of which disk drive is to be used. The currently

used partition is referred to as the Òcurrent drive.Ó

1 3 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Tro u b le sh o o tin g

When the VS-880 does not perform the way you expect,

check the following points before you suspect a malfunc-

tion. If this does not resolve the problem, contact servicing

by your dealer or qualified Roland service personnel.

¥ Digital signal is not being transmitted from the digital

audio device.

Some digital audio devices do not output a digital signal

unless they are in play mode. If this is the case, put your

digital audio device in standby (pause) mode before

putting the VS-880 into record mode.

■ Pro b le m s w ith so u n d

¥ Digital signal format is different.

N o so u n d

Some digital audio devices may use a special digital sig-

nal format. Please use a digital audio device that is com-

patible with S/P DIF.

¥ The power is not turned on for the VS-880 and the con-

nected devices.

¥ The audio cables are not connected correctly.

¥ The audio cables are broken.

N o ise a n d d isto rtio n a p p e a r in th e

re co rd e d so u n d

¥ Input sensitivity settings are inappropriate.

¥ The volume is turned down on the connected mixer or

amp.

If input sensitivity settings are too high, the recorded

sound will be distorted. If they are too low, the recorded

sound will be buried by noise. Adjust the INPUT SENS

knob so that the level meters move as high as possible

without causing the PEAK indicator to light.

¥ The master fader of the VS-880 is turned down.

¥ The output jacks which are connected are different than

the output jacks selected in the master section of the

mixer.

¥ In INPUT MIX mode or TRACK MIX mode, the equalizer

is being used.

Some equalizer settings may cause the sound to distort

even if the PEAK indicator does not light. Re-adjust the

equalizer.

¥ Short phrases less than 0.5 seconds cannot be played

back.

Sp e cific ch a n n e l d o e s n o t so u n d

¥ The volume level of the channel is turned down.

When the mixer mode is switched etc., the actual volume

levels may not match the position of the faders. In this

case, move the faders up and down to match the settings.

¥ If noise or distortion occurred as a result of track bounc-

ing, the track output levels were too high.

¥ A mic is connected directly to the VS-880.

The VS-880 is designed with a large headroom margin.

Also, since INPUT-1Ð4 jacks are 10 k-ohm low imped-

ance, the recording level may be low, depending on the

characteristics of your mic. Pass the mic signal through a

mic preamp before connecting it to the VS-880, to convert

the signal to line level for recording.

¥ The track status is set to MUTE (the STATUS indicator is

dark).

¥ The Solo function (p.111) is being used.

Channels which were muted before the Solo function was

used cannot be monitored even if [STATUS] is pressed.

Alternatively, you can set the mixer mode to INPUT

MIX/TRACK MIX and raise the channel fader in INPUT

MIX when recording.

Ca n n o t re co rd

¥ The track status of the recording destination is not set to

REC (STATUS indicator blinks red).

Pla y b a ck p itch is w ro n g

¥ The Vari-pitch function is on (the VARI PITCH indicator

is lit).

¥ The disk drive has insufficient capacity.

¥ If the mixer mode is INPUT➝TRACK, the specified input

source is not selected for the recording destination (p.50).

Press [VARI PITCH] to turn off the button indicator.

¥ In INPUT MIX mode or TRACK MIX mode, the REC buss

is not selected for the input source to be recorded (p.50).

Ca n n o t re co rd d ig ita lly

¥ The master clock is not set to ÒDIGITLÓ (p.73).

¥ The sampling rate of the recording destination song is dif-

ferent than the sampling rate of the digital audio device.

Match the sample rate setting of the digital audio device

to the setting of the song. If it is not possible to change the

sample rate of the digital audio device, you must create a

new song with that sample rate.

¥ The Vari-pitch function is on (the VARI PITCH indicator

is lit).

Press [VARI PITCH] to turn off the button indicator.

1 3 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Troubleshooting

■ Disk d rive p ro b le m s

■ O th e r p ro b le m s

In te rn a l h a rd d isk is n o t d e te cte d

W h e n th e p o w e r is tu rn e d o n , th e

p re vio u s d a ta w a s n o t sa ve d co rre ctly

It is likely that the VS-880 power was turned off without

performing the shut-down process. The lost data cannot be

recovered.

¥ The IDE drive switch is set Off (p.116).

Ex te rn a l d rive is n o t d e te cte d

¥ The disk drive is not connected correctly (p.93).

¥ The device ID numbers of two or more disk drives are

conflicting.

Da ta o n th e d isk d rive w a s d a m a g e d

The following situations can result in damage to the data on

a disk drive. Re-initialize the disk drive (and also execute

physical formatting) (p.93).

¥ The disk drive has not been initialized on the VS-880

(p.93).

Also, we recommend that you execute Surface Scan (p.38)

as well.

¥ If you are using a removable disk drive, re-select the disk

drive after inserting the disk (p.93).

¥ The VS-880 power was turned off without performing the

shut-down process.

Disk d rive d o e s n o t o p e ra te co rre ctly

¥ A terminator is not correctly attached to the disk drive

(p.130).

¥ The power was turned off while the disk drive was oper-

ating.

¥ A strong shock was applied to the disk drive.

■ Sy n ch ro n iza tio n p ro b le m s

¥ The disk drive or SCSI cable was connected or disconnect-

ed while the power was still turned on.

(d o e s n o t sy n ch ro n ize )

W h e n sy n ch ro n izin g a MIDI se q u e n ce r

to th e VS-8 8 0

¥ The MIDI cable is not connected correctly.

¥ The MIDI cable is broken.

¥ The MIDI Thru switch is not set to ÒOutÓ (p.87).

¥ The sync generator is not set to the appropriate synchro-

nization method (MTC, MIDI Clock, Sync Track) (p.87, 90,

92).

¥ The sync source is not set to ÒINTÓ (p.88).

¥ If you are using MTC, the two devices are not set to the

same type of MTC (p.86).

¥ If you are using the sync track, MIDI clock data has not

been recorded on the sync track.

¥ The settings of the MIDI sequencer are not correct.

¥ The MIDI sequencer is not ready to playback.

W h e n sy n ch ro n izin g th e VS-8 8 0 to a

MIDI se q u e n ce r

¥ The MIDI cable is not connected correctly.

¥ The MIDI cable is broken.

¥ The VS-880 cannot be synchronized using a method other

than MTC (p.86).

¥ The sync source is not set to ÒEXTÓ (p.88).

¥ The two devices are not set to the same type of MTC

(p.86).

¥ The settings of the MIDI sequencer are not correct.

¥ The VS-880 is not ready to playback.

¥ If synchronization is interrupted, it is possible that either

MTC reception is poor or the MIDI cable is broken. If

MTC reception is only slightly defective, you can set the

Error Level (p.88) to get around the problem.

1 3 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Erro r m e ssa g e s

If an error occurs in operation, or if an operation could not

be processed correctly, and error message will appear. Refer

to the displayed error message and take the appropriate

action.

Disk Memory Full

Situation 1: There is insufficient free area on the disk.

Action 1: Erase unneeded data. Or, select a different disk

drive.

Situation 2: The maximum number of songs that can be

recorded on a disk drive (200) has been exceeded.

Action 2: Delete unneeded songs. Or, select a different

disk drive.

Aborted Command

Illegal Request

Situation: This disk drive cannot be used by the VS-880.

Already Selected

Situation: The currently selected disk drive was selected.

Disk Write Error

Situation: An error occurred while writing data to the

Action:

If you wish to switch to another disk drive, re-

select the disk drive.

disk drive.

Action:

The song data has not been correctly saved to

disk. Back up the song data to a DAT recorder,

initialize the disk drive, and restore the backed

up song data to the disk drive.

Arbitration Fail

Busy Status

Check Condition

Status Error

Drive Too Slow

Wait For BUSS Free

Situation: Normal communication with the disk drive

could not be accomplished.

Situation 1: If this message appears when you first begin

using a disk drive with the VS-880, the disk

drive is not fast enough.

Action 1: When using this disk, create a new song with a

lower sample rate or recording mode, and

record using this song.

Action:

Make sure that the disk drive is connected cor-

rectly.

Can’t Communicate

Drive Time Out

Message Error

Phase Mismatch

Undefined Sense

Situation 2: If this message appears after you have been

using the disk drive with the VS-880, the data

on the disk drive has become fragmented, caus-

ing delays in reading and writing data.

Action 2: Either use the track bouncing operation to re-

record playback data to another track, or use

the optimize operation. If the same message

appears even after these measures have been

taken, copy the song data to another disk drive

and initialize the disk drive that produced the

problem.

Unit Attention

? Unknown Error

Situation: There is a problem with the connections to the

disk drive.

Action:

Make sure that the disk drive is connected cor-

rectly.

Can't Recover

Event Mem Full

Situation: The VS-880 has used up all the events that can

Situation: The drive check Recover procedure could not

be executed because there was insufficient free

space on the disk.

be handled by one song.

Action:

Delete unneeded auto mix data. Alternatively,

perform the Song Optimize operation.

Action:

Delete unneeded songs. Alternatively, perform

the Song Optimize procedure.

MarkerMemory Full

Digital In Unlock

Situation: The VS-880 has used up all Marker Memory

(1000 Markers) that can be handled by one

song.

Situation 1: A digital signal is not being input to the DIGI-

TAL IN connector.

Action 1: Press [YES], and then make sure that power of

the digital equipment is turned on and that the

digital equipment is connected correctly.

Action:

Delete unneeded Marker.

Hardware Error

Situation: There is a problem with the disk drive.

Situation 2: The sample rate specified for the song is differ-

ent than the sample rate of the digital device

connected to the DIGITAL IN connector.

Action:

Contact the manufacturer or dealer of the disk

drive.

Action 2: Press [YES], and set the sample rates of both

devices to match.

Medium Error

Situation: There is a problem with the disk drive media.

Action:

This disk cannot be used by the VS-880. In some

cases recovery can be achieved by executing

Drive Check (p.38).

1 3 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Error messages

Memory Full

Write Protected

Reason:

There is no further free space in the internal

Situation: The disk drive is protected.

memory of the VS-880.

Action:

If you are using a removable disk drive, per-

form the shut-down procedure, and remove the

disk and set its protect tab to the write permit

position. Then re-insert the disk, and start up

the VS-880 once again.

Action:

Use the Track Bouncing operation to combine

two or more tracks of playback data into a sin-

gle track, and delete the original playback data.

Alternatively, perform the Song Optimize oper-

ation (p.113).

No Effect Board

Situation: A VS8F-1 effect expansion board (sold separate-

ly) is not installed.

Action:

This operation can be performed only if a VS8F-

1 is installed.

Not 512byte/sector

Situation: The disk that you are using is not 512

bytes/sector.

Action:

This disk cannot be used by the VS-880.

Not Formatted

Situation 1: The disk drive has not been initialized by the

VS-880.

Action 1: Initialize the disk drive.

Situation 2: If this appears for a disk drive that has been ini-

tialized by the VS-880, there is a problem with

the connections to the disk drive.

Action 2: Make sure that the disk drive is connected cor-

rectly.

Not Ready

Situation: The disk drive is not ready.

Action:

Wait a short time.

No Drive Ready

Situation: No disk drive is connected. Or, an internal hard

disk is not installed.

Action:

Make sure that the disk drive is connected cor-

rectly.

SCSI ID Error

Situation: The SCSI ID numbers of two or more disk dri-

ves are conflicting.

Action:

Make settings so that the SCSI ID numbers do

not conflict (p.131).

Song Protected

Reason:

Since Song Protect is ON, the operation cannot

be executed.

Action:

Turn the Song Protect OFF (p.74).

If you wish to execute the operation without

saving the currently selected song, repeat the

procedure, and press [NO] in reply to the

ÒSTORE Current?Ó message.

SPC Not Available

Situation: The SCSI components of the VS-880 have mal-

functioned.

Action:

Contact servicing by your dealer or qualified

Roland service personnel.

1 3 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sp e cia l k e y o p e ra tio n s

Here is a list of the functions that can be performed by pressing multiple buttons, or by using the TIME/VALUE dial in con-

junction with a button.

■ MIXER MO DE b u tto n s

[SHIFT] + [SELECT]

Switch between INPUT➝TRACK mode and INPUT MIX / TRACK MIX mode

■ CH EDIT b u tto n s

[SHIFT] + [Input/BUSS (CH EDIT)]

To the input select setting page (in INPUT➝TRACK mode)

To the buss select setting page (in INPUT MIX / TRACK MIX mode)

To the V-track setting page (in INPUT➝TRACK / TRACK MIX mode)

To the equalizer low gain / frequency setting page

To the equalizer mid gain setting page (in INPUT➝TRACK mode)

To the equalizer high gain / frequency setting page

To the AUX switch setting page

To the effect 1 switch setting page (if a VS8F-1 is installed)

To the effect 2 switch setting page (if a VS8F-1 is installed)

Solo function on/off

[SHIFT] + [V.Track (CH EDIT)]

[SHIFT] + [EQ Low (CH EDIT)]

[SHIFT] + [EQ Mid (CH EDIT)]

[SHIFT] + [EQ Hi (CH EDIT)]

[SHIFT] + [AUX Send (CH EDIT)]

[SHIFT] + [EFFECT-1 (CH EDIT)]

[SHIFT] + [EFFECT-2 (CH EDIT)]

[SHIFT] + [SOLO (EDIT)]

■ EDIT CO N DITIO N b u tto n s

[SHIFT] + [SYSTEM]

[SHIFT] + [SONG]

[SHIFT] + [EFFECT]

Switch sync sources

Display various information about the song.

Switch between the effect select page, effect name page, and effect on/off page.

■ Tra n sp o rt co n tro l b u tto n s

[SHIFT] + [STORE (ZERO)]

[SHIFT] + [SONG TOP (REW)]

[SHIFT] + [SONG END (FF)]

[SHIFT] + [SHUT/EJECT (STOP)]

[SHIFT] + [RESTART (PLAY)]

[REC] + [STATUS]

Store song data to the disk drive

Move to the time where the first sound of the song is recorded

Move to the time where the last sound of the song is recorded

Shut-down

Re-start (after shut-down)

Switch the track status to REC (indicator blinks red)

Switch the track status to PLAY (indicator lights green)

[STOP] + [STATUS]

■ LO CATO R b u tto n s

[SHIFT] + LOC button

Clear the setting of a locate point 1Ð4

Clear the setting of a locate point 5Ð8

To the Tempo Map setting page

Erase a mark point

[CLEAR] + LOC button

[SHIFT] + [CLEAR] + LOC button

[SHIFT] + [TAP]

[CLEAR] + [TAP]

[SHIFT] + [CLEAR] + [TAP]➝[YES]

[LOCATOR] + [LOC1/5]Ð[LOC4/8]

[TRACK] + [LOC1/5]

[TRACK] + [LOC2/6]

[TRACK] + [LOC3/7]

Erase all mark points

Switch locate banks.

Direct input of Start point

Direct input of End point

Direct input of From point

Direct input of To point

[TRACK] + [LOC4/8]

■ SCEN E b u tto n

[SCENE] + [SELECT]

[SCENE] + [TAP]

[SCENE] + [PREV]

[SCENE] + [NEXT]

[SCENE] + [REC]

Auto mix on/off

Execute snapshot

Gradation to mixer settings of previous mark point

Gradation to mixer settings of next mark point

Auto Mix realtime recording

1 3 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Special key operations

■ O th e r

[SHIFT] + [VARI PITCH]

[SHIFT] + [UNDO]

To the vari pitch setting page

Execute Redo (if the UNDO indicator is lit)

[SHIFT] + [SCENE]

Transmit the condition of the digital mixer as MIDI data from the MIDI OUT con-

nector

[SHIFT] + [SCRUB]

To the Scrub Length setting page

[SHIFT] + [TO]

To the Preview Length setting page

[SHIFT] + [FROM]

To the Preview Length setting page

[SHIFT] + [PLAY (DISPLAY)]

[PLAY] and TIME/VALUE dial

[SHIFT] and TIME/VALUE dial

Switch the bar display

To the Display Contrast setting page

Modify the value at 10 times the usual speed

In Play condition, move the current time in 10-frame units

In Play condition when an ÒÓ is displayed at the beginning of the time code display,

move the current time in units of approximately 1/100 frame.

Execute preview thru

[TO] + [FROM]

[SHIFT] + CURSOR[

[SHIFT] + PARAMETER [

]

When modifying the time, move the cursor left.

When modifying the time, move the cursor right.

Select previous effect parameter

]

Select next effect parameter

1 3 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pa ra m e te r list

Parameters that have been added and setting ranges that have been expanded by the V-XPANDED enhancement are printed in

bold type.

■ Mix e r Pa ra m e te rs (ch a n n e l)

* If channel link is ON, the Pan parameter will change to the Balance parameter.

IN PUT➝TRACK Mo d e

Parameter name

Display

Value

Initial value

Input Select

Input

INPUT-1 Ð INPUT-4, DIGITAL-L,

DIGITAL-R, MIX-L, MIX-R,

AUX-A, AUX-B

INPUT-1 Ð 4 (*1)

Mix Switch

Mix Level

Mix Pan/Balance

V-Track

MIX Sw

Off, PreFade, PstFade

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

1Ð8

PstFade

current panel settings

MIX Level

MIX Pan/MIX Bal

V.Track

Equalizer Switch

Equalizer Low Gain

Equalizer Low Frequency

Equalizer Mid Gain

Equalizer Mid Q

Equalizer Mid Frequency

Equalizer High Gain

Equalizer High Frequency

AUX Switch

EQ Switch

EQL

EQM

EQM Q

EQM F

EQH

AUX Sw

AUX Level

AUX Pan/AUX Bal

Channel Link

EFFECT1

Off, On

-12Ð12 dB

40 Hz Ð 1.5 kHz

-12Ð12 dB

0.5Ð16

200 Hz Ð 8 kHz

-12Ð12 dB

500 Hz Ð 18 kHz

Off, PreFade, PstFade

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

Off, On

Off, Prefade, PstFade, Insert,

0 dB

300 Hz

0 dB

0.5

1.4 kHz

0 dB

4 kHz

Off

100

Off

AUX Level

AUX Pan/Balance

Channel Link

Effect 1 Switch

InsertL, InsertR, InsertS

Effect 1 Send Level

EFFECT1 Send

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

0–127

100 (*2)

0 (*2)

100 (*3)

Off

Effect 1 Pan/Balance

Effect 1 Insert Level

Effect 1 Insert Return Level

Effect 2 Switch

EFFECT1 Pan/EFFECT1 Bal

EFFECT1 InsSend

EFFECT1 InsRtn

EFFECT2

0–127

Off, Prefade, PstFade, Insert,

InsertL, InsertR, InsertS

Effect 2 Send Level

EFFECT2 Send

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

0–127

Off, On

-12–12 dB

100 (*2)

0 (*2)

100 (*3)

Off

Effect 2 Pan/Balance

Effect 2 Insert Level

Effect 2 Insert Return Level

Equalizer/Effect Pre-Insert Switch EQ/Eff PreIns

Track Level TrackLevel

EFFECT2 Pan/EFFECT1 Bal

EFFECT2 InsSend

EFFECT2 InsRtn

0 dB

* 1 If channel link is ON, the Input Select setting values will be INPUT-12, INPUT-34, DIGITAL, MIX, and AUX-AB.

* 2 Valid when Effect Switch is ÒPrefade, PstFade.Ó

* 3 Valid when Effect Switch is ÒInsert, InsertL, InsertR, InsertS.Ó

IN PUT MIX Mo d e

Parameter name

BUSS Switch

BUSS Select

BUSS Level

BUSS Pan/Balance

Equalizer Switch

Equalizer Low Gain

Equalizer Low Frequency

Equalizer Mid Gain

Equalizer Mid Q

Equalizer Mid Frequency

Equalizer High Gain

Equalizer High Frequency

Display

Value

Initial value

PstFade

1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8

100

BUSS Sw

BUSS Sel

BUSS Level

BUSS Pan/BUSS Bal

EQ Switch

EQL

EQM

EQM Q

EQM F

EQH

Off, PreFade, PstFade

MIX, 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

Off, On

-12Ð12 dB

40 Hz Ð 1.5 kHz

-12–12 dB

0.5–16

200 Hz–8 kHz

-12Ð12 dB

0 dB

300 Hz

0 dB (*1)

0.5 (*1)

1.4 kHz (*1)

0 dB

EQH

500 Hz Ð 18 kHz

4 kHz

1 3 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parameter list

Parameter name

AUX Switch

AUX Level

AUX Pan/Balance

Channel Link

Effect 1 Switch

Display

AUX Sw

AUX Level

AUX Pan/AUX Bal

Channel Link

EFFECT1

Value

Off, PreFade, PstFade

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

Off, On

Off, Prefade, PstFade, Insert,

Initial value

Off

100

Off

InsertL, InsertR, InsertS

Effect 1 Send Level

EFFECT1 Send

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

0–127

100 (*2)

0 (*2)

100 (*3)

Off

Effect 1 Pan/Balance

Effect 1 Insert Level

Effect 1 Insert Return Level

Effect 2 Switch

EFFECT1 Pan/EFFECT1 Bal

EFFECT1 InsSend

EFFECT1 InsRtn

EFFECT2

0–127

Off, Prefade, PstFade, Insert,

InsertL, InsertR, InsertS

Effect 2 Send Level

EFFECT2 Send

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

0–127

100 (*2)

0 (*2)

100 (*3)

Effect 2 Pan/Balance

Effect 2 Insert Level

Effect 2 Insert Return Level

EFFECT2 Pan/EFFECT1 Bal

EFFECT2 InsSend

EFFECT2 InsRtn

0–127

* 1 Valid only for 8 channels of INPUT MIX/TRACK MIX (When the master block Equalizer Select is Ò3 Band EQÓ).

* 2 Valid when Effect Switch is ÒPrefade, PstFade.Ó

* 3 Valid when Effect Switch is ÒInsert, InsertL, InsertR, InsertS.Ó

TRACK MIX Mo d e

Parameter name

BUSS Switch

Display

Value

Initial value

PstFade

MIX

100

BUSS Sw

BUSS Sel

BUSS Level

BUSS Pan/BUSS Bal

V.Track

Off, PreFade, PstFade

MIX, 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

1Ð8

BUSS Select

BUSS Level

BUSS Pan/Balance

V-Track

Equalizer Switch

Equalizer Low Gain

Equalizer Low Frequency

Equalizer Mid Gain

Equalizer Mid Q

Equalizer Mid Frequency

Equalizer High Gain

Equalizer High Frequency

AUX Switch

EQ Switch

EQL

EQM

EQM Q

EQM F

EQH

AUX Sw

AUX Level

AUX Pan/AUX Bal

Channel Link

EFFECT1

Off, On

-12Ð12 dB

0 dB

40 Hz Ð 1.5 kHz

-12–12 dB

0.5–16

200 Hz–8 kHz

-12Ð12 dB

500 Hz Ð 18 kHz

Off, PreFade, PstFade

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

Off, On

300 Hz

0 dB (*1)

0.5 (*1)

1.4 kHz (*1)

0 dB

4 kHz

Off

100

AUX Level

AUX Pan/Balance

Channel Link

Off

Effect 1 Switch

Off, Prefade, PstFade, Insert,

InsertL, InsertR, InsertS

Effect 1 Send Level

EFFECT1 Send

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

0–127

100 (*2)

0 (*2)

100 (*3)

Off

Effect 1 Pan/Balance

Effect 1 Insert Level

Effect 1 Insert Return Level

Effect 2 Switch

EFFECT1 Pan/EFFECT1 Bal

EFFECT1 InsSend

EFFECT1 InsRtn

EFFECT2

0–127

Off, Prefade, PstFade, Insert,

InsertL, InsertR, InsertS

Effect 2 Send Level

EFFECT2 Send

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

0–127

Off, On

-12–12 dB

100 (*2)

0 (*2)

100 (*3)

Off

Effect 2 Pan/Balance

Effect 2 Insert Level

Effect 2 Insert Return Level

Equalizer/Effect Pre-Insert Switch EQ/Eff PreIns

Track Level TrackLevel

EFFECT2 Pan/EFFECT1 Bal

EFFECT2 InsSend

EFFECT2 InsRtn

0 dB

* 1 Valid only for 8 channels of INPUT MIX/TRACK MIX.

* 2 Valid when Effect Switch is ÒPrefade, PstFade.Ó

* 3 Valid when Effect Switch is ÒInsert, InsertL, InsertR, InsertS.Ó

1 3 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parameter list

Ma ste r Blo ck

Parameter name

Master Out Mode

Display

Master Mode

Value

Initial value

MIX

(in INPUT➝TRACK)

MIX, M+A, M+B, MAB,

-A-, -B-, A+B

MIX, M+A, M+B, MAB,

-A-, -B-, A+B, 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

0Ð127

MIX (in INPUT MIX

/TRACK MIX)

current panel settings

Master Level

Baster Balance

AUX Level

AUX Balance

Masterlevel

Master Bal

AUX Level

AUX Bal

L63Ð0ÐR63

Effect 1 Insert Switch

Effect 1 Send Level

Effect 1 Send Balance

Effect 1 Return To

EFF1 INS Sw

EFF1 SND Lev

EFF1 SND Bal

EFF1 RTN to

Off, On

0–127

L63–0–R63

MIX, AUX

Off

100 (*1)

0 (*1)

MIX (*1)

(in INPUT➝TRACK)

MIX, 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8

MIX (*1)

(in INPUT MIX/TRACK MIX)

Effect 1 Return Level

Effect 1 Send Balance

Effect 2 Insert Switch

Effect 2 Send Level

Effect 2 Send Balance

Effect 2 Return To

EFF1 RTN Lev

EFF1 SND Bal

EFF2 INS Sw

EFF2 SND Lev

EFF2 SND Bal

EFF2 RTN to

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

Off, On

0–127

L63–0–R63

MIX, AUX

100 (*1)

0 (*1)

Off

100 (*2)

0 (*2)

MIX (*2)

(in INPUT➝TRACK)

MIX, 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8

MIX (*2)

(in INPUT MIX/TRACK MIX)

Effect 2 Return Level

Effect 2 Send Balance

Stereo In

EFF2 RTN Lev

EFF2 SND Bal

StereoIn

0Ð127

L63Ð0ÐR63

Off, Input12, Input34, Digital

100 (*2)

0 (*2)

Off

(in INPUT➝TRACK)

Stereo In Level

StIn Level

0–127

100

(in INPUT➝TRACK)

Stereo In Balance

Equalizer Select

StIn Bal

EQ Sel

L63–0–R63

2BandEQ, 3BangEQ

0 (in INPUT➝TRACK)

2BandEQ

(in INPUT MIX/TRACK MIX)

* 1 Valid when Effect 1 Insert Switch is ÒOFF.Ó

* 2 Valid when Effect 2 Insert Switch is ÒOFF.Ó

■ Sy ste m Pa ra m e te rs

Sy ste m

Parameter name

Master Clock

Time Display Format

Offset

Display

Value

INT, DIGITL

ABS, REL

00h00m00s00 Ð 23h59m59s29

Off, On

AUTO, SOURCE

24.06Ð50.43 kHz (32 kHz)

24.06Ð50.48 kHz (44.1 kHz)

24.06Ð50.43 kHz (48 kHz)

Initial value

INT

ABS

00h00m00s00

Off

AUTO

32.00 kHz

44.10 kHz

48.00 kHz

MasterClk

TimeDispFmt

Ofs

Marker Stop

RecordMon

VariPitch

Maker Stop

Record Monitor

Vari Pitch

Foot Switch Assign

FootSw

Play/Stop, Record, TapMarker,

Next, Previous, GPI

Play/Stop

Fade Length

Scrub Length

FadeLength

Scrub Len

PreviewLen

MetroOut

MetroLevel

MetroMd

UNDO MSG

LCD Contrast

2, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50 ms

25Ð100 ms

1.0Ð10.0 s

Off, INT, MIDI

0Ð127

Rec Only, Rec&Play

Off, On

10 ms

45 ms

1.0 s

Off

100

Rec Only

Preview Length

Metronome Output

Metronome Level

Metronome Mode

Undo Message

Contrast

0Ð15

1 4 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parameter list

Parameter name

Remaining Display

Display

Digital Copy Protect

Shift Lock

Display

Value

Initial value

TimeMeasure/Beat

Always

Off

RemainDisp

MeasurDsp

D.CpyProtect

Shift Lock

Time, CapaMB, Capa %, Event

Always, Auto

Off, On

Numerics Type

Fader Match

Peak Hold Switch

NUMERICSType

FaderMatch

PeakHoldSw

Up, Dwn

Null, Jump

Off, On

Jump

Off

* The settable range for Offset will change slightly depending on the MTC type (sync parameter).

MIDI

Parameter name

Device ID

Display

DeviceID

MIDIThr

Value

1Ð32

Out, Thru

Off, On

Initial value

Out

Off

MIDI Thru Switch

System Exclusive Receive Switch SysEx.Rx

System Exclusive Transmit Switch SysEx.Tx

MMC Mode

Metronome Channel

Accent Note

Accent Velocity

Normal Note

MMC

Off, MASTER, SLAVE

1Ð16

C_0ÐG_9

1Ð127

C_0ÐG_9

1Ð127

Off, On

Off, C.C., Excl

Off, On

MASTER

10 (*)

C#2 (*)

100 (*)

C#2 (*)

60 (*)

C.C.

Off

MetronmCh

Acc.Note

Acc.Velo

Nrm.Note

Nrm.Velo

CtrLocal

CtrType

P.C.Scne

P.C.Eff

Normal Velocity

Mixer Control Local Switch

Mixer Control Type

Program Change Scene

Program Change Effect

Control Change Effect

C.C.Eff

Off, On

* Valid when Metronome Output is ÒMIDI.Ó

Disk

Parameter name

IDE Drive

Display

IDE Drv

SCSI Self

Value

Off, On

0Ð7

Initial value

SCSI Self ID

Sy n c/ Te m p o

Parameter name

Sync Source

Sync Generator

Error Level

Display

Source

Gen.

ErrLevel

Value

INT, EXT

Off, MTC, MIDIclk, SyncTr

0Ð10

Initial value

INT

Off

MTC Type

Tempo Map Number

Tempo

Measure

Beat

MTC Type

30, 29N, 29D, 25, 24

1Ð50

25.0Ð250.0

1Ð999

1/1Ð8/1, 1/2Ð8/2,

1/4Ð8/4, 1/8Ð8/8

120.0

4/4

Offset

Ofs

00h00m00s00–23h59m59s29

00h00m00s00

Sy n c Tra ck Co n ve rt

Parameter name

Convert

Display

Value

Initial value

CV1 Tap➝S.Tr, CV2 Tap➝T.Map, CV1 Tap➝S.Tr

CV3 S.Tr➝T.Map, CV4 Time➝S.Tr

Beat

1/1–8/1, 1/2–8/2, 1/4–8/4, 1/8–8/8

1–8

1/1–8/1, 1/2–8/2, 1/4–8/4, 1/8–8/8

00h00m00s00–23h59m59s29

1–999

4/4

Tap Beat

Sync Track Beat

Start Time

End Time

Measure

Tap Beat

S.TrBeat

End

Measure

00h00m00s00

1 4 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Parameter list

Sce n e / Au to Mix

Parameter name

Scene Mode

Auto Mix Mode

Auto Mix Snapshot

Display

Value

All, KeepF

Off, On

Initial value

ALL

Off

Scene Mode

A.MIX Mode

A.MIX Snap

ALL, MaskF

ALL

Au to Mix Era se

Parameter name

Display

Value

Initial value

Starting Mark Piont

Ending Mark Piont

Erase Mode

0–999

Event, Marker

EraseMode

Event

Drive Se le ct

Parameter name

Select Drive

Display

Select Drv

Value

IDE :0Ð3, SC0: 0ÐSC7: 3

Initial value

Drive In itia lize

Parameter name

Initialize Drive

Physical Format

Partition

Display

Value

IDE: 0Ð3, SC0: 0ÐSC7: 3

Off, On

500, 1000 MB

Off, On

Initial value

Off

1000 MB

Off

Init.Drive

PhysicalFmt

Partition

Surface Scan

SurfaceScan

Drive Ch e ck

Parameter name

Check Drive

Display

CheckDrive

Value

IDE:0Ð3, SC0:0ÐSC7:3

Initial value

1 4 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Digital Studio Workstation

Model VS-880

Date : Dec. 12, 1996

Version : 2.00

MIDI Implementation Chart

Function...

Transmitted

Recognized

Remarks

Basic

Default

1Ð15

1Ð16

1Ð15

**************

Channel Changed

Default

Messages

Altered

mode 3

Mode

**************

Note

Number :

0Ð127

**************

*10

36Ð84, 36Ð60

True Voice

Note ON

Note OFF

1Ð127

Velocity

9n, V=0

After

Touch

Key's

Ch's

Pitch Bend

*10

*2 see Ò#NotesÓ

0, 32

6, 38

98, 99

Bank Select

Send Level/Master Level

Send Pan/Master Balance

Master -L Level Meter

Master -R Level Meter

AUX -L Level Meter

AUX -R Level Meter

EQ L Gain/MST EFF1 Send Lev.

EQ L Freq./MST EFF1 Send Bal.

EQ M Gain/MST EFF2 Send Lev.

EQ M Freq./MST EFF2 Send Bal.

EQ M Q

EQ H Gain

EQ H Freq.

AUX Send Level

AUX Send Pan

EFF1 Send Lev./MST EFF1 RTN Lev.

EFF1 Send Pan/MST EFF1 RTN Bal.

EFF2 Send Lev./MST EFF2 RTN Lev.

EFF2 Send Pan/MST EFF2 RTN Bal.

TRACK STATUS

Data Entry LSB, MSB

Vocoder 2

Data Inclement

Data Decrement

NRPN LSB, MSB

Control

Change

*11

Program

Change

0Ð99

0Ð7

**************

: True #

Effect #0 Ð #99

Scene #1 Ð #8

System Exclucive

: Quarter Frame:

: Song Pos

: Song Sel

System

Common

: Tune

System

Real Time : Commands

: Clock

: All sound off

Reset all controllers

Aux

Message

: Local ON/OFF

: All Notes OFF

: Active Sense

: System Reset

* 1 MIDI Metronome only

* 2 MID: CtrType=C.C. only

* 3 Effect when MIDI CH=1, 2. Scene when CH=15.

* 4 MID:SysEx.Tx=On only

* 5 MID:SysEx.Rx=On only

* 7 Syn:Gen.=MTC only

* 8 Syn:Gen.=MIDIclk or SyncTr

* 9 Sync Track of Recording only

*10 Receives only when effect Algorithm 27 (Voice

Transformer) is selected, and MIDI Control SW is On.

*11 Receives only when effect Algorithm 28 (Vocoder 2)

is selected, and Hold=MIDI.

Notes

* 6 When "MID:CtrlType=Excl", MIXER Set

and MMC

Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO

O : Yes

X : No

Note: The mixer operation is transmitted and received through the MIDI Control Change. Therefore, general MIDI Sequencers can record or play the mixer

operation simply. The VS-880 uses some Control Change Number in order to original parameter controls which is different from the MIDI standard.

1 4 3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Mix e r se ctio n b lo ck d ia g ra m

■ IN PUT➝TRACK m o d e

MIX(L, R)

AUX(A, B)

EFFECT1(L, R)

EFFECT2(L, R)

Channel 1–8

Input Select

INPUT1

Recorder

MIX Sw

AUX Sw

Source

Rec

Ch.Strip

Fader

Pan

Ch.Strip

EQ/Eff

Track 1

V-Track 1–8

Mute

Play

EQ/Eff

PreIns

DIGITAL L

Level

Lev/Bal

AUX SEND(A, B)

EFFECT1 Send

EFFECT2 Send

EFFECT1 Return

EFFECT2 Return

PreIns

MIX L

EFFECT1

Level

Track

Status

AUX L

EFFECT2

Level

Insert Master

Sw Mode

Ch.Strip (Channel Strip Line)

EQ Sw

Lev/Bal

Off

MASTER OUT(L, R)

PHONES(L, R)

EFFECT

(Insert)

INPUT1, 2

INPUT3, 4

Effect

Level

Effect

Level

Lev/Bal

DIGITAL OUT(L, R)

DIGITAL L, R

■ IN PUT MIX m o d e a n d TRACK MIX m o d e

MIX(L, R)

REC 1-2

REC 3-4

REC 5-6

REC 7-8

AUX(A, B)

EFFECT1(L, R)

EFFECT2(L, R)

Input Mix : Channel 1–6 (Input 1–4, Digital -L/-R)

EFFECT

(Insert)

EQ Sw

BUSS Sw

INPUT1

Fader

Pan

Level

Effect

Level

AUX Sw

Level

Lev/Bal

AUX Send

EFFECT1

Level

EFFECT1 Send

EFFECT2 Send

EFFECT1 Return

EFFECT2 Return

EFFECT2

Level

Channel 1

Track Mix : Channel 1–8

Recorder

BUSS Sw

REC1

Source

Rec

Ch.Strip

Fader

Pan

Ch.Strip

AUX Sw

Level

Track 1

V-Track 1–8

Mute

Play

EQ/Eff

PreIns

EQ/Eff

PreIns

EFFECT1

Level

Track

Status

EFFECT2

Level

Master

Mode

Insert

Channel1

Lev/Bal

MASTER OUT(L, R)

PHONES(L, R)

Effect

Ch.Strip (Channel Strip Line)

EQ Sw

DIGITAL OUT(L, R)

EFFECT

(Insert)

Level

Effect

Level

1 4 4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Glo ssa ry

COSM

Sync track

COSM stands for Composite Object Sound Modeling. This

is Òa technology which combines multiple sound models to

create new sounds,Ó which was first used on the RolandÕs

VG-8 V-Guitar System. For example, sounds created on the

VG-8 are the result of a variety of sound models (elements)

such as the pickup, the body of the guitar, the guitar amp,

mic, and speaker etc.

When a VS8F-1 effect expansion board is installed, the VS-

880 will be able to apply effects using COSM (such as guitar

amp simulation) without the need for any other equipment.

(p.46)

This is a track provided separately from the audio recording

track, for the purpose of recording MIDI Clock data. The

Sync track records the MIDI Clock messages that are trans-

mitted from a MIDI sequencer etc. By transmitting these

MIDI Clock messages back to the MIDI sequencer, it will be

possible to synchronize even to a song that contains com-

plex tempo changes. In this case, the VS-880 will be the mas-

ter and the MIDI sequencer will be the slave. (p.91)

Scrub

This is an editing technique in which a very short section of

audio is played back repeatedly while you move the current

time location, similar to the result of manually moving a reel

of analog tape while it remains in contact with the playback

head. This is a convenient way to ÒcueÓ a desired location in

the recording. Since the playback pitch and formats will not

change, cueing is possible with substantial accuracy. (p.77)

MTC

MTC stands for MIDI Time Code. This is a group of mes-

sages which are transmitted and received between MIDI

devices to synchronize their operation. Unlike MIDI Clock

messages, MTC specifies an absolute time. Like SMPTE time

code, MTC also supports a variety of frame rates. If you wish

to use MTC to synchronize the operation of two devices,

both devices must be set to the same frame rate. (p.86)

Tempo map

Data describing the songÕs measures, beats and tempo. By

transmitting this data to a MIDI sequencer etc., synchro-

nized operation with an external MIDI device is possible.

(p.89)

RSS

RSS stands for Roland Sound System. This is an effect

which allows a sound source to be placed in three-dimen-

sional space when played back on a conventional stereo sys-

tem. The sound can be placed not only in front of the listen-

er, but also directly to the side, above, below, and behind

the listener. (VS8F-1 OwnerÕs manual p.33)

Vari-pitch

When a song is played back on the VS-880, this function

allows the playback speed of the song can be adjusted in

order to match the pitch with instruments whose tuning is

not easily changed.

S/P DIF

S/P DIF stands for Sony/Philips Digital Interface Format.

This is a specifications for transmitting and receiving stereo

digital audio signals between digital audio devices. The VS-

880 provides coaxial connectors which support S/P DIF.

(p.72)

SMPTE time code

This is a signal format defined by the American organization

SMPTE (Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers)

which is used to synchronize the operation of video or audio

devices. SMPTE specifies Òhours:minutes:seconds:framesÓ to

indicate the address of each frame of a video image. For this

reason, there are a variety of frame rates.

Auto mix

This is data which records INPUT➝TRACK, INPUT MIX,

TRACK MIX and Master block settings of the mixer. Mixer

settings for a specific time location are referred to as a

Snapshot. Data which records time-variant changes in

mixer settings such as fade-in or fade-out is referred to as

Realtime data.

Scene

This is data which records INPUT➝TRACK, INPUT MIX,

TRACK MIX and Master block mixer settings and effect set-

tings for a specific moment in time. Even after mixing oper-

ations have been performed repeatedly, a Scene can be

recalled to instantly restore the settings for fader, pan and

effect algorithm etc. that were in use when the Scene was

stored. (p.51)

1 4 5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Sp e cifica tio n s

VS-880: Digital Studio Workstation

● Nominal Output Level

AUX Send: -10 dBm

Master Out: -10 dBm

● Tracks

Track:

V-Track: 64 (8 V-Tracks per each Track)

● Output Impedance

AUX Send: 1.6 k½

Master Outk: 1.6 k½

Headphone: 100 ½

* Up to 4 tracks can be recorded simultaneously, and up to

8 tracks can be played back simultaneously.

● Maximum Useful Capacity

32 G bytes: 1 G bytes x 4 (Partition) x 8 (Disk Drive)

● Recommended load Impedance

AUX Send: 10 k½ or greater

Master Out: 10 k½ or greater

Headphone: 8Ð50 ½

● Internal Memory

Songs: 200 (each pertition)

● Residual Noise Level

● Equalizer

AUX Send: -91 dBm or less

Master Out: -91 dBm or less

(input terminated with 1 k½, INPUT SENS = +4 dBm, IHF-

A, typ.)

HI, MID, LOW (at INPUT➝TRACK mode)

HI, LOW (at INPUT MIX or TRACK MIX mode)

● Data Format

Mastering (MAS)

Multitrack 1 (MT1)

Multitrack 2 (MT2)

Live (LIV)

● Interface

SCSI:

DB-25 type

Digital I/O: Coaxial (conforms to S/P DIF)

● Display

70.6 x 24.5 mm (LCD)

● Signal Processing

AD Conversion: 18 bit, 256 times oversampling

DA Conversion: 18 bit, 8 times oversampling

Internal Processing: 24 bit (mixer section)

● Connectors

SCSI Connector (DB-25 type)

MIDI Connectors (IN, OUT/THRU)

Digital In Connector (coaxial type)

Digital Out Connector (coaxial type)

Foot Switch Jack (1/4 inch phone type)

Headphone Jack (1/4 inch phone type)

Input A Jacks 1 to 4 (1/4 inch phone type)

Input B Jacks 1 to 4 (RCA phono type)

AUX Send Jacks A, B (RCA phono type)

Master Out Jacks L, R (RCA phono type)

● Sample Rate

48.0 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32.0 kHz

● Frequency Response

Sample Rate

48.0 kHz

44.1 kHz

32.0 kHz

10 Hz Ð 22.6 kHz (+0/-3 dB)

10 Hz Ð 21.0 kHz (+0/-3 dB)

10 Hz Ð 15.5 kHz (+0/-3 dB)

● Total Harmonic Distortion

0.08 % or less (INPUT SENS = -10 dBm, 1 kHz at nominal

output level, recording mode: MAS)

● Power Supply

AC 117 V, AC 230 V, or AC 240 V

● Recording Time (at 1 G bytes, 1 track)

Recording mode Sample rate

● Power Consumption

22 W (including Internal hard disk)

48.0 kHz

44.1 kHz

32.0 kHz

● Dimensions

434 (W) x 317 (D) x 88 (H) mm

17-1/8 (W) x 12-1/2 (D) x 3-1/2 (H) inches

Mastering

Multitrack 1

Multitrack 2

Live

185 minutes 202 minutes 278 minutes

371 minutes 404 minutes 557 minutes

495 minutes 539 minutes 742 minutes

594 minutes 646 minutes 891 minutes

● Weight

4.0 kg (excluding Internal Hard Disk)

8 lbs 14 oz

* The above-listed recording times are approximate. Times

may be slightly shorter depending on the specifications of

the disk drive and on the number of songs that were cre-

ated.

● Accessories

AC Cord

● Nominal Input Level (Variable)

Input A: -50 Ð +4 dBm

OwnerÕs Manual

V-XPANDED Sticker

Input B: -50 Ð +4 dBm

● Options

● Input Impedance

Input A: 20 k½

Internal Hard Disk Drive Unit: HDP88 Series

Effect Expansion Board: VS8F-1

Input B: 20 k½

0 dBm = 0.775 V rms

* In the interest of product improvement, the specifications

and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change with-

out prior notice.

1 4 6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ab o u t th e V-XPAN DED stick e r

The VS-880 system software update adds several special

operations to the top panel. Affix the included sticker to the

top panel as follows for your reference.

■ LO CATO R b u tto n s

[SCENE]+[TAP] will take a snapshot of the auto mix (p.18).

[SCENE]+[PREV] will create a gradation in the auto mix

(with the previous mark point) (p.18).

■ Ch a n n e l fa d e rs

When the Voice Transformer effect is being used, the effect

can be adjusted by the channel faders (p.31).

[SCENE]+[NEXT] will create a gradation in the auto mix

(with the next mark point) (p.18).

[TRACK]+[LOC1/5] allows direct entry of the Track Edit

condition Start point (p.79).

[TRACK]+[LOC2/6] allows direct entry of the Track Edit

condition From point (p.79).

[TRACK]+[LOC3/7] allows direct entry of the Track Edit

condition End point (p.79).

BUSS

AUX

BUSS

AUX

BUSS

(dB)

[TRACK]+[LOC4/8] allows direct entry of the Track Edit

condition To point (p.79).

-4

LOCATOR

MARKER

-8

TAP

LOOP

AUTO PUNCH NUMERICS

-12

-18

-24

GRADATION

SNAP SHOT

-36

LOC 1l

LOC 2l

LOC 3l

LOC 4l

CLEAR

SCENE

ROBOT

PITCH

FORMANT MIX BALANCE

REVERB

CLEAR

AUTO MIX

START

FROM

END

■ SELECT (Se le ct b u tto n )

[SCENE]+[SELECT] will turn auto mix on/off (p.18).

■ Tra n sp o se co n tro l

[SCENE]+[REC] initiates realtime recording of auto mix

(p.18).

MIXER MODE

SELECT

INPUT

INPUT MIX

TRACK MIX

TRACK

AUTO MIX ON / OFF

REC

AUTO MIX REC

■ EDIT CO N DITIO N b u tto n s

The number of items selectable by [SYSTEM] has increased.

SYSTEM

Systeemm

MIDI

DISK

Sync/Tempo

Scenee/Auto-Mix

Drive Select

e Select

Initialize

- Initialize

Check

1 4 7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

About the included sticker

■ Sp e cia l k e y o p e ra tio n s

From the list of special Key operations (p.136), those of special usefulness are given below.

1 4 8

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In d e x

Display

Switching the contents of the display ............................ 114

Adjusting the brightness of the display ........................ 114

Drop format ............................................................................. 86

[A]

Analog tape recorder ............................................................. 46

Auto mix .................................................................................. 17

Using auto mix .................................................................... 17

Recording auto mix (Snapshot) ........................................ 18

Recording time-varying changes in auto mix (Realtime)

..................................... 18

[E]

Equalizer

Adjusting an equalizer ....................................................... 67

Using a 3-band equalizer ................................................... 20

Error level................................................................................. 88

Events ....................................................................................... 19

Exclusive messages ................................................................ 85

External disk drives

Connecting an external disk drive ................................. 130

Initializing an external disk drive (Drive Initialize) ...... 93

Saving a song to an external disk drive (Song Copy) ... 94

Loading a song from an external disk drive ................... 96

External effect devices ......................................................... 127

Applying an external effect device during song playback

................................... 127

[B]

Bar display ............................................................................. 114

Switching the bar display .................................................... 114

[C]

Channel .................................................................................... 46

Channel edit ............................................................................ 54

Channel fader

Using the channel faders to adjust the effect .................. 31

Recording channel fader movements (auto mix) ........... 18

Storing channel fader settings (Scene) ............................. 51

Channel link .......................................................................... 112

Compu mix

Storing compu mix ........................................................... 121

Playing back compu mix ................................................. 121

Contrast ................................................................................. 114

Control change messages

Using control change messages to modify effect settings

..................................... 43

Using control change messages to modify mixer settings

................................... 121

Applying an external effect device during track bouncing

................................... 127

[F]

Fader edit ................................................................................. 31

Fader match ............................................................................. 21

Foot switch

Using a foot switch to playback/stop a song ............... 110

Using a foot switch to punch-in ....................................... 65

Frames

Moving in steps of a frame ................................................ 57

Moving in steps of 1/10th of a frame .............................. 57

Current drive .......................................................................... 93

Changing the current drive ............................................... 93

[D]

DAT

[G]

GPI .................................................................................... 65, 110

Guitar amp simulator

Applying the guitar amp simulator during recording

..................................... 35

Recording from DAT ......................................................... 72

Mixing down to DAT ......................................................... 72

Saving a song to DAT (Backup) ....................................... 97

Loading a song from DAT (Recover) .............................. 98

Checking song names that were saved to DAT (Name)

.................................... 99

Checking the status of performance data that was saved

to DAT (Verify) ................................................................... 99

Destructive editing ................................................................. 76

Digital compact cassette ........................................................ 97

Digital disk recorder .............................................................. 46

Digital device

Connecting a digital device ............................................... 97

Recording from a digital device ....................................... 72

DIGITAL IN connector

Recording from the DIGITAL IN connector ................... 72

Digital interface .................................................................... 145

Disk drive

[H]

Hum canceller ......................................................................... 28

Headphones ............................................................................ 16

[I]

IDE .......................................................................................... 130

Initialize (Mixer/System) .................................................... 116

INPUT MIX

Using 3-band equalizers in INPUT MIX ......................... 20

INPUT➝TRACK

Inserting effects in INPUT➝TRACK during recording

..................................... 35

Mixing a stereo source in INPUT➝TRACK ................... 21

Connecting a disk drive ................................................... 130

Initializing the disk (Drive Initialize) .............................. 93

Saving a song to a disk drive (Song Copy) ..................... 94

Loading a song from a disk drive .................................... 96

Checking the reliability of a disk drive (Surface Scan)

.................................... 38

Checking whether a disk drive is damaged (Drive Check)

..................................... 38

1 4 9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Numeric keys .......................................................................... 44

[L]

Locate bank

[O ]

Switching the locate bank .................................................. 57

Locate point

Overdubbing ........................................................................... 64

Registering a locate point .................................................. 57

Moving to a locate point .................................................... 58

Modifying the location of a locate point ......................... 57

Deleting a locate point ....................................................... 58

Lo-fi processor ........................................................................ 25

[P]

PAN knobs

Recording PAN knob movements (Auto mix) ............... 18

Recording PAN knob settings (Scene) ............................. 51

Partitions

Specifying the size of a partition .................................... 131

Switching partitions ......................................................... 131

Peaking type (equalizer) ........................................................ 50

Play list ................................................................................... 114

Post level ................................................................................ 114

Pre level ................................................................................. 114

Preview

Changing the preview length (time) ................................ 76

Program change messages

Using program change messages to select effects ......... 43

Using program change messages to select scenes ......... 43

Punch-in

[M]

Loop recording ....................................................................... 66

Mark point

Registering a mark point ................................................... 59

Moving to a mark point ..................................................... 59

Modifying the location of a mark point .......................... 60

Deleting a mark point ........................................................ 60

Creating a sync track from mark points .......................... 40

Creating a tempo map from mark points ....................... 41

Master fader ............................................................................ 13

MASTER OUT

Inserting effect into the MASTER OUT ........................... 36

Master out mode .................................................................. 140

Master tape .............................................................................. 67

Metronome

Sounding the metronome ................................................ 109

Sounding the metronome on an external MIDI device

................................... 109

Mic simulator .......................................................................... 32

MIDI

Using MIDI to switch the track status ............................. 86

MIDI sequencers

Synchronizing a MIDI sequencer to the VS-880 ............ 88

Synchronizing the VS-880 to a MIDI sequencer ............ 87

Using the tempo map to synchronize with a MIDI

sequencer ............................................................................. 89

Using the sync track to synchronize with a MIDI

sequencer ............................................................................. 91

MIDI implementation chart ................................................ 143

MIDI clock

Recording MIDI clock on the sync track ......................... 92

MIDI time code (MTC)

Changing the frame rate of MIDI time code (MTC) ...... 86

Using MIDI time code (MTC) to synchronize operation

..................................... 86

MIX buss .................................................................................. 50

Mix down ................................................................................ 72

Mixer

Storing mixer settings (Scene) .......................................... 51

Storing mixer settings (Auto mix) .................................... 17

Initializing mixer settings ................................................ 116

Mixer mode

Switching the mixer mode ................................................ 51

MMC ...................................................................................... 122

Mute ......................................................................................... 55

Punching-in manually (Manual punch-in) ..................... 64

Punching-in automatically (Auto punch-in) .................. 65

Punch-out

Punching-out manually (Manual punch-in) .................. 64

Punching-out automatically (Auto punch-in) ................ 65

[R]

Random access ........................................................................ 53

Realtime modify filter ............................................................ 26

REC buss .................................................................................. 50

Reverb

Applying reverb ............................................................... 100

Applying reverb while recording .................................. 102

Removable disk .................................................................... 130

RSS .......................................................................................... 145

[S]

S/P DIF .................................................................................. 145

Sample rate

Changing the sample rate ................................................. 62

Checking the sample rate .................................................. 72

Scene

Registering a scene ............................................................. 52

Switching scenes ................................................................. 52

Deleting a scene .................................................................. 52

SCMS ........................................................................................ 72

SCSI cables ............................................................................. 130

SCSI devices

Setting the ID number of a SCSI device ........................ 131

Connecting two or more SCSI devices (SCSI chain) .... 130

Scrub

Scrub length (changing the time) ..................................... 77

Sequential access .................................................................... 53

Shelving type (equalizer) ...................................................... 50

Shut-down ............................................................................... 75

SMPTE time code ................................................................... 56

Solo ......................................................................................... 111

[N ]

Noise suppressor .............................................................. 26, 28

Non-destructive editing ........................................................ 76

Non-drop format .................................................................... 86

Note messages ........................................................................ 85

1 5 0

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Song

Creating a new song (Song New) .................................... 62

[V]

Vari-pitch ............................................................................... 111

Vocal canceller ........................................................................ 28

Vocoder

Naming a song (Song Name) ............................................ 62

Saving a song (Song Store) ................................................ 74

Selecting a different song (Song Select) ........................... 75

Copying a song (Song Copy) ............................................ 94

Erasing a song (Song Erase) ............................................ 113

Protecting a song from erasure (Song Protect) ............... 74

Erasing only unneeded data from a song (Song Optimize)

................................... 113

Applying the vocoder while recording ......................... 104

Voice transformer

Using the channel faders to adjust the voice transformer

..................................... 31

Using a MIDI keyboard to adjust the voice transformer

..................................... 31

Moving to the beginning of a song (Song Top) .............. 56

Moving to the end of a song (Song End) ......................... 56

Sources ..................................................................................... 46

Space chorus ............................................................................ 24

Stereo in ................................................................................... 21

Sub frame ................................................................................. 57

Sync source .............................................................................. 91

Sync track

Recording MIDI clock on the sync track ......................... 92

Using the sync track to synchronize operation with an

external MIDI device .......................................................... 91

Specifying an offset for the sync track ............................. 42

Creating a tempo map from the sync track .................... 41

Creating the sync track automatically ............................. 41

VS8F-1 ...................................................................................... 54

V-tracks

Switching V-tracks ............................................................. 63

[Z]

Zero return .............................................................................. 14

Zip disks

Initializing a Zip disk (Initialize) ...................................... 93

Saving a song on a single Zip disk (Playable) ................ 94

Saving a song on multiple Zip disks (Archive) .............. 95

Loading a song from multiple Zip disks (Extract) ........ 96

Zip drive

Connecting a Zip drive ...................................................... 93

[T]

Tap marker function .............................................................. 59

Tempo map

Creating a tempo map ....................................................... 90

Changing the initial tempo of the tempo map ............... 90

Changing the tempo mid-way through the tempo map

..................................... 91

Specifying an offset for the tempo map .......................... 42

Terminator ............................................................................. 130

Terminator power supply ................................................... 130

Time compression/expansion .............................................. 84

Tracks

Erasing a track (Track Erase) ............................................ 81

Inserting blank space into a track (Track Insert) ............ 82

Exchanging track contents with another track (Track

Exchange) ............................................................................. 81

Deleting part of a track (Track Cut) ................................. 83

Re-using part of a track (Track Copy) ............................. 78

Changing the time at which a track begins to sound

(Track Move) ....................................................................... 79

Re-recording several tracks onto another track (Track

Bouncing) ............................................................................. 67

TRACK MIX

Using 3-band equalizers in TRACK MIX ........................ 20

Track status

Switching the track status ................................................. 55

Using MIDI to switch the track status ............................. 86

[U]

Undo

Preventing the undo message from being displayed .. 113

Canceling undo (Redo) .................................................... 113

1 5 1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

■ Tra ck sh e e t

1 5 2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

For Europe

This product complies with the requirements of European Directives EMC 89/336/EEC and LVD 73/23/EEC.

For the USA

FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION

RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential

installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee

that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the following measures:

–

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.

This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.

For Canada

NOTICE

CLASS B

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions set out in the Radio Interference

Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications.

AVIS

CLASSE B

Cet appareil numérique ne dépasse pas les limites de la classe B au niveau des émissions de bruits radioélectriques

fixés dans le Règlement des signaux parasites par le ministère canadien des Communications.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In fo rm a tio n

When you need repair service, call your local Roland Service Station or the authorized Roland distributor in your country as

shown below.

ARGEN TIN A

Instrumentos Musicales S.A.

Florida 638

(1005) Buenos Aires

ARGENTINA

TEL: (01) 394 4029

IN DO N ESIA

O MAN

BELGIUM/ HOLLAND/

LUXEMBO URG

Roland Benelux N. V.

Houtstraat 1 B-2260 Oevel-

Westerlo BELGIUM

RUSSIA

PETROSHOP Ltd.

11 Sayanskaya Street Moscow

11531, RUSSIA

PT Galestra Inti

Kompleks Perkantoran

Duta Merlin Blok E No.6Ñ7

Jl. Gajah Mada No.3Ñ5,

Jakarta 10130,

OHI Electronics & Trading

Co. LLC

P. O. Box 889 Muscat

Sultanate of OMAN

TEL: 706 010

TEL: 095 307 4892

TEL: (014) 575811

Slami Music Company

Sadojava-Triumfalnaja st., 16

103006 Moscow, RUSSIA

TEL: 095 209 2193

INDONESIA

TEL: (021) 6335416

BRAZIL

Roland Brasil Ltda.

R. Coronel Octaviano da Silveira

203 05522-010

Sao Paulo BRAZIL

TEL: (011) 843 9377

Q ATAR

Badie Studio & Stores

P.O.Box 62,

DOHA QATAR

TEL: 423554

BELO RUSSIA

TUSHE

UL. Rabkorovskaya 17

220001 MINSK

TEL: (0172) 764-911

KO REA

Cosmos Corporation

Service Station

261 2nd Floor Nak-Won Arcade

Jong-Ro ku, Seoul, KOREA

TEL: (02) 742 8844

SPAIN

Roland Electronics

de Espa–a, S. A.

Calle Bolivia 239 08020 Barcelona,

SPAIN

SAUDI ARABIA

Abdul Latif S. Al-Ghamdi

CYPRUS

Radex Sound Equipment Ltd.

17 Diagorou St., P.O.Box 2046,

Nicosia CYPRUS

CAN ADA

Roland Canada Music Ltd.

(Head Office)

5480 Parkwood Way Richmond

B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA

TEL: (0604) 270 6626

Trading Establishment

Middle East Commercial Center

Al-Khobar Dharan Highway

W/hamood st.

P. O. Box 3631 Al-Khober

31952 SAUDIARABIA

TEL: (03) 898 2332

TEL: (93) 308 1000

MALAYSIA

Bentley Music SDN BHD

No.142, Jalan Bukit Bintang 55100

Kuala Lumpur, MALAYSIA

TEL: (03) 2443333

TEL: (02) 453 426

SW EDEN

(02) 466 423

Roland Scandinavia A/S

Danvik Center 28 A, 2 tr.

S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN

TEL: (08) 702 0020

DEN MARK

Roland Canada Music Ltd.

(Toronto Office)

Unit 2, 109 Woodbine Downs

Blvd, Etobicoke, ON

M9W 6Y1 CANADA

TEL: (0416) 213 9707

Roland Scandinavia A/S

Langebrogade 6 Post Box 1937

DK-1023 Copenhagen K.

DENMARK

PHILIPPIN ES

SYRIA

Technical Light & Sound

Center

Khaled Ebn Al Walid St.

P.O.Box 13520

Damascus - SYRIA

TEL: (011) 2235 384

G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc.

339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue

Makati, Metro Manila 1200,

PHILIPPINES

SW ITZERLAN D

Roland (Switzerland) AG

Musitronic AG

Gerberstrasse 5, CH-4410 Liestal,

SWITZERLAND

TEL: 32 95 3111

TEL: (02) 899 9801

MEXICO

FRAN CE

MUSIKENGRO

Zac de Folliouses 01706

Les Echets Miribel FRANCE

TEL: 472 26 2700

Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v.

Av. Toluca No. 323 Col. Olivar de

los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F.

MEXICO

TEL: (061) 921 1615

SIN GAPO RE

Swee Lee Company

BLOCK 231, Bain Street #03-23

Bras Basah Complex,

SINGAPORE 0718

UKRAIN E

TURKEY

TIC-TAC

Barkat Sanayi ve Ticaret

Siraselvier Cad. Guney Ishani No.

86/6 Taksim, Istanbul TURKEY

TEL: (0212) 2499324

TEL: (525) 668 04 80

Mira Str. 19/108

FIN LAN D

Roland Scandinavia As,

Filial Finland

Lauttasaarentie 54 B

Fin-00201 Helsinki, FINLAND

P. O. Box No. 109

P.O.Box 180

295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE

TEL: (03131) 414-40

TEL: 3367886

La Casa Wagner de

Guadalajara s.a. de c.v.

Av. Corona No. 202 S.J.

Guadalajara, Jalisco Mexico

C.P.44100 MEXICO

CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE

LTD

U.A.E

Zak Electronics & Musical

Instruments Co.

Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg.,

No. 14, Grand Floor DUBAI

U.A.E.

P.O. Box 8050DUBAI, U.A.E

TEL: (04) 360715

335, Joo Chiat Road SINGAPORE

UN ITED KIN GDO M

Roland (U.K.) Ltd., Swansea

Office

Atlantic Close, Swansea

Enterprise Park SWANSEA

West Glamorgan SA7 9FJ,

UNITED KINGDOM

TEL: (01792) 702701

1542

TEL: 3450435

TEL: (03) 613 1414

TEL: (0) 682 4020

PAN AMA

Productos Superiores, S.A.

Apartado 655 - Panama 1

REP. DE PANAMA

GERMAN Y

Roland Elektronische

Musikinstrumente

Handelsgesellschaft mbH.

Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt,

GERMANY

TAIW AN

Siruba Enterprise (Taiwan)

Co., LTD.

Room. 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan

N.Road Sec.2 Taipei, TAIWAN,

R.O.C.

TEL: 26 3322

EGYPT

Al Fanny Trading Office

9, Ebn Hagar Ai Askalany Street,

Ard El Golf, Heliopolis, Cairo,

11341 EGYPT

U. S. A.

TEL: (040) 52 60090

TEL: (02) 561 3339

Roland Corporation U.S.

7200 Dominion Circle

Los Angeles, CA. 90040-3696,

U. S. A.

THAILAN D

GREECE

Theera Music Co. , Ltd.

330 Verng Nakorn Kasem, Soi 2,

Bangkok 10100, THAILAND

TEL: (02) 2248821

V. Dimitriadis & Co. Ltd.

20, Alexandras St. & Bouboulinas

54 St. 106 82 Athens, GREECE

TEL: (01) 8232415

TEL: (02) 4171828

(02) 4185531

TEL: (0213) 685 5141

KEN YA

VEN EZUELA

Musik Land Limited

P.O Box 12183 Moi Avenue

Nairobi Republic of KENYA

TEL: (2) 338 346

Musicland Digital C.A.

Av. Francisco de Miranda,

Centro Parque de Cristal, Nivel

C2 Local 20 Caracas

BAHRAIN

Moon Stores

Bad Al Bahrain Road,

P.O.Box 20077

State of BAHRAIN

TEL: 211 005

HUN GARY

Intermusica Ltd.

Warehouse Area ÔDEPOÕ Pf.83

H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY

TEL: (23) 338 041

VENEZUELA

TEL: (02) 285 9218

MAURITIO US

Philanne Music Center

4th, Floor Noll, Happy World

House Sir William Newton Street

Port Luis MAURITIOUS

TEL: 242 2986

IRELAN D

The Dublin Service Centre

Audio Maintenance Limited

11 Brunswick Place Dublin 2

Republic of IRELAND

AUSTRALIA

IRAN

TARADIS

Mir Emad Ave. No. 15, 10th street

P. O. Box 15875/4171 Teheran,

IRAN

Roland Corporation

Australia Pty. Ltd.

38 Campbell Avenue

Dee Why West. NSW 2099

AUSTRALIA

TEL: (01) 677322

REUN IO N

TEL: (021) 875 6524

FO - YAM Marcel

25 Rue Jules MermanZL

Chaudron - BP79 97491

Ste Clotilde REUNION

TEL: 28 29 16

TEL: (02) 982 8266

ITALY

ISRAEL

Halilit P. Greenspoon &

Sons Ltd.

8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St.

Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL

TEL: (03) 6823666

Roland Italy S. p. A.

Viale delle Industrie, 8

20020 Arese Milano, ITALY

TEL: (02) 93581311

N EW ZEALAN D

Roland Corporation (NZ) Ltd.

97 Mt. Eden Road, Mt. Eden,

Auckland 3, NEW ZEALAND

TEL: (09) 3098 715

SO UTH AFRICA

That Other Music Shop

(PTY) Ltd.

11 Melle Street (Cnr Melle and

Juta Street)

Braamfontein 2001

Republic of SOUTH AFRICA

TEL: (011) 403 4105

N O RW AY

Roland Scandinavia Avd.

Kontor Norge

Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95

Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo

NORWAY

JO RDAN

CHIN A

Beijing Xinghai Musical

Instruments Co., Ltd.

2 Huangmuchang Chao Yang

District, Beijing, CHINA

TEL: (010) 6774 7491

AMMAN Trading Agency

Prince Mohammed St. P. O. Box

825 Amman 11118 JORDAN

TEL: (06) 641200

TEL: 273 0074

Paul Bothner (PTY) Ltd.

17 Werdmuller Centre Claremont

7700

Republic of SOUTH AFRICA

TEL: (021) 64 4030

KUW AIT

Easa Husain Al-Yousifi

P.O. Box 126 Safat 13002

KUWAIT

PO LAN D

P. P. H. Brzostowicz Marian

UL. Blokowa 32, 03624 Warszawa

POLAND

HO N G KO N G

Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.

Service Division

22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen

Wan, New Territories,

HONG KONG

TEL: 5719499

TEL: (022) 679 44 19

AUSTRIA

PO RTUGAL

Caius - Tecnologias Audio e

LEBAN O N

A. Chahine & Fils

P.O. Box 16-5857 Gergi Zeidan St.

Chahine Building, Achrafieh

Beirut, LEBANON

E. Dematte &Co.

Neu-Rum Siemens-Strasse 4

AÐ6040 Innsbruck P.O.Box 83

AUSTRIA

TEL: 2415 0911

Musica , Lda.

Rue de Catarina 131

4000 Porto, PORTUGAL

TEL: (02) 38 4456

TEL: (0512) 26 44 260

TEL: (01) 335799

As of October, 28, 1996

01129434

'97-1-C3-21T

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PYLE Audio TV Mount PSWLE54 User Guide
Pyramid Technologies Time Clock 4000 User Guide
RedMax Edger HEZ2500S User Guide
Reebok Fitness Home Gym RBEX49840 User Guide
Revox Portable Speaker Integrated Speaker Systems User Guide
RoadPro Security Camera D3201 User Guide
Saitek Video Game Controller P990 User Guide
Samsung Digital Camera Digimax V4000 User Guide
Sanyo Answering Machine DAS 204 User Guide
Senco Nail Gun SCN125 User Guide